LIGHTHOUSE 3

version 3.11
Advanced operation instructions
English (en-US)
Date: 11-2019
Document number: 81370-14
© 2019 Raymarine UK Limited
Trademark and patents notice
Raymarine, Tacktick, Clear Pulse, Truzoom, SeaTalk , SeaTalk hs, SeaTalkng , and Micronet, are registered or
claimed trademarks of Raymarine Belgium.
FLIR, LightHouse, DownVision, SideVision, RealVision, HyperVision, Dragonfly, Element, Quantum,
Axiom, Instalert, Infrared Everywhere, The World’s Sixth Sense and ClearCruise are registered or claimed
trademarks of FLIR Systems, Inc.
All other trademarks, trade names, or company names referenced herein are used for identification only and
are the property of their respective owners.
This product is protected by patents, design patents, patents pending, or design patents pending.

Fair Use Statement

You may print no more than three copies of this manual for your own use. You may not make any further
copies or distribute or use the manual in any other way including without limitation exploiting the manual
commercially or giving or selling copies to third parties.

Software updates
Check the Raymarine website for the latest software releases for your product.
www.raymarine.com/software

Product documentation
The latest versions of all English and translated documents are available to download in
PDF format from the website: www.raymarine.com/manuals.
Please check the website to ensure you have the latest documentation.

Publication copyright
Copyright ©2019 Raymarine UK Ltd. All rights reserved.

English (en-US)
Document number: 81370-14
AQ;19026;2019-11-15T10:38:56
Contents
Chapter 1 Important information.................................................................................... 17
Disclaimers ................................................................................................................................ 17
Open source license agreements .......................................................................................... 17
Regulatory approvals ............................................................................................................... 17
Warranty registration ................................................................................................................ 17
Technical accuracy ................................................................................................................... 18

Chapter 2 Document and product information............................................................19

2.1 Product documentation..................................................................................................... 20
Video tutorials...................................................................................................................... 20
Applicable software version ................................................................................................ 20
Compatible MFDs ................................................................................................................ 20
New software features.......................................................................................................... 21
User manuals Print Shop ...................................................................................................... 21

Chapter 3 General information...................................................................................... 23

3.1 MFD and LightHouse third-party apps ............................................................................ 24
3.2 Sidebar ............................................................................................................................... 25
Customizing Sidebar data.................................................................................................... 25
Switching sidebars............................................................................................................... 26
Enable rudder bar ................................................................................................................ 26
3.3 Data overlays ..................................................................................................................... 27
Data overlay and Sidebar data items....................................................................................27
3.4 Menus ................................................................................................................................. 28
Controls and settings........................................................................................................... 29
3.5 MFD app settings menu ................................................................................................... 29
3.6 Editing the split ratio of a Splitscreen app page ........................................................... 30

Chapter 4 Set up............................................................................................................... 31

4.1 MFD physical buttons ........................................................................................................ 32
4.2 Axiom and Axiom XL......................................................................................................... 33
Powering on the display .......................................................................................................33
Powering off the display .......................................................................................................34
Switching on and off at the breaker......................................................................................34
4.3 Axiom Pro, eS Series and gS Series ............................................................................... 34
Powering on the display .......................................................................................................34
Powering off the display .......................................................................................................35
4.4 Switching on and off at the breaker................................................................................ 35
4.5 Getting started................................................................................................................... 35
First power up.......................................................................................................................35
First power up Data master selection ...................................................................................36
Startup wizard.......................................................................................................................36

5
 First power up Limitation on Use acknowledgement ...........................................................36
Multiple data sources (MDS) .................................................................................................36
Data sources menu............................................................................................................... 37
Identifying engines ............................................................................................................... 37
Configuring Transducer settings ..........................................................................................38
RealVision™ 3D AHRS calibration..........................................................................................38
Transducer calibration (iTC-5)...............................................................................................39
Assigning a function to the User Programmable Button (UPB)............................................. 41
Performing a settings or factory reset...................................................................................42
Importing user data...............................................................................................................42
4.6 Shortcuts ............................................................................................................................ 42
Taking a screenshot .............................................................................................................43
Activating touchlock .............................................................................................................43
Radar standby.......................................................................................................................43
Autopilot shortcuts................................................................................................................43
Adjusting brightness .............................................................................................................43
Disabling all sounders...........................................................................................................43
Bluetooth volume control .....................................................................................................43
4.7 Memory card compatibility ............................................................................................... 44
Removing MicroSD card from its adaptor .............................................................................45
Inserting a MicroSD card — Axiom variants ..........................................................................45
Inserting a MicroSD card — Axiom Pro variants....................................................................46
Inserting external storage devices - RCR..............................................................................46
4.8 Software updates .............................................................................................................. 47
Updating software using a memory card.............................................................................. 47
Updating software via the internet .......................................................................................48
4.9 Device pairing.................................................................................................................... 48
Pairing a RMK remote keypad ..............................................................................................48
Pairing with a Quantum Radar scanner ................................................................................48
Pairing a Bluetooth speaker .................................................................................................49

Chapter 5 Homescreen ...................................................................................................51

5.1 Accepting the Limitations on Use .................................................................................... 52
5.2 Homescreen overview ..................................................................................................... 52
5.3 MFD Apps........................................................................................................................... 53
5.4 Creating / Customizing an App page.............................................................................. 55
5.5 User profiles....................................................................................................................... 56
Demo profiles ...................................................................................................................... 56
5.6 Status area ......................................................................................................................... 58
Status area icons ................................................................................................................. 58
5.7 Satellite navigation / positioning ..................................................................................... 60
GNSS (GPS) Status............................................................................................................... 60

6
 GNSS (GPS) Settings............................................................................................................ 60
5.8 My data ................................................................................................................................ 61
Fuel/trip manager ................................................................................................................. 61
Files ......................................................................................................................................64
View PDFs ............................................................................................................................64
Import/export ........................................................................................................................64
5.9 Secure messaging ............................................................................................................ 65
Message inbox..................................................................................................................... 66
New broadcast..................................................................................................................... 66
New direct message ............................................................................................................ 66
Reply to messages................................................................................................................67
Onscreen keyboard ..............................................................................................................67
Message symbols .................................................................................................................67
5.10 Alarms ............................................................................................................................... 68
Alarm manager .................................................................................................................... 69
Alarm settings ........................................................................................................................71
External alarm speaker / buzzer ........................................................................................... 73
Acknowledging alarms ......................................................................................................... 73
Digital switching alarms ........................................................................................................ 73
5.11 Man Overboard (MOB) ..................................................................................................... 74
MOB mode............................................................................................................................75
5.12 Settings ............................................................................................................................. 75
Selecting display language................................................................................................... 77
Boat details ........................................................................................................................... 77
Units of measure.................................................................................................................. 80
Data master .......................................................................................................................... 81
Shared Brightness ................................................................................................................ 81
Customizing the splashscreen............................................................................................. 82
NMEA 0183 settings..............................................................................................................83
Responder setup ..................................................................................................................84
5.13 Connecting to a wireless display ................................................................................... 85
Disconnecting a wireless display......................................................................................... 86
Unpairing a wireless display ................................................................................................ 86

Chapter 6 Autopilot control ........................................................................................... 87

6.1 Autopilot control................................................................................................................. 88
Engaging the autopilot — Locked heading.......................................................................... 88
Engaging the autopilot — Navigation .................................................................................. 88
Engaging and disengaging the autopilot - physical buttons................................................ 89
Disengaging the autopilot ................................................................................................... 89
6.2 Pilot sidebar ....................................................................................................................... 89
6.3 Pilot pop-up......................................................................................................................... 91

7
 6.4 Autopilot Control — Advanced settings .......................................................................... 91

Chapter 7 Waypoints, Routes and Tracks .................................................................... 95

7.1 Waypoints ............................................................................................................................ 96
Placing a waypoint............................................................................................................... 96
Waypoint management........................................................................................................ 96
7.2 Routes ................................................................................................................................. 98
Creating a Route .................................................................................................................. 98
Autorouting .......................................................................................................................... 99
Importing a route ................................................................................................................ 100
Route management ............................................................................................................ 100
7.3 Tracks ..................................................................................................................................101
Creating a track .................................................................................................................. 102
Converting a track to a route .............................................................................................. 102
Track management............................................................................................................. 102

Chapter 8 Chart app ..................................................................................................... 105

8.1 Chart app overview...........................................................................................................106
Chart app controls .............................................................................................................. 107
Chart ranging and panning ................................................................................................ 107
Chart app context menu ..................................................................................................... 108
Selecting a chart card ......................................................................................................... 108
Chart modes ....................................................................................................................... 109
Vessel details....................................................................................................................... 110
Object selection and information......................................................................................... 110
Layers ................................................................................................................................... 111
View and motion.................................................................................................................. 112
Camera tracking .................................................................................................................. 112
8.2 Navigation ..........................................................................................................................113
Navigating to a waypoint or point of interest....................................................................... 113
Restarting cross track error (XTE) ........................................................................................ 113
Following a Route ................................................................................................................ 113
8.3 SAR (Search and Rescue) Patterns .................................................................................114
Sector search pattern .......................................................................................................... 114
Expanding square search pattern........................................................................................ 117
Creeping line / Parallel line search pattern.......................................................................... 121
8.4 Laylines..............................................................................................................................122
Sailing data page ................................................................................................................ 123
Laylines — system requirements ........................................................................................ 124
Enabling Laylines ................................................................................................................ 124
Laylines settings ................................................................................................................. 124
Displaying and interpreting laylines.................................................................................... 125
Displaying wind shift data ................................................................................................... 126

8
 8.5 Race Start Line (SmartStart) and Race Timer................................................................ 127
Creating the Race Start Line ............................................................................................... 128
Starting the Race Timer ...................................................................................................... 130
Race laylines....................................................................................................................... 130
Race sidebar ........................................................................................................................ 131
Dashboard .......................................................................................................................... 132
8.6 Target tracking .................................................................................................................132
Target vectors..................................................................................................................... 133
Dangerous targets alarm .................................................................................................... 134
Radar settings ..................................................................................................................... 135
AIS settings ......................................................................................................................... 136
AIS target symbols.............................................................................................................. 136
Blue Force overview ........................................................................................................... 139
Blue Force SITREP .............................................................................................................. 139
8.7 Collision avoidance ..........................................................................................................140
Enabling collision avoidance .............................................................................................. 142
Collision scenarios.............................................................................................................. 143
Example scenario 1 — Own vessel moving faster than target vessel ................................. 143
Example scenario 2 — Target vessel moving faster than your vessel ................................ 146
Example scenario 3 — Both vessels travelling at the same speed ..................................... 148
8.8 Target intercept................................................................................................................149
8.9 Tides mode .......................................................................................................................150
Using animation controls .................................................................................................... 150
Setting a specific date for animations.................................................................................. 151
Tide station information ....................................................................................................... 151
Current station information ................................................................................................. 152
Displaying tide or current graphs ....................................................................................... 154
8.10 RealBathy™ .......................................................................................................................154
Setting up and creating RealBathy contours ...................................................................... 155
8.11 Find nearest......................................................................................................................156
Search using find nearest ................................................................................................... 157
8.12 SonarChart™ Live.............................................................................................................158
Enabling SonarChart Live ................................................................................................... 159
8.13 UAV Chart integration ....................................................................................................159
Showing or hiding the UAV icon......................................................................................... 160
Performing a UAV Goto ...................................................................................................... 160
8.14 ClearCruise™ Augmented Reality ..................................................................................160
Field of View ........................................................................................................................ 161
8.15 Chart settings menu ........................................................................................................161

Chapter 9 Weather mode............................................................................................. 169

9.1 Weather mode................................................................................................................... 170

9
 9.2 Activating your SiriusXM receiver ................................................................................... 171
SR200 diagnostics mode .................................................................................................... 171
Weather receiver status....................................................................................................... 171
9.3 Animated weather............................................................................................................ 172
9.4 Weather mode context menu ......................................................................................... 173
9.5 Weather Radar layer ........................................................................................................ 173
9.6 Cities and Surface observation stations layers ............................................................ 175
9.7 Cloud top and Lightning layers....................................................................................... 176
9.8 Storm cast and Storm tracks layers ............................................................................... 177
9.9 Sea surface temperature and Surface pressure layers............................................... 178
Surface pressure patterns .................................................................................................. 179
9.10 Wind and Watchbox layers............................................................................................180
9.11 Wave direction, height and period layers......................................................................181

Chapter 10 Fishfinder app.............................................................................................183

10.1 Fishfinder app overview ................................................................................................. 184
Fishfinder app controls ....................................................................................................... 184
RealVision 3D controls........................................................................................................ 185
10.2 Opening the Fishfinder app ..........................................................................................186
10.3 Sonar channels................................................................................................................188
Selecting a Sonar channel .................................................................................................. 189
10.4 Placing a Waypoint (Sonar, DownVision and SideVision)..........................................189
Placing a waypoint RealVision 3D ...................................................................................... 189
10.5 Sonar scroll back ............................................................................................................190
10.6 Sonar sensitivity controls................................................................................................191
10.7 Fishfinder settings menu................................................................................................192

Chapter 11 Radar app .....................................................................................................197

11.1 Radar app overview..........................................................................................................198
Radar app controls.............................................................................................................. 198
Radar app context menu .................................................................................................... 199
Camera tracking ................................................................................................................ 200
11.2 Radar feature comparison ............................................................................................ 200
Compatible Radar scanners............................................................................................... 203
11.3 Opening the Radar app..................................................................................................203
Putting the radar into standby ........................................................................................... 204
Powering down your radar scanner................................................................................... 204
11.4 Set up ...............................................................................................................................205
Selecting a Radar scanner ................................................................................................. 205
Dual range ......................................................................................................................... 205
Timed Radar transmission ................................................................................................. 206
Setting open array antenna size ........................................................................................ 206
Bearing alignment.............................................................................................................. 206

10
 11.5 Radar modes ...................................................................................................................206
11.6 Range and bearing .........................................................................................................208
VRM (Variable Range Marker) / EBL (Electronic Bearing Line)........................................... 208
11.7 AIS targets.........................................................................................................................210
AIS target list....................................................................................................................... 210
AIS target symbols............................................................................................................... 211
AIS settings ......................................................................................................................... 213
11.8 Radar targets ....................................................................................................................214
Radar target acquisition data source requirements............................................................ 214
Radar target symbols.......................................................................................................... 215
Acquiring a target manually ................................................................................................ 216
Automatic target acquisition ............................................................................................... 216
Radar target list................................................................................................................... 217
Target settings.................................................................................................................... 218
Onscreen target settings ................................................................................................... 220
Clearing / resetting trails.................................................................................................... 220
Target context menu .......................................................................................................... 221
11.9 Dangerous targets alarm ................................................................................................221
11.10 Guard zone alarms ........................................................................................................222
11.11 Doppler Radar overview................................................................................................223
Doppler mode.................................................................................................................... 223
Doppler data source requirements.................................................................................... 224
11.12 Blank sectors..................................................................................................................224
11.13 Radar sensitivity controls..............................................................................................225
11.14 Radar settings ................................................................................................................226

Chapter 12 Dashboard app ...........................................................................................231

12.1 Dashboard app overview...............................................................................................232
Dashboard app controls .................................................................................................... 232
Switching data page .......................................................................................................... 233
Selecting Data pages to display ........................................................................................ 233
12.2 Default data pages ........................................................................................................ 233
12.3 Customizing existing Data pages ................................................................................ 234
Available data items........................................................................................................... 234
12.4 Dashboard settings menu............................................................................................. 238
12.5 Navigation and Sailing dials ..........................................................................................241
Sailing dials for laylines...................................................................................................... 242
Sailing data items............................................................................................................... 242
Race Start data items......................................................................................................... 243

Chapter 13 Yamaha app ...............................................................................................245

13.1 Yamaha app overview....................................................................................................246
Requirements .................................................................................................................... 246

11
 Yamaha app controls ......................................................................................................... 246
Switching data page ...........................................................................................................247
13.2 Customizing Data pages............................................................................................... 247
Available data items........................................................................................................... 248
13.3 Engine page.....................................................................................................................251
Engines .............................................................................................................................. 252
Transmission ...................................................................................................................... 253
Status and warning indicators............................................................................................ 254
Tanks ................................................................................................................................. 255
Engine trim......................................................................................................................... 255
Troll mode.......................................................................................................................... 256
13.4 Settings............................................................................................................................256
Fault codes ........................................................................................................................ 256
Maintenance ...................................................................................................................... 256
Advanced............................................................................................................................257

Chapter 14 Video app ...................................................................................................259

14.1 Video app overview........................................................................................................260
Video app pages ............................................................................................................... 260
Renaming video feeds ........................................................................................................ 261
Video app controls ............................................................................................................. 261
Pan, Tilt, Zoom (PTZ) camera controls ............................................................................... 262
14.2 Opening the Video app.................................................................................................262
Selecting a video feed ....................................................................................................... 263
Dual streaming................................................................................................................... 263
14.3 Video app settings.........................................................................................................264
14.4 Maritime (M-Series) camera compatibility ................................................................... 267

Chapter 15 ClearCruise (Object Detection and Augmented Reality) ..................... 273

15.1 ClearCruise™ features..................................................................................................... 274
15.2 Camera setup ................................................................................................................. 275
Fixed camera calibration.....................................................................................................275
Pan and Tilt camera calibration .......................................................................................... 277
15.3 AR200 setup for Augmented Reality .......................................................................... 279
15.4 ClearCruise™ object detection overview..................................................................... 279
ClearCruise settings (Object Detection) ............................................................................ 280
15.5 Augmented Reality (AR) overview ................................................................................281
15.6 Augmented Reality flags...............................................................................................282
Selected flags .................................................................................................................... 283
Goto flag ............................................................................................................................ 285
15.7 ClearCruise settings (Augmented Reality) ..................................................................286
Range limit ..........................................................................................................................287
15.8 Roll correction ................................................................................................................288

12
 15.9 AR200 Calibration (Linearization) ................................................................................290
Magnetic deviation ............................................................................................................ 290
AR200 calibration settings ................................................................................................ 290
Continual monitoring and adaptation ................................................................................ 291
Compass lock .................................................................................................................... 292

Chapter 16 Audio app ...................................................................................................293

16.1 Audio app overview........................................................................................................294
Compatible entertainment systems ................................................................................... 294
Audio app controls ............................................................................................................ 296
16.2 Opening the Audio app.................................................................................................298
16.3 Getting started................................................................................................................300
Selecting an audio zone .................................................................................................... 300
Selecting an audio source ................................................................................................. 300
Muting and unmuting......................................................................................................... 300
Browsing for tracks ............................................................................................................. 301
Browsing for stations / channels......................................................................................... 301
Saving presets .................................................................................................................... 301
Powering off entertainment systems .................................................................................. 301
16.4 Audio app menu options...............................................................................................302
Audio app settings menu................................................................................................... 303
Adjusting balance and fade controls ................................................................................. 304
Adjusting multi-zone controls ............................................................................................ 304
SR200 diagnostics mode .................................................................................................. 305

Chapter 17 PDF Viewer app ......................................................................................... 307

17.1 PDF Viewer app overview .............................................................................................308
17.2 Opening PDF files ..........................................................................................................308
17.3 PDF Viewer controls ......................................................................................................308
17.4 Searching a PDF..............................................................................................................310

Chapter 18 UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle) app ...................................................... 311

18.1 UAV disclaimer.................................................................................................................312
18.2 UAV app overview..........................................................................................................312
Compatible UAVs ............................................................................................................... 313
UAV sport mode ................................................................................................................. 313
UAV app settings menu...................................................................................................... 313
18.3 UAV pre-requisites ........................................................................................................ 314
Removing the RC cable ...................................................................................................... 314
UAV controller connection ................................................................................................. 315
18.4 UAV precautions .............................................................................................................316
No-fly zones.........................................................................................................................317
18.5 Getting started ................................................................................................................ 317
18.6 UAV app page................................................................................................................. 317

13
 18.7 Opening the UAV app .................................................................................................... 318
18.8 Launching the UAV ........................................................................................................320
18.9 Controlling the UAV in flight.........................................................................................320
18.10 Retrieving your UAV .....................................................................................................321
18.11 Disconnect UAV remote controller from MFD ............................................................321
18.12 Fish on / Circle me mode..............................................................................................321
18.13 UAV Chart integration..................................................................................................322
Showing or hiding the UAV icon........................................................................................ 323
Performing a UAV Goto ..................................................................................................... 323
18.14 UAV Emergency procedures ...................................................................................... 323

Chapter 19 LightHouse third-party apps....................................................................325

19.1 LightHouse app launcher ..............................................................................................326
LightHouse third-party apps .............................................................................................. 326
19.2 Lighthouse third-party apps - Preloaded .................................................................... 327
19.3 Lighthouse third-party apps - Downloadable ............................................................. 328
19.4 Installing Lighthouse third-party apps ......................................................................... 328
19.5 Internet connection .......................................................................................................329
Connecting to the internet................................................................................................. 329
Wi-Fi settings ..................................................................................................................... 329
19.6 Bluetooth speaker set up ............................................................................................. 330
Enabling and disabling Bluetooth ...................................................................................... 330
Bluetooth Settings ............................................................................................................. 330
Pairing a Bluetooth speaker ............................................................................................... 331
Bluetooth volume control ................................................................................................... 331

Chapter 20 Mobile app support .................................................................................. 333

20.1 Raymarine mobile apps ................................................................................................ 334
20.2 Connect to Wi-Fi - Android .......................................................................................... 334
20.3 Connect to Wi-Fi - iOS.................................................................................................. 335
20.4 Controlling your MFD using RayControl .................................................................... 335
20.5 Controlling your MFD using RayRemote ................................................................... 336
20.6 Viewing your MFD screen using RayView................................................................. 337
20.7 Navionics plotter sync .................................................................................................. 337
20.8 Fishidy sync ................................................................................................................... 337
Enable sync.........................................................................................................................338
Disable sync....................................................................................................................... 339

Chapter 21 Troubleshooting .........................................................................................341

21.1 Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................. 342
21.2 Diagnostic product information.................................................................................... 342
Saving product information................................................................................................ 342
21.3 Power up troubleshooting ............................................................................................ 343
Performing a power on reset — Axiom™ .............................................................................343

14
 Performing a power on reset - Axiom Pro...........................................................................344
Performing a Power on Reset - eS and gS Series MFDs ....................................................344
21.4 Radar troubleshooting................................................................................................... 345
21.5 GNSS (GPS) troubleshooting........................................................................................ 346
21.6 Sonar troubleshooting................................................................................................... 346
21.7 Camera troubleshooting ............................................................................................... 349
21.8 Augmented Reality (AR) Troubleshooting ...................................................................351
21.9 Wi-Fi troubleshooting ....................................................................................................352
21.10 Wireless display troubleshooting ............................................................................... 354
21.11 Data troubleshooting ....................................................................................................355
21.12 Touchscreen troubleshooting.....................................................................................355

Chapter 22 Technical support ..................................................................................... 357

22.1 Raymarine product support and servicing.................................................................. 358
Viewing product information (LightHouse™ 3).................................................................... 359
22.2 Learning resources.......................................................................................................360

Appendix A NMEA 0183 sentence support ................................................................361

Appendix B NMEA 2000 PGN support ......................................................................362

Appendix C Document change history ......................................................................364

Appendix D Hardware compatibility...........................................................................369

Appendix E LightHouse 3 on eS and gS Series......................................................... 370

15
16
Chapter 1: Important information
Warning: Ensure safe navigation
This product is intended only as an aid to navigation and must never be used
in preference to sound navigational judgment. Only official government charts
and notices to mariners contain all the current information needed for safe
navigation, and the captain is responsible for their prudent use. It is the user’s
responsibility to use official government charts, notices to mariners, caution and
proper navigational skill when operating this or any other Raymarine product.

Warning: Radar transmission safety

The radar scanner transmits electromagnetic energy. Ensure all personnel are
clear of the scanner when the radar is transmitting.

Warning: Sonar operation

• NEVER operate the sonar with the transducer out of the water.
• NEVER touch the transducer face when the sonar is powered on.
• SWITCH OFF the sonar if divers are likely to be within 7.6 m (25 ft) of the
transducer.

Disclaimers
Raymarine does not warrant that this product is error-free or that it is compatible with products
manufactured by any person or entity other than Raymarine.
This product uses digital chart data, and electronic information from Global Navigation Satellite
Systems (GNSS) which may contain errors. Raymarine does not warrant the accuracy of such
information and you are advised that errors in such information may cause the product to malfunction.
Raymarine is not responsible for damages or injuries caused by your use or inability to use the
product, by the interaction of the product with products manufactured by others, or by errors in chart
data or information utilized by the product and supplied by third parties.
This product supports electronic charts provided by third party suppliers which may be embedded or
stored on memory card. Use of such charts is subject to the supplier’s End-User Licence Agreement.

Open source license agreements

This product is subject to certain open source license agreements. Copies of the license agreements
can be found on the Raymarine website: www.raymarine.com/manuals/.

Regulatory approvals
Regulatory approvals are available to view on your MFD from the settings menu, Homescreen
> Settings > Regulatory approvals

Warranty registration
To register your Raymarine product ownership, please visit www.raymarine.com and register online.
It is important that you register your product to receive full warranty benefits. Your unit package
includes a bar code label indicating the serial number of the unit. You will need this serial number
when registering your product online. You should retain the label for future reference.

Important information 17
Technical accuracy
To the best of our knowledge, the information in this document was correct at the time it was
produced. However, Raymarine cannot accept liability for any inaccuracies or omissions it may
contain. In addition, our policy of continuous product improvement may change specifications
without notice. As a result, Raymarine cannot accept liability for any differences between the product
and this document. Please check the Raymarine website (www.raymarine.com) to ensure you have
the most up-to-date version(s) of the documentation for your product.

18
Chapter 2: Document and product information

Chapter contents
• 2.1 Product documentation on page 20

Document and product information 19

2.1 Product documentation
The following documentation is applicable to your product:
All documents are available to download in PDF format from the Raymarine website
www.raymarine.com.
Description Part number
LightHouse 3 Basic operation instructions 81369
LightHouse 3 Advanced operation instructions 81370
LightHouse™ 2 to LightHouse™ 3 upgrade 81378
procedure
Axiom MFD Installation instructions 87298
Axiom Pro MFD Installation instructions 87319
Axiom XL MFD Installation instructions 87344
RMK-10 Remote Keypad Installation and 81367
operation instructions
RMK-9 Remote Keypad Installation and 81351
operation instructions

Video tutorials
A range of tutorial videos is available on the Raymarine website to assist you in learning how
to use your product.
http://www.raymarine.com/multifunction-displays/lighthouse3/tips-and-tricks

Applicable software version

Product software is updated regularly to add new features and improve existing functionality.
This handbook is applicable to MFD operating system software: LightHouse™ 3 Release version 3.11.
Check the website for the latest software and user manuals:
• www.raymarine.com/software
• www.raymarine.com/manuals

Compatible MFDs
The LightHouse™ 3 operating system is compatible with the MFDs listed below.
Software version Compatible MFDs
LH3.11 • Axiom XL
LH3.10.71
• Axiom Pro
LH3.10
LH3.9 • Axiom
LH3.8
• eS Series
LH3.7
LH3.6 • gS Series
LH3.5
LH3.4 • Axiom Pro
LH3.3
• Axiom
• eS Series
• gS Series
LH3.2 • Axiom Pro
• Axiom
LH3.1 • Axiom
LH3.0 • Axiom

20
New software features
The following new features have been added to Release 3.11 of the LightHouse™ 3 operating system.
• Arabic Keyboard.
• Secure Responder Messaging available for responder vessels.
• iTC-5 Calibration.
• Victron Energy third-party app.
• Fishidy Sync.
• Dual streaming for dual payload cameras.
• Expanding Square search and rescue pattern.

User manuals Print Shop

Raymarine provides a Print Shop service, enabling you to purchase a high-quality,
professionally-printed manual for your Raymarine product.
Printed manuals are ideal for keeping onboard your vessel, as a useful source of reference whenever
you need assistance with your Raymarine product.
Visit http://www.raymarine.co.uk/view/?id=5175 to order a printed manual, delivered directly to
your door.
For further information about the Print Shop, please visit the Print Shop FAQ pages:
http://www.raymarine.co.uk/view/?id=5751.
Note:
• Accepted methods of payment for printed manuals are credit cards and PayPal.
• Printed manuals can be shipped worldwide.
• Further manuals will be added to the Print Shop over the coming months for both new and
legacy products.
• Raymarine user manuals are also available to download free-of-charge from the Raymarine
website, in the popular PDF format. These PDF files can be viewed on a PC / laptop, tablet,
smartphone, or on the latest generation of Raymarine multifunction displays.

Document and product information 21

22
Chapter 3: General information

Chapter contents
• 3.1 MFD and LightHouse third-party apps on page 24
• 3.2 Sidebar on page 25
• 3.3 Data overlays on page 27
• 3.4 Menus on page 28
• 3.5 MFD app settings menu on page 29
• 3.6 Editing the split ratio of a Splitscreen app page on page 30

General information 23
3.1 MFD and LightHouse third-party apps
Depending on your MFD variant 2 types of app may be available on your display.

MFD apps

MFD apps are opened from app page icons available on the Homescreen, these apps include Chart,
Radar, Fishfinder etc. MFD apps are available on all MFDs running the LightHouse™ 3 operating
system. Multiple apps can be displayed simultaneously by creating splitscreen app pages.

LightHouse™ third-party apps

LightHouse™ third-party apps are developed entirely by 3rd parties and are approved by Raymarine.
These apps are available from the LightHouse app launcher found on the Homescreen. LightHouse™
third-party apps are only available on the Axiom™ range of MFDs.

24
3.2 Sidebar
The Sidebar is available in all apps and provides quick access to system data. By default the Sidebar
is set up to display navigation data.

The Sidebar is displayed automatically in the Chart app when a Goto or follow is initiated. It can also
be displayed at anytime by sliding your finger from left to right from the left edge of the screen.
Swiping right to left will hide the Sidebar.
To customize the displayed data, press and hold on the Data item you want to change and select
Edit from the pop-over options.

Customizing Sidebar data

The data displayed in the Sidebar can be customized by following the steps below.
1. Open any app and from the left edge of the screen swipe from left to right.
2. Press and hold on the Data type you want to customize.
3. Select Edit from the pop-over menu.
4. Select the data type you want to be displayed.

General information 25
Switching sidebars
Different Sidebars are available.

To switch Sidebars:
1. Select the Sidebar selection icon.
2. Select the Sidebar you want to use.
3. You can also pin the Sidebar so that it is always displayed onscreen in the app you are in.

Enable rudder bar

The Rudder bar is located at the bottom of the Sidebar, it displays the position of your vessel’s rudder.
Note: A rudder position sensor must be on the same network as your MFD for the Rudder bar
to function.
To enable the Rudder bar:
1. Select the Sidebar selection icon.
2. Select Rudder bar to enable / disable its display at the bottom of the Sidebar.

1. No rudder data found.

2. Rudder deflection to port.

26
3. Rudder deflection to starboard.

3.3 Data overlays

System data can be overlaid onto the Chart, Radar, Sonar or Camera apps. Some apps have Data
overlays enabled by default.

Data overlays can be placed anywhere on the app page and can be placed over any app in a
Splitscreen app page.
Data overlays can be customized from: Menu > Settings > Page Settings > Edit data overlays.
In edit mode, drag the data overlay to the desired location. Touch and hold a Data overlay to display
the pop-over menu, where you can Edit, Move, Resize or Delete the Data overlay.
Select Add to add another overlay or Done to exit edit mode.

Data overlay and Sidebar data items

The following data items are available to be displayed in Data overlays and Sidebars.
GPS Position (one line) (GNSS position) Supply voltage
GPS Position (two lines) (GNSS position) Waypoint TTG (Time To Go)
Local time Waypoint ETA (Estimated Time of Arrival)
Depth State of charge
Water temperature Time till zero charge
Cursor position Loran Position (one line)
Loran Cursor position Loran Position (two lines)
COG (Course Over Ground) TWS (True Wind Speed)
SOG (Speed Over ground) TWA (True Wind Angle)
Heading TWD (True Wind Direction)
STW (Speed Through Water) AWS (Actual Wind Speed)
Bearing to waypoint AWA (Actual Wind Angle)
Distance to waypoint

General information 27
3.4 Menus
The different types of menu available in LightHouse™ 3 are shown below.
The Main menu is displayed on the right side of the screen
when the Menu icon is selected.

Main menus
Each MFD app includes a main menu. Main menus provide
access to the MFD app’s features and settings, via menu
options and menu pages.
Selecting Back (<), Close (X) or selecting an area of the
screen away from the menu, will close the menu.
Selecting a menu item with a right arrow (>) will open a menu
page or other menu options for that item.

Menu pages
Menu pages are accessed from main menu options and
icons found on the Homescreen.
Menu pages are fullscreen pages containing menu options
and settings. Menu pages are usually set out in tabs with
each tab containing options relevant to the tab’s title.
Selecting tab titles will display the contents for that tab.
Selecting Back (<) or Close will close the menu.

Context menus
Context menus are available in MFD apps. Context menus
are accessed by selecting an object or location within the
MFD app.
Context menus provide context-sensitive information and
options.
Selecting more options will display further contextual menu
options.
Selecting Close (X) or selecting an area of the screen away
from the menu, will close the menu.

Pop-over menus
Pop-over menus are available on the Homescreen, in MFD
apps and from Menu pages. Pop-over options provide
access to further menu options and settings.
Selecting an area of the screen away from the menu will
close the menu.

28
Controls and settings
Common menu controls and options are detailed below.
Toggle switch
Toggle switches are used to enable (switch on) or disable
(switch off) various features and settings.
When enabled (switched on) the white circle will be moved
right and the switch’s background will be filled Green.

Page down
Selecting will page down the current menu or page.
When displayed you can also swipe the page to scroll up
or down.
Setting field
Setting fields show the selected value for that control.
Selecting a setting field will display the available options
relevant to the options available. Depending on available
options this could be in the following formats:
• Pop-over options (selection list)
• Numeric value control
• Onscreen keyboard
• File browser
• Selection list (full page)
Setting button
Setting buttons are available on Menu pages and Notification
/ Alarm messages to access further settings or confirm
setting changes or changed MFD state.

3.5 MFD app settings menu

Each MFD app includes a settings menu that provides access to the app’s settings and features.
The settings menu in each MFD app is signified by the Settings icon, found
in the main app menu.

General information 29
3.6 Editing the split ratio of a Splitscreen app page

With a Splitscreen app page displayed:

1. Select Edit split ratio from the Page settings tab: Menu > Settings > Page settings > Edit split
ratio.
2. Drag the Resize icon to create the desired split ratio.
3. Select Save.

30
Chapter 4: Set up

Chapter contents
• 4.1 MFD physical buttons on page 32
• 4.2 Axiom and Axiom XL on page 33
• 4.3 Axiom Pro, eS Series and gS Series on page 34
• 4.4 Switching on and off at the breaker on page 35
• 4.5 Getting started on page 35
• 4.6 Shortcuts on page 42
• 4.7 Memory card compatibility on page 44
• 4.8 Software updates on page 47
• 4.9 Device pairing on page 48

Set up 31
4.1 MFD physical buttons
The table below shows the physical buttons that are available on LightHouse™ 3 compatible MFDs
and remote keypads, along with their function.
Note:
• Where 2 button symbols are shown, the symbols on the left represent Axiom™ Pro variant MFDs
or RMK-10 keypad, and the symbols on the right represent an eS Series MFD or RMK-9 keypad.
• Axiom MFDs and gS Series MFDs only have a single power button.

Physical MFD buttons

Control Button Function
Home Press to display the Homescreen.

Menu Press to open or close menus.

(1)User Programmable Button (UPB) You can select which function this
button controls. Refer to Assigning a
function to the User Programmable
Button (UPB)
for more information.
Waypoint / MOB Press momentarily to place a waypoint
at your vessel’s location. A long press
activates the Man overboard (MOB)
alarm.
Power Press to power on the MFD. When
the MFD is powered on, pressing this
button displays the Shortcuts page.

(2)Power swipe Swipe to power on the MFD. When the

MFD is powered on, swipe again to
display the Shortcuts page.
Pilot Press momentarily to display or hide
the Pilot sidebar. A long press engages
the autopilot in locked heading mode,
or disengages an active autopilot.
Switch Press momentarily to switch the active
pane in a splitscreen page. A long
press expands the selected pane.

Back Press to return to the previous menu

or dialog.

Range In Press to Range or Zoom In.

32
 Control Button Function
Range Out Press to Range or Zoom Out.

Uni-controller The Uni-controller consists of a center

OK button, Directional controls and a
Rotary knob.

MFD Uni-controller
Control Control Function
Ok Push the button to confirm a selection.

Directional Use the 8-way directional controls to

reposition the cursor onscreen.

Rotary Turn clockwise to Range or Zoom In

and counterclockwise to Range or
Zoom out.

Note:
• (1) The UPB is only available on Axiom™ Pro MFDs.
• (2) The Power swipe is only available on Axiom™ MFDs.

4.2 Axiom and Axiom XL

Powering on the display
When power is available to the MFD but the MFD is switched off, the Power symbol will be illuminated.
To power on the display:

Set up 33
1. Swipe your finger from left to right across the Power button swipe area.
The MFD will power up.

Powering off the display

1. Swipe your finger from left to right across the Power button swipe area.
The Shortcuts menu is displayed.
2. Press and hold the Power symbol until the screen switches off.
Note:
When powered off, the unit may still draw a small amount of power from the battery. If this is a
concern, unplug the power supply or switch off at the breaker.

Switching on and off at the breaker

If you wish to ensure that the MFD is not consuming any power then it must be switched off at the
breaker or have the power cable unplugged.
When the breaker is switched back on, or the cable is reconnected, the MFD will resume in the same
power state that it was in when it was switched off.

4.3 Axiom Pro, eS Series and gS Series

Powering on the display
1. Press the power button to power on the display.

34
Powering off the display

1. Press the Power button.

2. From the Shortcuts page press and hold the power icon for approximately 2 seconds.
Alternatively you can press and hold the Power button for approximately 6 seconds to power off
your display.
Note:
When powered off, the unit may still draw a small amount of power from the battery. If this is a
concern, unplug the power supply or switch off at the breaker.

4.4 Switching on and off at the breaker

If you wish to ensure that the MFD is not consuming any power then it must be switched off at the
breaker or have the power cable unplugged.
When the breaker is switched back on, or the cable is reconnected, the MFD will resume in the same
power state that it was in when it was switched off.

4.5 Getting started

First power up
When you power up your new Multifunction Display (MFD) for the first time a number of actions
are required.
The list below shows the actions that should be performed on your new MFD:
1. Power on the display.
2. Select your Data master (only required on networks with more than 1 MFD).
3. Complete the Startup wizard (the wizard will not be shown if you are connecting to an existing
system that has already been set up).
4. Read and agree to the Limitations on Use disclaimer.
5. Select/check your preferred Data sources, if required.
6. Perform Engine identification, if required.
7. Select/check Transducer settings, if required

Set up 35
First power up Data master selection
Networks containing more than 1 MFD must have a designated Data master. The Data master is the
primary MFD in the network and should be the MFD that is connected to the SeaTalkng ® / NMEA
2000 CAN bus network and any other devices and sources of data in your system. The Data master
bridges the data over the SeaTalkhs ™ network to any compatible networked ‘repeater’ MFDs.
By default your MFD will be set as a Data master. If you are connecting to a network that already
includes MFDs then on first power up you will be requested to confirm your Data master.
The “Multiple Data masters found” warning will be displayed whenever a new MFD is added to
your network.

You can change your Data master at anytime by selecting Assign as Data master against a MFD
listed in the Network tab of the Settings menu: Homescreen > Settings > Network.

Startup wizard
If the MFD is being installed as a stand alone installation or as part of a new system, then the first
time the MFD is powered up the Startup wizard will be displayed. The Startup wizard will help
you configure important settings on your MFD.
Follow the onscreen instructions and configure the relevant settings.
The Startup wizard will also be displayed after a Factory reset is performed.

First power up Limitation on Use acknowledgement

After you have completed the Startup wizard the Limitation on Use (LoU) disclaimer is displayed.

You must read and agree to the terms in order to use your MFD.
Selecting OK means you have accepted the terms of use.

Multiple data sources (MDS)

MDS is a Raymarine scheme for managing multiple sources of identical data types on any single
network (e.g.: in a MFD network you may have more than one source of GPS / GNSS position data).
The following data types can have a preferred source assigned to them:
• GPS Position
• GPS Datum
• Time & Date
• Heading
• Depth

36
• Speed
• Wind
For MDS to be available on your system, all products in the system that use the data sources must
be MDS-compliant. The system will report any products that are NOT MDS-compliant. It may be
possible to upgrade the software for these non-compliant products, to make them compliant. Visit
the Raymarine website (www.raymarine.com) to obtain the latest software for your products.
If MDS-compliant software is not available for the product and you do NOT want to use the system’s
preferred data source, you must remove any non-compliant products from the system. You should
then be able to select your preferred data source.
Note:
Once you have completed setting up your preferred data sources, you may be able to add
non-compliant products back into the system.

Data sources menu

When a system includes multiple sources of a data type, such as depth data, the system will choose
the most appropriate source for the data. If you prefer, you can manually select your own data source.
The Data sources menu can be accessed on your Data master MFD, from the Settings menu:
Homescreen > Settings > Network > Data sources.

Each tab enables you to view and select your preferred data source. The currently active data source
will display its current value in use. Data source selection can be manual or set to automatic:
• Auto — your MFD will automatically select a device.
• Manual — you can manually select your preferred device.
Networked MFDs will automatically be updated to use the Data sources selected on your Data
master MFD.

Identifying engines
Engine data can be shown on your display, if your engines are transmitting the relevant supported
data on the same network as your display. If your system has mislabelled your engines then you can
correct this using the Engine identification wizard.
The Engine identification wizard can be accessed from the Boat details menu: Homescreen >
Settings > Boat details > Identify engines.
1. Ensure the correct number of engines is selected in the Num of Engines: box.
2. Select Identify engines.
3. Follow the onscreen prompts to complete the engine identification wizard.

Set up 37
Configuring Transducer settings
For systems set up with Sonar, you should configure your transducer settings.

1. Select Transducer from the Fishfinder app’s Settings menu: Menu > Settings > Transducer
2. Select how you want your depth to appear:
i. Below transducer (default) — No offset required
ii. Below keel — Enter the distance between the transducer face and the bottom of the Keel.
iii. Below waterline —Enter the distance between the bottom of your Keel and the waterline.
3. If your transducer includes a temperature sensor then you can also configure temperature
settings as follows:
i. Enable or disable temperature readings as required.
ii. If enabled, check the temperature reading against the actual water temperature.
iii. If the current reading requires adjustment, select Calibrate temp and enter the difference
between your 2 readings.

RealVision™ 3D AHRS calibration

RealVision™ 3D transducers include a built-in AHRS (Attitude and Heading Reference Sensor), which
measures the motion of your vessel to assist in the rendering of sonar images. After installation all
RealVision™ 3D transducers require calibration.
An uncalibrated transducer can produce an offset to the front edge of the render of the bottom in
the sonar image, as illustrated below.

Uncalibrated Calibrated

38
Calibration is an automatic process and starts after your vessel has turned approximately 100° at a
speed of between 3 –15 knots. Calibration requires no user input, however at least a 270° turn is
required before the calibration process can determine the local deviation and apply a relevant offset.
The time it takes to complete the calibration process will vary according to the characteristics of
the vessel, the installation environment of the transducer, and the levels of magnetic interference
at the time of conducting the process. Sources of significant magnetic interference may increase
the time required to complete the calibration process. Certain areas with substantial magnetic
deviation may require extra circles or “figure of 8” manoeuvres to be performed. Examples of such
sources of magnetic interference include:
• Vessel engines
• Vessel alternators
• Marine pontoons
• Metal-hulled vessels
• Underwater cables
Note:
In some circumstances, it is beneficial to disable Realvision AHRS if local sources of magnetic
interference are distorting the sonar image. Realvision AHRS can be disabled from Settings.
Menu > Settings > Sounder > AHRS stabilization

Note:
The Calibration process will require repeating after a Sonar reset or MFD Factory reset.

Transducer calibration (iTC-5)

You can calibrate transducers connected to your Lighthouse MFD via an iTC-5 Instrument Transducer
Converter.
Note:
Transducer calibration requirements:
• An iTC-5 Instrument Transducer Converter.
• An MFD designated as the Data master.
• LightHouse software version 3.11 or later.

Note:
You can only calibrate transducers that are directly connected to the iTC-5 instrument you select
for calibration. In systems with more than 1 iTC-5, it is important to remember which transducer(s)
are connected to each iTC-5 instrument.

Network
To calibrate transducers, find the relevant iTC-5 unit from the list of devices connected to your
MFD’s network.
1. Open Network

Homescreen > Settings > Network

2. Find and select the iTC-5 unit.

3. Select Calibrate.

Set up 39
Data selection
You can choose which data type you want to calibrate:
• Depth
• Wind
• Speed

Depth
Calibrate your depth transducer.
Below keel Enter the distance between the transducer face and the bottom
of the keel.
Below waterline Enter the distance between the bottom of your keel and the
waterline.
Below transducer No offset required.

40
Wind
Calibrate your wind transducer.
Linearise transducer Turn your boat in a circle until all sectors have been calibrated
(the ring turns green).

Align wind transducer Head your boat directly into observed wind to align.

Angle adjustment Apply an offset to the angle.

Speed adjustment Apply a scaling factor to apparent wind speed.

Speed
Calibrate your speed transducer.
Note:
For best results, ensure that there is minimal or no tide/current effect when calibrating speed
through water.

Set STW to SOG Apply a scaling factor to all STW readings, based on the present
difference between STW and SOG.
Adjust STW Apply a scaling factor to all speed through water values.

Assigning a function to the User Programmable Button (UPB)

You can assign a function to the User Programmable Button on an Axiom™ Pro MFD.
1. Press and hold the User Programmable Button on the MFD.
2. Select the required function from the list.
You can also assign a function to the User Programmable Button from the Settings menu:
Homescreen > Settings > This Display > User Configurable Key.

Set up 41
Performing a settings or factory reset
Performing a Factory reset will erase ALL user data and reset the display’s settings to their Factory
default values. Performing a Settings reset will restore your display’s settings to factory defaults,
whilst retaining user data.
1. Select Settings reset, from the This display menu: Homescreen > Settings > This display >
Settings reset to perform a settings reset.
2. Select Factory reset, from the This display menu: Homescreen > Settings > This display >
Factory reset to perform a factory reset.

Importing user data

You can import user data (i.e.: Waypoints, Routes and Tracks) to your MFD.
1. Insert the MicroSD card that contains your user data files into a card reader slot on your MFD
or connected card reader.
2. Select Import from card from the Import/export page: (Homescreen > My data > Import/export
> Import from card).
3. Select the relevant SD card slot from the file browser and then navigate to your User data file
(.gpx).
4. Select the relevant GPX file.
Your user data has now been imported.
5. Select OK.

4.6 Shortcuts
The Shortcuts menu can be accessed by swiping left to right across the Power button swipe area
on an Axiom™ or Axiom™ XL MFD, or by pressing the Power button on an Axiom™ Pro , eS Series or
gS Series MFD.

The following shortcuts are available:

• Take Screenshot
• Activate Touchlock
• Engage / Disengage autopilot
• Adjust Locked heading
• Stop Radar transmitting
• Disable all Sounders
• Power off
• Adjust Bluetooth speaker volume
• Adjust Brightness

42
Taking a screenshot
You can take a screenshot and save the image to external memory.
1. Swipe your finger from left to right across the Power button swipe area (applies only to Axiom™ or
Axiom™ XL MFDs). Alternatively, press the Power button momentarily.
The Shortcuts menu is displayed.
2. Select Take screenshot.
The screenshot will be saved in .png format to the Screenshot file location. The Screenshot file
location can be selected from the This Display tab located in the Settings menu: Homescreen
> Settings > This Display > Screenshot file:.
Note:
Due to protected content restrictions you cannot take a screenshot when the video input on an
Axiom™ Pro or the Video 2 or HDMI input on an Axiom™ XL MFD is displayed onscreen.

Activating touchlock
In rough weather conditions precipitation may lead to erroneous touches being detected by the
touchscreen. In these conditions you can use touchlock to prevent this.
1. Select Activate touchlock from the Shortcuts menu.
With touchlock activated the touchscreen will be disabled. To re-enable the touchscreen, swipe
from left to right across the Power button swipe area.

Radar standby
You can place a transmitting Radar in Standby from the Shortcuts menu.
1. Select Stop Radar tx from the Shortcuts menu.

Autopilot shortcuts
When Autopilot control is enabled, the Shortcuts page provides an Autopilot icon which can be used
to engage and disengage your autopilot. When the autopilot is engaged in Locked heading mode
you can also adjust the locked heading from the Shortcuts page.

Adjusting brightness
LCD brightness can be adjusted from the Shortcuts page.
With the Shortcuts page displayed (accessible via the Power button):
1. Move the Display brightness control along the slider bar to adjust the brightness.
With the Shortcuts menu displayed you can also use the Power button or the Power button swipe
area to increase the brightness level in increments, by repeating the left to right swipe. Please
note, the swipe area is only available on Axiom™ or Axiom™ XL displays.

Disabling all sounders

In systems with multiple sonar modules, you can stop all sonar modules from pinging.
1. Select Disable all sounders from the shortcuts menu.

Bluetooth volume control

When your MFD is connected to a Bluetooth speaker, controls will be available to adjust speaker
volume.
Homescreen

Set up 43
From the Homescreen select the Status area and then select the Speaker symbol to display the
Bluetooth volume control for LightHouse™ app and MFD alarms.

Shortcuts page

Press or swipe the Power button to display the Shortcuts page and then select the speaker symbol
to display the Bluetooth volume control for LightHouse™ apps and MFD alarms.

4.7 Memory card compatibility

MicroSD memory cards can be used to backup / archive data (e.g. Waypoints, Routes and Tracks).
Once data is backed up to a memory card, old data can be deleted from the system. The archived
data can be retrieved at any time. It is recommended that your data is backed up to a memory
card on a regular basis.

Compatible cards
The following types of MicroSD cards are compatible with your MFD:
MFD supported
Type Size Native card format Format
MicroSDSC (Micro Secure Up to 4GB FAT12, FAT16 or NTFS, FAT32
Digital Standard Capacity) FAT16B
MicroSDHC (Micro Secure 4GB to 32GB FAT32 NTFS, FAT32
Digital High Capacity)
MicroSDXC (Micro Secure 32GB to 2TB exFAT NTFS, FAT32
Digital eXtended Capacity)

• Speed class rating — For best performance it is recommended that you use Class 10 or UHS (Ultra
High Speed) class memory cards, or better.
• Use branded memory cards — When archiving data it is recommended that you use good quality
branded memory cards.

Caution: Care of chart and memory cards

To avoid irreparable damage to and / or loss of data from chart and memory cards:
• Ensure that chart and memory cards are fitted the correct way around. DO
NOT try to force a card into position.
• DO NOT use a metallic instrument such as a screwdriver or pliers to insert or
remove a chart or memory card.

44
Removing MicroSD card from its adaptor
MicroSD memory and cartography chart cards are usually supplied inserted into an SD card adaptor.
The card will need to be removed from the adaptor before inserting into your display.

Inserting a MicroSD card — Axiom variants

1. Pull back the microSD card reader cover as shown above.

2. Insert your microSD card with the contacts facing down.
3. Close the cover and ensure it is seated correctly.

Removing a MicroSD card

1. Select Eject SD card from the Import/export page: Homescreen > My data > Import/export >
Eject SD card.
2. Remove the MicroSD card from the Rear of the MFD.
3. Ensure you close the card reader’s cover.

Set up 45
Inserting a MicroSD card — Axiom Pro variants

1. Open the card reader door.

2. Pull down the card reader cover.
3. Insert the card into a card slot and push until it clicks into place.
Note: When inserting a card into the lower card slot the memory card must be orientated with the
contacts pointing upwards.

Removing a MicroSD card - Axiom Pro

With the card reader door open and cover pulled down:
1. Push the card in until it clicks.
2. Pull the card free from the card slot.

Inserting external storage devices - RCR

1. Open the card reader door.

2. Insert the storage device into a card slot and push until it clicks into place.

46
 • RCR-SDUSB slot 1 — With the contacts facing down, insert an SD card (or an SD card adaptor
containing a MicroSD card) into the upper slot, labelled (1), and push until it clicks into place.
• RCR-SDUSB slot 2 — With the contacts facing down, insert a USB drive directly into the lower
slot, labelled (2).
• RCR-2 slot 1 — With the contacts facing down, insert a MicroSD card into the upper slot and
push until it clicks into place.
• RCR-2 slot 2 — With the contacts facing up, insert a MicroSD card into the lower slot and
push until it clicks into place.
Removing external storage (SD and MicroSD)
With the card reader door open:
1. Push the card in until it clicks.
2. Pull the card free from the card slot.
Removing external storage USB drive
With the card reader door open and cover pulled down:
1. Pull the drive free from the card slot.

Caution: Ensure card reader cover or door is securely closed

To prevent water ingress and consequent damage to the product, ensure that the
card reader door or cover is firmly closed.

4.8 Software updates

Raymarine® regularly issues software updates for its products which provide new and enhanced
features and improved performance and usability. It’s important to ensure that you have the latest
software for your products by regularly checking the Raymarine® website for new software releases.
www.raymarine.com/software

Note:
• It is recommended that you always backup your User data before performing a software update.
• To update compatible SeaTalkng ® products you must use the designated Datamaster MFD that
is physically connected to the SeaTalkng ® backbone.
• In order to perform a software update any connected autopilot or Radar must be switched to
Standby.
• The MFD’s “Check online” feature is only available when the MFD has an Internet connection.
• To check which products are compatible with the MFD software update process, please refer to
the website: www.raymarine.com/software.

Updating software using a memory card

Compatible SeaTalkhs ® and SeaTalkng ® products can be updated by following the steps below.
1. Check the software version of your product.

Set up 47
 Refer to the documentation supplied with your product for information on checking software
version.

2. Check the latest available software on the Raymarine website: (www.raymarine.com > Support >
Software Updates).
3. Download the software package.
4. Copy the files to MicroSD card.
5. With your MFD powered on, insert the MicroSD card into the card reader slot.
Your MFD will automatically detect software files.
6. Follow the onscreen instructions to update your product software.
7. Alternatively you can select Check SD card from the Update software pop-over options on the
Getting started tab: (Homescreen > Settings > Getting started > Update Software).

Updating software via the internet

Compatible SeaTalkhs ® and SeaTalkng ® products can be updated by following the steps below.
1. Select Update software from the Getting started tab: (Homescreen > Settings > Getting started).
2. Select Check online from the pop-over menu.
3. To set up a Wi-Fi connection select Wi-Fi settings and connect to the required Wi-Fi access
point/hotspot.
4. Select Start and then follow any onscreen instructions.

4.9 Device pairing

Pairing a RMK remote keypad
You can control your MFD with an RMK keypad.
From the This display tab of the Settings menu: Homescreen > Settings > This display .
1. Select Pair keypad.
2. Follow the onscreen instructions to pair your keypad.
Ensure you select the correct orientation for the keypad during the pairing process.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 on each MFD you want to control from your keypad.
Note:
Please refer to the controls section of your keypad’s documentation for details on controlling
MFDs using a keypad.

Clear pairing (RMK)

1. Select Clear pairings to unpair ALL RMK keypads currently paired with the MFD.

Pairing with a Quantum Radar scanner

You can connect a Quantum Radar scanner to your MFD using Wi-Fi.
Pre-requisites:
• Ensure you have connected your Quantum Radar scanner in accordance with the instructions
provided with the Radar scanner.
• Ensure you know your Radar scanner’s SSID and passcode.
1. Select Pair with Quantum from the This display tab: Homescreen > Settings > This display >
Pair with Quantum.
2. Follow the onscreen instructions to pair with your Quantum Radar.
The pairing process may take several minutes to complete.

For more information on the Quantum Radar pairing process (including troubleshooting
information), refer to the Quantum Radar Installation instructions documents.

48
Pairing a Bluetooth speaker
Before attempting to pair with a Bluetooth speaker, ensure that the speaker is switched on and
discoverable.
With your MFD’s Bluetooth enabled:
1. From the Bluetooth settings page, select the relevant device from the Available devices list.
2. If requested, confirm the bluetooth pairing code.
If pairing is successful the speaker will appear in the Paired devices list and display the Connected
message.

Set up 49
50
Chapter 5: Homescreen

Chapter contents
• 5.1 Accepting the Limitations on Use on page 52
• 5.2 Homescreen overview on page 52
• 5.3 MFD Apps on page 53
• 5.4 Creating / Customizing an App page on page 55
• 5.5 User profiles on page 56
• 5.6 Status area on page 58
• 5.7 Satellite navigation / positioning on page 60
• 5.8 My data on page 61
• 5.9 Secure messaging on page 65
• 5.10 Alarms on page 68
• 5.11 Man Overboard (MOB) on page 74
• 5.12 Settings on page 75
• 5.13 Connecting to a wireless display on page 85

Homescreen 51
5.1 Accepting the Limitations on Use
After your MFD has powered up the Homescreen is displayed.

1. Before using the MFD you must accept the Limitations on Use (LoU) disclaimer. To view the full
LoU Disclaimer, select ‘more details’.

The LoU acknowledgment is displayed each time the display is powered on and for each new
user profile. The full LoU text can be accessed at any time from the Getting started tab:
Homescreen > Settings > Getting started > View terms of use.

5.2 Homescreen overview

All settings and apps can be accessed from the Homescreen.

52
1. GNSS position/fix details — Select the area to view fix accuracy and access GNSS settings.
2. Profile — Select the area to change the profile in use or to create, edit or delete profiles.
3. External devices and system time — Select this area to access Bluetooth settings, Disengage
your autopilot or adjust the UTC time offset.
4. App page icons — Select an icon to open the relevant MFD app page. Use the Left and
Right arrows , or swipe your finger left or right across the area to cycle through the available
Homescreen pages.
5. Settings and data — This area provides access to the Settings, Alarms, Apps and My data
menus. You can also activate the Man Over Board (MOB) alarm and disengage your autopilot.
Note:
When more than 1 display is connected to the same network, then the Homescreen of the MFD
designated as Data Master will be mirrored on all MFDs.

5.3 MFD Apps

MFD apps are displayed on your MFD in App pages. Each app page is accessed from the app page
icons on the Homescreen. App pages can include more than 1 app. The available MFD apps are:

Homescreen 53
 Chart — The Chart app displays electronic cartographic information from
your Chart cards and when used in conjunction with a GNSS receiver,
plots your vessel’s position. The Chart app can be used to mark specific
locations using Waypoints, build and navigate Routes or keep a record
of where you have been by recording a Track.
For more information refer to p.105 — Chart app

Radar — The Radar app is a situational awareness aid that displays

a graphical representation of your surroundings in relation to your
vessel using the echo/target returns from a connected Radar scanner.
The Radar app allows you to track targets and measure distances and
bearings
For more information refer to p.197 — Radar app

Fishfinder — The Fishfinder app uses a connected sonar module and

transducer to help you to find fish by building up an underwater view
of bottom structure and targets in the water column covered by your
transducer.
For more information refer to p.183 — Fishfinder app

Audio — The Audio app allows you to control audio from a connected
compatible entertainment system.
For more information refer to p.293 — Audio app

Video — The Camera app allows you to control and view feeds coming
from connected video equipment such as an IP camera or Thermal
camera.
For more information refer to p.259 — Video app

Dashboard — The Dashboard app provides data readings from

connected sensors and equipment. The Dashboard app is also used for
controlling, configured, compatible, Digital Switching hardware.
For more information refer to p.231 — Dashboard app

Yamaha — The Yamaha app provides data readings from connected

Yamaha engines.
For more information refer to p.245 — Yamaha app

54
 PDF Viewer — The PDF Viewer app allows you to open PDF files located
on your external storage.
For more information refer to p.307 — PDF Viewer app

UAV — The UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle) app provides remote

controls, settings and video display, including flight data for your
compatible UAV device.
For more information refer to
p.311 — UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle) app

5.4 Creating / Customizing an App page

1. Press and hold on an existing App page icon to display pop-over options.

You can Customize, Rename or Delete app pages from the pop-over options.

2. Select Customize from the pop-over options to change page layout and apps used. To Create a
new page press and hold on a blank space on the Homescreen.

3. Select the Layout: option to change the page layout.

4. Select the icons for the Apps that you want to be displayed on the page.
5. Select Next and give the page a memorable name.
6. Select Save.
The page is saved and the new App page icon will be shown on the Homescreen.

Homescreen 55
5.5 User profiles
You can share your MFD with other users by creating user profiles on your MFD. Profiles enable
you to retain your own personal settings whilst letting other users personalize the MFD’s settings to
their preference.
Note:
User data such as Waypoints, Routes, Tracks, images and video recordings etc. will be available
to all users, and are shared by all users. This means that, for example, if you add or delete a
waypoint while using one user profile, the change will also be reflected in all other profiles on
the MFD, including demo profiles.

You can access the Profiles page by selecting the Profile Icon on the Homescreen.

Selecting the Plus (+) icon will create a new profile based on the profile that is currently in use.
MFD settings changes are unique to the profile in use and are retained the next time the profile is
used.
The distance and time that a profile has been active is displayed for each profile.
Profile names and icons can be customized. You can also reset the distance and time for each profile.
A Guest profile is available for temporary users. Setting changes to the Guest profile are not retained.
Each time the Guest profile is activated the settings are based on the last used profile.
When the MFD is rebooted the last used profile will be active.
Demo profiles are also available to help you practice operating your MFD with simulated data.

Demo profiles
Profiles are available for simulation and demonstration purposes. A demo movie, stored on external
storage, can also be set to play when a demo profile is activated and inactivity has been detected
for 60 seconds.

56
Selecting a Demo profile will provide your MFD with simulated data to help you practice operating
your display.
Important:
• It is recommended that Demo profiles are NOT activated whilst navigating.
• User data such as Waypoints, Routes, and Tracks is shared with all the other user profiles on the
MFD. This means that, for example, if you add or delete a waypoint while using a demo profile,
the change will also be reflected in all other user profiles on the MFD.
• Demo profiles will NOT display any real data, including safety warnings and messages.
• Any settings changes made will not affect User profiles.

Demo movie requirements

A demo movie file can be set to play when a demo profile is active and the MFD has not been
used for 60 seconds.
Demo movie files must be in the .mov file format and encoded using the H.264 video codec standard.
The Demo movie files must be saved to an external storage device connected to the MFD. Demo
movies are not shared across networked MFDs.
When the Demo movie feature is activated the system will search for a demo movie file associated
with the active demo profile. If an associated file cannot be found then the generic demo.mov is
played. See below for filename details.
Demo profile Associated filename
General demo_general.mov
Sailing demo_sailing.mov
Cruising demo_cruising.mov
Saltwater fishing demo_salt.mov
Freshwater fishing demo_fresh.mov
Plays in all demo profiles if an associated demo demo.mov
file is not found.
If an MFD is powered off with the demo movie active then the next time the MFD is powered on the
demo movie will play immediately after boot up.
Any interaction with the Touchscreen or physical buttons will stop the movie playing and return you
to the active demo profile.

Homescreen 57
5.6 Status area
You can view the status of connected peripheral devices using the MFD’s Status area, located at
the top right of the Homescreen. This area also displays the Time and identifies when the MFD is
in Touchlock mode.

Status area icons

The status area provides icons which identify the status of connected Autopilot, AIS, Radar,
Sonar/Transducer, and Bluetooth devices.

Pop-over menu options

From the Options pop-over you can:
• Disengage your autopilot.
• Access Bluetooth settings and volume controls.
• Adjust the Time offset from UTC.

Status area icons

The icons displayed in the Status area signify the current status of certain connected devices.

AIS
Icon Status Icon Status
AIS transmitting and AIS receive only (e.g. Silent Mode)
receiving

AIS restricted AIS Error

(Requires AIS5000
transceiver)

Autopilot
Icon Status Icon Status
Autopilot engaged

58
Bluetooth
Icon Status Icon Status
Bluetooth on / not Bluetooth connected / paired
connected

Radar
Icon Status Icon Status
Radar transmitting Radar standby

Radar error

Sonar / Transducer
Icon Status Icon Status
Sonar pinging Sonar not pinging

Sonar error

Touchlock
Icon Status Icon Status
Touchlock active

Homescreen 59
5.7 Satellite navigation / positioning
GNSS (GPS) Status
Your vessel’s GNSS (GPS) position is provided in the top left corner of the Homescreen. You can
access fix accuracy and settings by selecting the area.
If latitude and longitude is displayed on the Homescreen, you have a valid position fix. If the text
turns red, your fix accuracy is low.

The sky view on the left side of the page shows the position of navigation satellites and the
constellation they belong to. The color of the satellite identifies its status:
• Grey = searching for satellite.
• Green = satellite in use.
• Orange = tracking satellite.

GNSS (GPS) Settings

The settings for your GNSS (GPS) receiver (internal or external) can be accessed from the Satellites
menu: Homescreen > GNSS pop-over > Satellites > Settings.

From the GNSS Settings tab you can:

• activate and deactivate use of Differential positioning (SBAS)
• set the COG/SOG filter according to your vessel’s oscillation, which provides more stable COG
and SOG readings
• enable and disable your MFD’s internal GNSS (GPS) receiver. Disable it if you do not want to use
this unit’s internal GNSS (GPS) receiver as a source for positioning data.
• restart the GNSS (GPS) receiver that is being used as the source for your positioning data.

60
5.8 My data
Selecting My data from the Homescreen provides access to user data such as Waypoints, Routes,
Tracks, Fuel and Trip data and also media Files. You can also Import/export User data and MFD
settings.

Selecting Waypoints, Routes or Tracks displays the relevant list, where you can manage and
customize your data.
Selecting Fuel/Trip displays the Fuel manager and Trip counters.
Selecting Files opens a file browser.
Selecting Import/export allows you to backup or restore user data and MFD settings using an
external storage device.
Selecting Messages opens a list of secure messages you have sent from your system, or received
from other first responder vessels. This feature requires an AIS5000 unit on the system, and
the Responder settings must also be configured correctly. For more information, refer to:
p.84 — Responder setup

Fuel/trip manager
The fuel/trip manager collects trip data automatically based on distance travelled and provides an
estimate of how much fuel you have remaining based on user inputted fuel refill data.
The Fuel/trip manager can be accessed by selecting Fuel/Trip from the My Data page: Homescreen
> My Data > Fuel/Trip.

Homescreen 61
1. Estimated fuel remaining
2. Set all tanks full — Select when you have filled up all tanks.
3. Add partial fuel fill — Select to enter a specific volume of fuel during a partial tank fill.
Note: If you enter the wrong amount of fuel this can be corrected by entering a minus value as
a partial fuel fill, this will reduce the total amount of fuel remaining by the amount entered.

4. Trip (Manual) — accumulates data until reset.

5. Trip (Day) — resets automatically when local time passes midnight.
6. Trip (Month) — resets automatically on the 1st day of the month.
7. Trip (Season) — accumulates data until reset.
8. Reset trip — The Trip (Manual) and Trip (Season) logs can be reset by selecting the relevant
Reset Trip button.
Note:
• The Fuel manager estimates the amount of fuel remaining onboard based on logging each time
you fill up, your vessel’s total fuel capacity, and how much fuel is burned by your engine(s).
Incorrect entries will affect the fuel calculations which could result in a shortage of fuel.
• The Fuel remaining calculation is an estimate and will be inaccurate if fuel fills are not entered,
entered incorrectly, or if fuel is used by other sources (e.g.: generators).
• Distance to Empty and Time to Empty values are based on estimated fuel remaining calculations
which do not take into account the effects of weather and tide on fuel usage.
• This system is not a substitute for other fuel calculations. You should not rely on the Fuel
manager calculations for accurate voyage planning or in emergency and safety critical situations.

62
Fuel set up

1. Enable/Disable Fuel manager.

2. Total fuel capacity — Sum of total capacity of all your fuel tanks.
3. Economy units — Economy units used in data overlays, Side bars or the Dashboard app.
4. Fuel used (PGN 127497) — Use this option if your engine(s) supply Fuel used data. When Fuel
used is selected the Fuel manager will continue to operate when the MFD is switched off. This
option usually provides more accurate readings.
5. Fuel flow rate (PGN 127489) — this option estimates fuel calculations based on fuel flow rate
data sent by your engine(s). Your MFD must remain switched on, whilst engines are running.
6. Detect fuel messages — If you are unsure which engine messages your engine provides, select
this option to determine the correct message.

Setting up the Fuel manager

To start using the Fuel manager you must first specify the total capacity of your fuel tanks, and then
fill the tanks to set a reference level for the Fuel manager.
From the Fuel set-up page: Homescreen > My Data > Fuel/Trip > Fuel set-up:
1. Select the box next to Total fuel capacity: and enter the total capacity of all of your fuel tanks.
2. Select the Fuel manager toggle switch to enable the Fuel manager.
3. Select the box next to Economy units: and select either: Distance per volume, Volume per
distance, or Litres per 100km.
4. Select either Fuel used (PGN 127497) or Fuel flow rate (PGN 127489). If you are unsure, select
Detect fuel messages to detect which messages are available to your MFD.
5. Fill up your fuel tanks.
6. Once the tanks are full, select Set all tanks full from the Fuel Trip page.
7. Log each subsequent fuel fill whether partial or full.

Homescreen 63
Files
The file browser can be used to Open and Delete photos / images and PDF documents, saved
to external storage, and can also be used to Import or Delete user data and MFD settings files)
saved to external storage.

• Selecting a storage device expands its contents, allowing you to browse the contents.
• Selecting an image or PDF file provides pop-over options to open or delete the file.
• Selecting a user data (.gpx) or MFD settings (.lh3) file provides pop-over options to Import or
Delete the file.
Note:
Only file types that are supported by your MFD will be visible in the browser.

View PDFs
PDF files can be viewed by opening them directly from the file browser or opening them using the
PDF Viewer app. For more information on the PDF Viewer app refer to Chapter 17 PDF Viewer app

Import/export
User data and MFD settings can be imported and exported from your MFD. User data (Waypoint,
Routes and Tracks) is saved in the common .gpx file format. MFD settings will be saved in .lh3 format.
The Import/export page can be accessed from the My data page: Homescreen > My data >
Import/export.

Saving user data (My data)

You can backup your user data (waypoints, routes and tracks) to a MicroSD card.
1. Insert a memory card into your display’s card reader.
2. Select Save data to card from the Import/export page: Homescreen > My data > Import/export.
A pop-over menu is displayed.
3. Select the desired option:
• Save all data to save (export) all waypoints, routes and tracks.
• Save waypoints to save (export) all waypoints.
• Save routes to save (export) all routes.
• Save tracks to save (export) all tracks.
4. Select Save to save the user data using the default filename. Alternatively:
i. Use the onscreen keyboard to enter your own filename and then select Save.
5. Select OK to return to the Import/export page, or select Eject card to safely remove the memory
card.
The user data file is saved to the ‘\Raymarine\My Data\’ directory of your memory card in gpx format.

64
Saving MFD settings
You can backup your MFD’s settings to an external storage device, allowing you to restore your
personalized MFD settings at a later date.
Important:
• Saving your MFD settings will also save any new or customized dashboard pages.
• Digital switching dashboard pages will not be saved when saving your MFD’s settings.
1. Insert a memory card into a card reader slot on your MFD.
2. Select Save settings from the Import/export page: Homescreen > My data > Import/export.
3. Select the relevant card slot from the Info dialog.
4. Select Save to save the user data using the default filename. Alternatively:
i. Use the onscreen keyboard to enter your own filename and select Save.
5. Select OK to return to the Import/export page, or select Eject card to safely remove the memory
card.

Importing user data or MFD settings from a memory card

You can restore user data (waypoints, routes and tracks) from an external storage device.
Important:
• Restoring your MFD settings will also restore any new or customized dashboard pages.
• Digital switching dashboard pages will not be restored when importing your MFD’s settings.

1. Insert the memory card containing your saved data into a card reader slot.
2. Select Import from card from the Import/export page: Homescreen > My data > Import/export.
The file browser is displayed
3. Navigate to the gpx or lh3 file that you want to import.

User data and MFD settings files will be located in the \Raymarine\My Data\ folder on your
memory card.

4. Select the file.

The import will commence.
5. If importing a gpx file, select OK when complete, alternatively
6. If importing MFD settings, select Yes to confirm restoring your MFD’s settings.

Your MFD will reboot to complete the process.

5.9 Secure messaging

Vessels connected to an AIS5000 unit and set to responder activity upon initial setup can send and
receive secure text messages with other properly equipped vessels via the My data tab
Homescreen > My data > Messages
Note:
For more information on responder setup refer to p.84 — Responder setup

Homescreen 65
Message inbox
The inbox stores all direct messages and broadcasts that you have sent and received from other
responder vessels.

1. Received broadcasts and direct messages (grey, left side).

2. Sent broadcasts and direct messages (white, right side).
3. New broadcast — Send a broadcast to all responder vessels.
4. New direct message — Send a direct message to a specific responder vessel.
Note:
Messages older than 72 hours will be removed from the inbox after a power cycle.

New broadcast
Select New broadcast to send a broadcast to all responder vessels.
New broadcast opens the onscreen keyboard where you can type your broadcast message. When
you are happy with your message select Send to broadcast the message.

New direct message

Select New direct message to send a direct message to a specific responder vessel.
New direct message opens the Recipent page where you can select Recent (recent message
senders and recipients) contacts and Buddy contacts.
Choose a recent or buddy contact and select Next to proceed to the onscreen keyboard. When you
are happy with your message select Send to send the message.
If a recipient is not a Buddy contact and does not appear in the Recent list, you can manually enter
their MMSI number to send them a direct message.

Direct messaging within the Chart or Radar app

You can send direct messages to a Blueforce AIS target in the Chart or Radar
apps. To do this, perform a long press on a Blueforce vessel and then select Send
message from the context menu.
For more information on Blueforce AIS targets, refer to: p.139 — Blue Force overview

66
Reply to messages
You can reply to direct messages and broadcasts in the Inbox.
To reply, perform a long hold on a received direct message or broadcast until the context menu
appears:
• Reply — Reply to a direct message with a direct message.
• Broadcast reply — Reply to a broadcast with a broadcast.
• Reply / Broadcast reply (with Link ID) — Reply to a direct message or broadcast that has a link ID
by responding with a direct message or broadcast that contains the same link ID.

Onscreen keyboard
Use the onscreen keyboard to type your messages. Messages can contain a maximum of 57
characters.

Selecting the Template Text icon will change the onscreen keyboard to a list of
template messages that can be quickly added to the message when selected.
Selecting My Position will enter your vessel’s current coordinates into the message.
Note:
Coordinates entered into the message display degrees as ‘DEG’.

Message symbols
Symbols attached to messages in the Inbox indicate its type and status.
Broadcast — A broadcast to all other responder vessels.

Direct message — A direct message to a specific responder vessel.

Sender — Indicates the sender (left of the arrow) and recipient (right of the arrow) of
a direct message.

Homescreen 67
 Message sent — Direct message has been sent and acknowledged by the recipient’s
hardware.

Message sending — Direct message is still waiting to be acknowledged as successfully

received by the recipient’s hardware.
Note:
A maximum number of 4 attempts will be made to send the message by the sender’s
hardware, with 150 seconds of separation between each attempt.

Message failed to send — Direct message has failed to be acknowledged by the

recipient's hardware.
Note:
The failed message will remain in the Inbox.

Link ID — A link ID generated and used by responder vessels.

Note:
Replying to a direct message or broadcast that has a link ID will send a reply that
contains the same link ID.

5.10 Alarms
Alarms are used to alert you to a situation or hazard requiring your attention. Alarms are triggered
by system functions and external devices connected to the MFD (Multifunction Displays). Alarms
are displayed on all networked MFDs.
Alarms are color coded to signify their severity:

Dangerous alarms

Red — A Red notification is used to signify a dangerous alarm condition, immediate action is required
due to a potential or immediate danger to life or vessel. Dangerous alarms are accompanied by an
audible tone. The Dangerous alarm notification and audible tone will continue to be displayed until
acknowledged or the conditions that triggered the alarm are no longer present. Acknowledged
alarms may remain active whilst the alarm condition persists but will not trigger further onscreen or
audible notifications.

Warning alarms

Orange — An Orange notification is used to signify a warning alarm condition. Warnings alarms are
used to signify that there has been a change in situation that you need to be aware of. Warnings
alarms are accompanied by an audible tone. The warning alarm notification and audible tone will
continue to be displayed until acknowledged or the conditions that triggered the alarm are no longer
present. Acknowledged alarms may remain active whilst the alarm condition persists but will not
trigger further onscreen or audible notifications.

68
Notifications

Blue — A Blue notification is used to signify information requiring user acknowledgement. Unless
they require user interaction, information notifications may self dismiss after 3 seconds. Information
notifications are not accompanied by an audible tone and are not displayed in the Active alarms
or Alarm history lists.

Alarm manager
The Alarm manager is used to list current active alarms, enable and disable alarms, adjust alarm
thresholds and view Alarm history.
Active alarms
The Alarm manager can be accessed by selecting Alarms from the Homescreen.
Example: Active alarms tab

The Active alarms tab lists all alarms that are currently active. Alarms will remain active until
the conditions that triggered the alarm are no longer present, e.g.: a Shallow depth alarm will
automatically dismiss when the depth becomes deeper.

Homescreen 69
Alarm history

Example: Alarm history tab

All Dangerous (Red) and Warning (Orange) alarms will appear in the Alarm history list. The history
list will include an entry for the alarm being triggered (raised) and also for when the alarm is
acknowledged (cleared). The Alarm field contains the name of the alarm and the events field contains
details of the alarm condition and its time and date.
The Alarm history list can be cleared by selecting Clear history.

Active alarm indication

Your MFD can be configured to provide active alarm indication from the Homescreen and from MFD
apps. When enabled the Homescreen Alarms icon and MFD app’s Home icon will indicate that
an alarm is currently active.
Active alarm indication can be enabled and disabled from the alarms settings tab: Homescreen >
Alarms > Settings > Home button active alarm indicator.

The Home icon will turn Red and have an exclamation mark placed inside it.
The Homescreen Alarms icon will display the number of active alarms.

70
Alarm settings
Depending on connected peripheral hardware the alarms listed below can be enabled and disabled
and where applicable alarms thresholds can be set or changed.
Alarm Description Options
Dangerous Radar targets If enabled, an alarm is triggered • On
when Radar targets become
• Off
dangerous. Radar targets are
deemed dangerous when they
are within the specified:
• Safe distance — Closest
Point of Approach (CPA), or
• Time to reach safe distance
— Time to Closest Point of
Approach (TCPA)
Lost Radar targets If enabled, an alarm is triggered • On
when dangerous Radar targets
• Off
become lost (i.e.: no Radar
return from the target has been
received for 20 seconds).
Dangerous AIS targets If enabled, an alarm is triggered • On
when AIS targets become
• Off
dangerous. AIS targets are
deemed dangerous when they
are within the specified:
• Safe distance — Closest
Point of Approach (CPA), or
• Time to reach safe distance
— Time to Closest Point of
Approach (TCPA)
Guard zone 1 If enabled, an alarm is triggered • On
when Radar returns are
• Off
detected within the specified
guard zone 1.
Guard zone 2 If enabled, an alarm is triggered • On
when Radar returns are
• Off
detected within the specified
guard zone 2.
Waypoint arrival If enabled, when you arrive at a • On
waypoint, an alarm is triggered.
• Off
This setting allows you to select
one of three different types of
radius, and then specify the
radius size for the arrival alarm.
When your vessel crosses this
imaginary circle, the Waypoint
Arrival alarm is triggered.
Arrival radius — This value can Radius can be set from 20 m
be set when the MFD is NOT in to 10 NM. (Dependent on
pilot integration mode and the units of measure you specify
pilot is in Track mode. for Distance units in System
Settings).
Pilot track mode radius — This Radius can be set from 20 m
can be used when the MFD is to 10 NM. (Dependent on
integrated with a pilot and the units of measure you specify
pilot is in Track mode. for Distance units in System
Settings).

Homescreen 71
 Alarm Description Options
Search route arrival radius — Radius can be set from 3 m
This can be used when the to 10 NM. (Dependent on
MFD is following a SAR route. units of measure you specify
Also helpful when race sailing for Distance units in System
and using Laylines or when Settings).
fishing, as this alarm setting
provides a much tighter default
radius to ensure you don't get
alerted too far away from the
target waypoint.
Off track If enabled, during active • On
navigation an alarm is triggered
• Off
when your vessel steers off
track by more than the specified Cross-track error value
Cross track error value.
Anchor drift If enabled, an Alarm is triggered • On
when your vessel drifts from
• Off
your anchor position by more
than the specified Drift range. Drift range value
Low fuel remaining If enabled, an alarm is triggered • On
when the fuel remaining in your
• Off
fuel tanks reaches the Fuel
level specified. Fuel level value
The Fuel manager must be
enabled for alarms to be
triggered.
DSC alarms If enabled, an alarm is triggered • On
when DSC distress calls are
• Off
received.
A connected VHF radio is
required in order to trigger DSC
distress call alarms via the MFD.
AIS safety messages If enabled, an alarm is triggered • On
when AIS safety messages are
• Off
received.
A connected AIS device is
required in order to display AIS
safety messages via the MFD.
MOB data type Determines whether the MOB • Dead reckoning
waypoint is fixed at the position
• Position (fixed)
the alarm was triggered, or
advances its position based on
tide and wind effects.
Dead reckoning normally
provides a more accurate
course.
Fishing range If enabled, an alarm is triggered • On
when your Depth reading
• Off
reaches the depth specified in
Shallow water arrival or Deep Shallow water arrival value
water arrival. Deep water arrival value
Water temperature alarm If enabled, an alarm is • On
triggered when the water
• Off
temperature reading reaches
the temperature specified in Lower temp limit value
Lower temp limit or Upper temp Upper temp limit value
limit.

72
 Alarm Description Options
Digital switching alarms When your system includes • On
Digital switching a list of all
• Off
configured Digital switching
alarms will be displayed.
AX8 camera messages If enabled, AX8 camera • On
messages will be presented as
• Off
alarms on your MFD.
A connected AX8 camera is
required in order to display
camera messages via the MFD.
Engine alarms If enabled, alarms will be • On
triggered when engine warning
• Off
alarms are received from
connected, compatible engine
management systems or
interfaces.
Home button active alarm If enabled, when an alarm is • On
indicator active the onscreen Home icon
• Off
is colored Red and contains a
warning triangle.

External alarm speaker / buzzer

If your MFD has a built-in buzzer or is connected to a wired external buzzer then MFD alarms will
trigger an audible tone. If you connect your MFD to a Bluetooth speaker then the alarm tone can also
be heard from the speaker as well.
When connected to a Bluetooth speaker a separate volume control is available to control the volume
of MFD Alarms sounded through the speaker. Please refer to the Bluetooth speaker pairing details.

Acknowledging alarms
Follow the steps below to acknowledge an active alarm.
With an alarms notification displayed onscreen:
1. Select OK.
The notification is dismissed and the audible tone is stopped.
An acknowledged alarm remains active until the conditions that triggered the alarm are no longer
present.
Note:
If an alarm notification includes an Edit button, selecting it will display the relevant setting in the
Alarms menu so that, if required, you can change the alarm threshold.

Digital switching alarms

When your MFD is connected to a Digital switching system, alarms specific to your installation can be
enabled and disabled using the Alarm manager.

Homescreen 73
Example: Digital switching alarms

Each Digital switching system may be unique, with the alarms being defined when your system
was configured.

5.11 Man Overboard (MOB)

If a person or object falls overboard, you can use the Man Overboard (MOB) feature to mark the
position that your vessel was at when the MOB alarm was activated.
The MOB feature can be activated by pressing and holding on the MOB icon on the
Homescreen.

The MOB waypoint icon displayed at the top of all apps.

74
The MOB feature requires your vessel to have a valid position fix from a GNSS (GPS) receiver. Dead
reckoning mode also requires Heading and Speed data.
When you activate the MOB alarm:
• an audible alarm is sounded which is repeated every 30 seconds until the alarm is cancelled.
• a MOB Databar providing Bearing and range from MOB, and elapsed time since MOB was initiated,
is displayed along the top of the screen. The Databar persists across apps and the Homescreen,
and remains until the MOB alarm is cancelled.
• a MOB warning is displayed in the bottom of the screen, which requires acknowledgement.
• the Chart app is placed in a special MOB mode to help you navigate back to the point your vessel
was at when the MOB was initiated.

MOB mode
MOB can be set to Dead Reckoning or Position mode. Dead Reckoning mode will take into
consideration the effects of wind and tides. This usually provides a more accurate course. Position
mode does not take these factors into account. You can change the MOB mode at anytime from the
Alarms menu: Homescreen > Alarms > Settings > MOB data type:.

5.12 Settings
The Settings menu is accessible from the bottom of the Homescreen and contains important
information and settings for your MFD.
The Settings menu is divided into different tabs, the settings available are:
Tab Settings
Getting started • View hardware and software information about your MFD.
• View cartography details for inserted chart cards.
• Update MFD software
• View the LoU disclaimer (Getting started tab).
• Change the user interface language.
• View the Regulatory approvals.
Boat details • Set boat icon and name.
• Configure Sailing [Sailing vessel’s only].

Homescreen 75
 Tab Settings
• Configure Minimum safe depth, height and width.
• Configure engines.
• Configure batteries.
• Configure fuel tanks.
Units • Configure preferred units of measurement.
• Configure Bearing mode.
• Configure variation.
• Configure GNSS (GPS) system datum.
• Set time differentials.
This display • Assign a Homescreen page or app to start on power up.
• Select save location for screenshots.
• (1)Configure User Programmable Button (UPB; Axiom Pro displays only).
• Configure Shared brightness.
• (2)Change or reset Splashscreen graphic.
• Pair / unpair connected RMK external keypads.
• (3)Enable / disable external alarm output.
• (2)Connect to a wireless display.
• Wi-Fi Sharing, pair with a wireless Quantum Radar scanner, configure Wi-Fi
settings and set mobile app access.
• (2)Connect to a Bluetooth device.
• Perform a Settings or Factory reset.
Autopilot • Enable / Disable Autopilot control.
• Set autopilot response.
• Access advanced autopilot settings.
Network • View list of networked MFDs.
• Assign the MFD Data master.
• View software and network details for the MFD you are using.
• Rename connected network devices.
• Save or Erase diagnostics logs to external storage.
• View and Save Diagnostic information about products connected to your
MFD.
• (4)Set up NMEA 0183 options on an Axiom Pro.
• Assign your preferred data sources (Data master only).
Responder • Set responder vessel type and name.
(Requires AIS5000
• Enter MMSI.
and boat activity set
to First Responder) • Set AIS mode.
• Set passphrase.
• Set number of days before passphrase auto-wipe.

76
 Note:
(1) Available on Axiom™ Pro MFDs.
(2) Available on Axiom™, Axiom™ Pro and Axiom™ XL MFDs.
(3) Available on Axiom™ XL and gS Series MFDs.
(4) Available on Axiom™ Pro, Axiom™ XL, eS Series and gS Series MFDs.

Selecting display language

You can choose which language you want the display’s user interface to use.
1. Select the Language button from the Getting started menu: Homescreen > Settings > Getting
started > Language:.
2. Select your desired language.

User Interface languages

The following languages are available:
Arabic (ar-AE) Bulgarian (bg-BG) Chinese (Simplified) Chinese (Traditional)
(zh-CN) (zh-TW)
Croatian (hr-HR) Czech (cs-CZ) Danish (da-DK) Dutch (nl-NL)
English (en-GB) English (en-US) Estonian (et-EE) Finnish (fi-FI)
French (fr-FR) German (de-DE) Greek (el-GR) Hebrew (he-IL)
Hungarian (he-IL) Icelandic (is-IS) Indonesian (Bahasa) Italian (it-IT)
(id-ID)
Japanese (ja-JP) Korean (ko-KR) Latvian (lv-LV) Lithuanian (lt-LT)
Malay (Bahasa) (ms-MY Norwegian (nb-NO) Polish (pl-PL) Portuguese (Brazilian)
ZSM) (pt-BR)
Russian (ru-RU) Slovenian (sl-SI) Spanish (es-ES) Swedish (sv-SE)
Thai (th-TH) Turkish (tr-TR) Vietnamese (vi-VN)

Boat details
To ensure correct operation and display of data you should set the Boat Details settings according
to your requirements.
Boat details can be accessed from the Settings menu: Homescreen > Settings > Boat Details
Option Description
Boat /Icon: Selection determines the icon used to signify your vessel in the Chart app.
Boat Name: Configures your system with your vessel’s name.
[Sailing only] Select Fixed Angles or Polar laylines.
Sail performance:
[Sailing only] Select your vessel’s Boat type to provide more accurate leeway
Boat type: calculations.
[Sailing only] Set the angle of upwind layline calculations.
[Fixed Angles only]
Upwind angle:
[Sailing only] Set the angle of downwind layline calculations.
[Fixed Angles only]
Downwind angle:
[Sailing only] Select the Polar table that will define your layline calculation.
[Polar only]
Polar:

Homescreen 77
 Option Description
Min safe height: Enter your vessel’s maximum unladen height from the waterline. To ensure
adequate clearance, it is recommended that you add a safety margin to
this figure to allow for variation caused by vessel movements.
Min safe width: Enter your vessel’s maximum width at its widest point. To ensure adequate
clearance on both sides, it is recommended that you add a safety margin
for port and starboard to this figure to allow for variation caused by vessel
movements.
Min safe depth: Enter your vessel’s maximum depth when fully laden. This is the depth
from the waterline to the lowest point on the vessel’s keel. To ensure
adequate clearance, it is recommended that you add a safety margin to
this figure to allow for variation caused by vessel movements.
Num of engines: Select the number of engines on your vessel. When connected to a
compatible system, your MFD can monitor engine data.
Identify engines: Once you have selected the number of engines, select Identify engines
and follow the onscreen instructions to configure your engines. May
require an extra hardware interface to enable engine data to be displayed.
Engine manufac- Select your engine’s manufacturer.
turer:
[Num of engines 2 Select whether your MFD is displaying for a twin engine system, or for the
only] port or starboard side of a quad engine system.
Configure Yamaha
Quad display:
Num of Batteries: Configures your system with the number of batteries on your vessel.
Tanks: Calibrate your vessel’s tanks.

Calibrating tanks
When displaying tank levels on your MFD it’s important to ensure the levels are correctly calibrated.
Failure to do so may result in inaccurate level readings.
Tanks can be calibrated and edited on the Boat details page: Homescreen > Settings > Boat details.
Tanks can be calibrated with the following Oceanic Systems tank senders:
• 3271 Volumetric Fuel Sender
• 3281 Water Level Senders
• 3125 Tank Sender Adapter
• 4291 Tank Level Adapter

Note:
• Ensure tanks are empty before calibration.
• Completing calibration will overwrite any existing calibration already recorded.
1. Press configure
2. Select the tank you want to calibrate; a dialog will be displayed
3. Set the tank’s capacity
4. Select calibrate and choose the desired method for tank calibration:

78
 i. Run wizard
ii. Import calibration

Run wizard calibration

You can calibrate your tank by setting a series of calibration points and filling your tank in intervals.
The shape of your tank determines how many calibration points you should enter for calibration. 2
calibration points are required as a minimum, but up to 101 points can be entered. Generally, the
more calibration points entered the more precise tank readings will be.
Additional calibration points are used to account for changes in tank volume at different parts of
an irregularly shaped tank. Depending on the size and shape of your tank it is recommended that
you enter calibration points to mark each change in the shape of the fuel tank; for example, straight
corners require an additional point, and slopes require 2 points.

The illustration above shows the minimum number of calibration points recommended for some
typical tank shapes:
1. The tank shown on the left is rectangular and symmetrical; it only requires 2 calibration points to
define the bottom and top of the tank.
2. The tank shown in the center has a greater volume at the bottom; 3 points are required to define
the bottom, top and corner of the fuel tank.
3. The tank shown on the right has a greater volume at the bottom and is sloped. 4 points are
required to define the bottom of the tank, the top, and a further 2 points to define the slope.
Wizard Calibration
1. Select the number of calibration points (minimum of 2) and press next.

Homescreen 79
2. Fill the tank to the units displayed on screen and press Ok.
3. To complete the calibration process, repeat step 2 until the tank has been filled.

Import calibration
You can calibrate your tanks by importing CSV files that contain specific tank calibration data. These
files are typically supplied by tank manufacturers or dealers.
Note: CSV files used for import calibration must start with: ‘0,0’ and end in: ‘100,100’

To Import calibration via CSV file:

1. Select the appropriate CSV file from the file explorer.
2. Press Yes .

Units of measure
You can select your preferred units for data readings from the Units tab of the Settings menu:
Homescreen > Settings > Units.
Measurement Units
Distance units • Nautical Miles
• NM & m
• Statute Miles
• Kilometers
Speed units • Kts
• MPH
• KPH
Depth units • Meters
• Feet
• Fathoms
Temperature units • Celsius
• Fahrenheit
Date format • MM : DD : YYYY
• DD : MM : YYYY
• MM : DD : YY
• DD : MM : YY
Volume units • US Gallons
• Imperial Gallons
• Liters
Economy units • Distance per Volume
• Volume per Distance
• Liters per 100 km
Wind speed units • Knots
• Meters per Second
Pressure units • Bar
• PSI
• Kilopascals
Time format • 12hr
• 24hr

80
Data master
Systems containing more than one MFD must have a designated Data master MFD. The Data
master is the primary MFD in the network, and should be the MFD that is physically connected to
the SeaTalkng ® / NMEA 2000 CAN bus network, and any other devices and sources of data in
your system. The Data master bridges the data over the SeaTalkhs ™ network to any compatible
networked ‘repeater’ MFDs.
Information shared by the Data master includes:
• Cartography
• Waypoints, Routes and Tracks
• Radar
• Sonar
• Data received from the autopilot, GNSS (GPS) receiver, instruments, transducers, the engine
and any other compatible external sources.
Note: Your system may be wired for redundancy with data connections made to repeat displays.
However these connections will only become active in the event of a fault and / or reassignment of
the data master.

Switching Data Master

You can switch the MFD you want to be the Data master at any time.

From the Network tab: Homescreen > Settings > Network:

1. From the list, select the MFD you want to designate as the new Data master.
2. Select Assign as Data Master from the pop-over options.

Shared Brightness
Shared brightness enables simultaneous brightness adjustment of all displays that are part of the
same group.
The following products are compatible with shared brightness:
• LightHouse™ 3 MFDs using software version 3.4 or greater.
• LightHouse™ or LightHouse™ 2 powered MFDs.
• SeaTalkng ® Instrument displays and Pilot controllers.
• SeaTalkng ® VHF DSC Radios.
• RMK-9 and RMK-10 remote keypads.
Any adjustments to the shared brightness level will be applied to all displays assigned to the same
group.

Homescreen 81
 LightHouse™ / LightHouse™ 2 MFD Instrument display / Pilot controller

VHF DSC Radio LightHouse™ 3 V3.4 or greater

Multiple brightness groups can be configured. For example, these groups could be used to reflect
the physical location of displays on your vessel e.g.: helm and flybridge.
Shared brightness requires:
• all units to be compatible with the shared brightness function (see list of compatible units above).
• the Shared brightness setting set to On for all displays in the brightness group.
• units to be assigned to network groups.
• all the displays in each group to be synchronized.
Setting up shared brightness
Before setting up Shared brightness on your MFD, ensure that all displays that you want to use
Shared brightness are switched on and set to the same Display group as your MFD.
1. Select This display from the Settings menu: Homescreen > Settings > This display.
2. Select Display group.
A list of available display groups is displayed.
3. Select the Display group that you want the MFD to be part of (All displays that you want to share
brightness with must be set to the same group).
4. Enable Shared brightness using the Toggle switch.
5. Select Sync.
‘Shared brightness active’ is displayed when complete.

Customizing the splashscreen

The standard AXIOM splashscreen, displayed on start up, can be customized on Axiom™, Axiom™
Pro, and Axiom™ XL displays.
Custom Image requirements:

82
• The customized image must be in .png, .bmp or .jpg format.
• Custom images cannot exceed the maximum resolution supported by your MFD.
• For optimum image quality, the resolution of the splashscreen image should match the resolution
of your MFD. Refer to the following table: Axiom screen resolutions.
Note:
• Splashscreen settings are unique to each MFD and are not shared across the network with
other MFDs.
• Custom splashscreens are not available on eS Series and gS Series MFDs that have been
upgraded to run LightHouse 3 software.
1. Save your custom image to a MicroSD card and insert the card into a card reader slot on your
MFD or connected card reader.
2. Select This display from the Settings menu: Homescreen > Settings > This display.
3. Select the image name next to Splashscreen:.
The file browser is displayed.
4. Browse to your custom image and select it.
5. Select Yes .
The image is imported to your MFD’s internal storage.
The next time your MFD powers up, your custom image will be displayed.

Axiom screen resolutions

The screen resolutions for Axiom™, Axiom™ Pro, and Axiom™ XL displays are shown below.
MFD variant Screen resolution (W x H)
Axiom™ 7 800 x 480
Axiom™ 9 800 x 480
Axiom™ 12 1280 x 800
Axiom™ Pro 9 1280 x 720
Axiom™ Pro 12 1280 x 800
Axiom™ Pro 16 1920 x 1080
Axiom™ XL 16 1920 x 1080
Axiom™ XL 19 1920 x 1080
Axiom™ XL 22 1920 x 1080
Axiom™ XL 24 1920 x 1200

Resetting the splashscreen graphic

1. Select This display from the Settings menu: Homescreen > Settings > This display.
2. Select the Reset from the Splashscreen section.
3. Select Yes .
The next time your MFD starts up the standard AXIOM splashscreen will be displayed.

NMEA 0183 settings

NMEA 0183 devices can be connected to Axiom™ Pro, Axiom™ XL, eS Series, and gS Series MFDs
using the NMEA 0183 wires on the supplied Power/Video/NMEA 0183 cable.
2 NMEA 0183 ports are available:
• Port 1: Input and output, 4,800 or 38,400 baud rate.
• Port 2: Input only, 4,800 or 38,400 baud rate.
The baud rate for each input port must be specified in the NMEA set-up menu (Homescreen >
Settings > Network > NMEA set-up ).

Homescreen 83
 Note:
• For Port 1, both the input and output communicate at the same baud rate. For example, if you
have one NMEA 0183 device connected to Port 1 INPUT, and another NMEA 0183 device
connected to Port 1 OUTPUT, both NMEA devices must use the same baud rate.

NMEA 0183 settings

The following options are available from the NMEA Set-up menu.
Menu item Description Options
NMEA Port 1 Baud rate selection. • 4,800
• 38,400
NMEA input port 2 Baud rate selection. • 4,800
• 38,400
Bridge heading Bridge heading data from NMEA 0183 to NMEA • Yes
2000 / SeaTalkng ®
• No
Transmission mode Switches between Single-ended and • Single-ended
Differential transmission modes.
• Differential
The Differential transmission mode supports
higher speeds, longer cable runs, and better
data integrity. Differential mode works when
connected to opto-isolated inputs, as specified
by the NMEA 0183 standard.
The Single-ended mode is required when
sending a signal to a single-ended receiver
device, such as a PC for example.
Refer to the NMEA 0400 Installation Standard
for wiring guidelines for the different
transmission modes.
Note: Only available on Axiom™ Pro and
Axiom™ XL displays.

Individual outputs List of NMEA 0183 sentences for which the • Enabled
output can be disabled.
• Disabled

Responder setup
The Responder settings tab allows you to setup secure AIS transmission between Blue Force vessels.
Note:
• Blue Force features require an AIS5000 connected to your MFD network.
• Requires LightHouse software version 3.10 or later.
• Requires that MFD boating activity is set to First Responder during first time setup or a factory
reset. This profile is only available if an AIS5000 unit is connected to the MFD, prior to
power up.
• For more information on Blue Force, refer to: p.139 — Blue Force SITREP

Setting Description
Responder vessel type Select your responder vessel type from a list.
Boat name Enter your vessel name (this option is also
available in Boat Details)

84
 Setting Description
MMSI Set your vessel’s MMSI number.
Important:
• In the United States of America (USA), the
MMSI and Static Data must be entered
only by a Raymarine® dealer or other
appropriately qualified installer of marine
communications equipment for marine
vessels. In the USA, the user is NOT
authorized to do this.
• In Europe and other parts of the world
outside of the United States of America, the
MMSI can be set up by the user.
• For further details, refer to the relevant
Telecommunications Regulatory Body for
your region.

AIS mode • Normal — In this mode your AIS hardware will

receive and transmit standard ITU position
messages and secure ASMs (Application
Specific Messages).
• Receive only — In this mode your AIS
hardware will receive standard ITU position
messages and secure ASMs it will not transmit
any messages (maintaining radio silence).
• Restricted — In this mode your AIS hardware
will receive standard ITU position messages
and secure ASMs, but will only transmit secure
ASMs.
Passphrase Enter the designated passphrase your team /
organization is using to transmit and receive
secure AIS messages.
Clear passphrase Deletes the entered passphrase.
Passphrase auto-wipe Passphrase expiry. Set the number of days
before the passphrase is automatically deleted
(the passphrase will be wiped at 00:00 UTC).

5.13 Connecting to a wireless display

Axiom™, Axiom™ Pro, and Axiom™ XL MFDs can be connected to a wireless display using an external
dongle or a display that has built-in support. When connected the MFD’s screen is mirrored on
the wireless display.
1. Follow the instructions provided with your wireless display / dongle to set up that specific device.
2. On the MFD, select the display icon found under Wireless display: on the This Display tab of the
Settings menu: (Homescreen > This Display > Wireless Display:).
Your MFD will search for available wireless displays.

Homescreen 85
3. Select the display you want to use.
4. If your MFD has Wi-Fi Sharing enabled then a PIN number is displayed on the wireless display,
input this pin number when requested by your MFD.
5. You may also be requested to allow the MFD to connect automatically in future, select Yes or
No as appropriate on your wireless display.
Your MFD screen will now be displayed on the select device.
6. To allow the wireless display to connect each time your MFD is powered on, enable Connect on
power up from the pop-over options.

Note:
1. Don’t forget to check your wireless display for any required confirmations / acknowledgements
during the connection process.
2. Some non Miracast-certified devices may not be able to connect with Wi-Fi Sharing enabled, in
this case disable Wi-Fi Sharing and try again.
3. If you experience connection issues, try disabling and enabling the wireless display feature on
your display and MFD, or power cycle both devices.
4. Once connected / paired to a wireless display do not change your MFD’s Wi-Fi Passphrase, as
on certain devices a factory reset maybe required to re-establish a connection.

Disconnecting a wireless display

With a wireless display connection active:
1. Select Disconnect from the This Display tab: (Homescreen > Settings > This Display > Wireless
Display: > Disconnect).

Unpairing a wireless display

With the wireless display connection active:
1. Select the connected display from the Wireless display menu: (Homescreen > Settings > This
Display > Wireless Display:).
2. Select the connected display from the list of available displays.
3. Select Unpair from the pop-over menu.

86
Chapter 6: Autopilot control

Chapter contents
• 6.1 Autopilot control on page 88
• 6.2 Pilot sidebar on page 89
• 6.3 Pilot pop-up on page 91
• 6.4 Autopilot Control — Advanced settings on page 91

Autopilot control 87
6.1 Autopilot control
Your MFD can be integrated with an Evolution autopilot system and act as the autopilot’s controller.
Please refer to the documentation supplied with your autopilot for details on installing and connecting
your autopilot to your MFD.
Autopilot control from your MFD can be enabled and disabled from the Autopilot tab in the Settings
menu: Homescreen > Settings > Autopilot > Pilot control.

1. Pilot icon — With Autopilot control enabled, the Pilot icon is displayed onscreen; selecting the
icon displays the Pilot sidebar. When the Autopilot is engaged the Pilot icon is replaced with
the Disengage pilot icon.
2. Pilot sidebar — The Pilot sidebar provides controls and information relating to your autopilot
system. With the Autopilot engaged the Pilot sidebar’s content is expanded to provide further
controls and information. The Pilot sidebar can be hidden by swiping the sidebar to the left.
The sidebar can be displayed again by swiping from the left of the screen towards the center
of the screen.

Engaging the autopilot — Locked heading

With Autopilot control enabled:
1. For Wheel and Tiller pilots, engage the mechanical drive by either engaging the wheel drive’s
clutch or attaching the pushrod onto the tiller pin.
2. Select the Autopilot icon.
The Pilot sidebar is displayed.
3. Select Steer to Hdg.
4. Select Engage pilot.

Engaging the autopilot — Navigation

With Autopilot control enabled:
1. For Wheel and Tiller pilots, engage the mechanical drive by either engaging the wheel drive’s
clutch or attaching the pushrod onto the tiller pin.
2. Initiate a Goto or Follow from the chart app.
3. Select the Autopilot icon.
The Pilot sidebar is displayed.
4. Select Steer to Nav.
5. Select either Engage pilot or if a cross track error exists then select ALONG route leg or DIRECT
from here.

88
 Selecting ALONG route leg will steer along the original track.
Selecting DIRECT from here will plot a new track from your current position to the destination.

Engaging and disengaging the autopilot - physical buttons

The process for engaging your autopilot using the physical buttons available on a RMK remote
keypad or an Axiom Pro is shown below.
1. Press and hold the Pilot button to engage the autopilot in Locked heading mode.
2. Press the Pilot button again to disengage the autopilot.

Disengaging the autopilot

You can disengage your autopilot at any time by selecting the Disengage pilot icon.
The Disengage pilot icon is available in all apps. It is also available on the Pilot sidebar, in Pilot pop
up messages, on the Homescreen and on the Shortcuts page.

6.2 Pilot sidebar

Depending on the state of your autopilot the following information and controls are available
on the Pilot sidebar.

Note: The Pilot sidebar is controlled using the Touchscreen.

Autopilot control 89
Pilot sidebar — Standby
1 Sidebar selection
Enables you to switch between Pilot and Data sidebars.
2 Close
Closes the Pilot sidebar.
3 Steer to Hdg
Enables you to engage the autopilot in locked heading (Auto) mode.
4 Steer to Nav
Enables you to engage the autopilot in Navigation (Track) mode.
5 Pilot status
Provides the status of the autopilot.
6 Rudder bar
Provides visual indication of rudder position.
7 Heading
Displays your autopilot’s current locked heading.
Selecting displays the Locked Heading adjustment pop-over.
8 –1°
Selecting will adjust your locked heading by minus 1 degree.
9 +1°
Selecting will adjust your locked heading by plus 1 degree.
10 –10°
Selecting will adjust your locked heading by minus 10 degrees.
11 +10°
Selecting will adjust your locked heading by plus 10 degrees.
12 Disengage
Selecting will disengage your autopilot.
13 Steer to Nav
Selecting will engage your autopilot in Navigation mode.
14 Pilot state
Displays the current state / mode of your autopilot.
15 Destination
Displays your current destination.
16 User customizable data
Displays user customizable data.
Select to customize data.
17 Advance wpt
Selecting will advance your destination to the next waypoint in the current route.
18 Stop Route / Stop Goto
Selecting will stop current navigation.
19 Restart here
Selecting will restart the cross track error (XTE) at your current location.
20 Disengage
Selecting will disengage your autopilot.
21 Steer to Hdg
Selecting will switch your autopilot to Locked heading mode.
22 Pilot state
Displays the current state / mode of your autopilot.

90
6.3 Pilot pop-up
During active navigation, when you reach your current destination the Pilot pop-up is displayed.
Goto

When performing a Goto the Pilot pop-up provides options to disengage the autopilot or to maintain
the current course in Locked heading mode.
Follow

When following a Route the Pilot pop-up provides options to make the required turn to the next
waypoint, disengage the autopilot or to maintain the current course in Locked heading mode.

6.4 Autopilot Control — Advanced settings

Menu item Description Options
Vessel hull type Selecting the hull type that is the closest match • Sail
for your vessel provides optimum steering
• Sail (slow turn)
performance.
• Sail Catamaran
• Power
• Power (slow turn)
• Power (fast turn)
Drive type Selecting the drive type that matches your List of drives compatible with
vessel’s drive will provide optimum drive your ACU.
performance.
Compass offset Adjust the Compass offset so that your • -10° to +10°
autopilot’s heading matches the ship’s
• 0° (default)
compass.
The display of autopilot heading data requires
a second networked MFD or pilot controller.
Compass offset will be adjusted automatically
during the Align compass to GPS procedure.
Speed input (1) Selects the source for speed data. • Auto (default)
• Water speed (STW)
• SOG
• Default cruise speed
Cruise speed (1) Set the Cruise speed value to your vessel’s • 4.0kts to 60.0kts
typical cruising speed.

Autopilot control 91
 Menu item Description Options
Calibration lock The calibration lock is used to lock out specific • On
calibration settings which if changed may
• Off
require recommissioning of the autopilot
system. If your system has been dealer
installed then the lock may be turned on.
Dockside wizard Dockside calibration must be carried out • Drive type
before using your autopilot for the first time.
• Rudder limit
The Dockside wizard guides you through the
dockside calibration process. • Align rudder
The steps included in the dockside wizard are
• Hard over time
dependent on whether you have a rudder
reference transducer fitted to your vessel. • Rudder drive check
Restart compass Select to restart the compass linearization • Start
procedure.
• Cancel
Compass lock Locks the compass linearization so that further • On
automatic linearization is not performed.
• Off
Align compass to Follow the onscreen instructions to align your
GPS (1) compass with your GPS heading.
Pilot factory reset Resets your autopilot’s settings to factory • Yes
default values.
• No
CCU debug level (1) Sets a debug value for troubleshooting • 0 to 63
purposes.
The debug level should only be set when
requested by Technical Support as part of a
troubleshooting process.
ACU debug level (1) Sets a debug value for troubleshooting • 0 to 63
purposes.
The debug level should only be set when
requested by Technical Support as part of a
troubleshooting process.
Rudder damping (1) Rudder damping is used to prevent the • 1 to 9
autopilot from “hunting” maneuvers. Always
• 3 (default)
use the lowest acceptable value.
Auto turn angle (1) Determines the amount of course change • 10° to 125°
when performing an auto turn.
• 90° (default)
Power steering (3) Determines the behavior of the Rotary or • Off
Joystick.
• Proportional
• Bang Bang
Reverse rudder ref Inverts the rudder reference display graphic. • On
(3)
• Off
Motor phasing (1) Switches the polarity of your drive motor. • A
Use if your drive polarity is inverted.
• B
Rudder offset (3) Adjust to specify the rudder offset from • -10° to +10°
amidships.
• 30° (default)
Rudder limit Specifies how far the rudder can move before • 10° to 50°
hitting its end stops.
• 30° (default)
The value should be set to approximately 5°
less than your maximum rudder angle.

92
 Menu item Description Options
Hard over time Specifies the time it takes for the rudder to • 1 to 100.0 seconds
move from hard port to hard starboard or vice
versa.
The default value is determined by your Drive
type selection.
Gybe inhibit (2) When set to Prevent Gybe the autopilot will • Allow Gybe
prevent you from performing an Auto tack
• Prevent Gybe
away from the wind.
Wind vane type (2) Selects whether wind data is True or Apparent. • Apparent
• True
Wind shift alarm (2) Enables and disables the Wind shift alarm. • On
• Off

Note:
(1) Option not available when Calibration lock is On.
(2) Only available when Vessel hull type is set to a Sailing vessel.
(3) Only available when a rudder reference transducer is connected.

Autopilot control 93
94
Chapter 7: Waypoints, Routes and Tracks

Chapter contents
• 7.1 Waypoints on page 96
• 7.2 Routes on page 98
• 7.3 Tracks on page 101

Waypoints, Routes and Tracks 95

7.1 Waypoints
Waypoints are used to mark specific locations or points of interest. Waypoints can be used in the
Chart, Radar and Fishfinder apps. Your MFD can store up to 10,000 waypoints which can be sorted
into up to 200 waypoint groups.
In the Chart app you can navigate to a waypoint by selecting Goto from the Waypoint context menu.

Placing a waypoint

1. Select and hold on the desired location and select Place waypoint from the context menu..
2. Select Edit to edit the waypoint details, Goto to navigate to the Waypoint, or OK to return
to normal operation.
To place a waypoint at your vessel’s current location press the
Waypoint/MOB icon or physical button.

Placing a waypoint at a specified lat/long

You can place a waypoint at a specified latitude and longitude.
1. Select New waypoint at lat/long from the New page in the Chart app menu: Menu > New >
New waypoint at lat/long
2. Enter the latitude and longitude for the waypoint.
3. Select Save.

Waypoint management
Waypoints are managed using the Waypoint list.
The Waypoint list can be accessed from the Homescreen and from the Chart app: Homescreen > My
data > Waypoints, or Chart app > Menu > Waypoints, routes, tracks > Waypoints.

Waypoint list
The Waypoint list is sorted into groups. Selecting a group displays a list of all the waypoints included
in that group. Selecting a waypoint displays the customizable details for that waypoint.

96
From the Waypoint list you can Search for a waypoint, Create a New group, Create a New Waypoint
or Delete a waypoint group.
Selecting a Waypoint group from the list displays a list of all waypoints in that group.

Group lists

If the Waypoint list is accessed from the Chart app menu, the selected group or waypoint is displayed
in a Chart pane on the right of the screen.
You can Rename, Delete or Hide/Show the group by selecting the Group name at the top of the list.
From the group list you can change the list sort order, Hide/Show the Waypoint group in the current
Chart app instance or create a New waypoint.
Use the Multi-edit option to make the same change to multiple Waypoints (e.g. change symbol,
delete waypoints or move to a different group).
Select a waypoint to view its details.

Waypoints, Routes and Tracks 97

Waypoint details

The details for the waypoint can be customized by selecting the relevant field. You can also Delete
the waypoint, set a Goto, or View on chart.

7.2 Routes
Routes are used to plan your journey in advance. You can plan your journey directly on your MFD,
or at home using software capable of exporting Waypoints and Routes in standard .gpx format,
such as Raymarine’s Voyage Planner software.
Routes consist of a number of waypoints. Your MFD can store up to 250 Routes, each Route
consisting of up to 500 waypoints. The Route capacity limit is subject to your MFD’s 10,000 Waypoint
limit (for example, your MFD could store 20 Routes each containing 500 waypoints).

Creating a Route

98
1. Select and hold on the location for the first waypoint.
2. Select Build route from the context menu.
3. Select the location for the second waypoint.
The 2 waypoints will be joined by a line, creating the first leg of your route.
4. Select the location for subsequent waypoints.
5. Check your Route will be safe to follow, you can move the waypoints in your route by dragging
them to a new location.
6. When your Route is complete select Finish route build.
Use Autorouting during route creation
Whilst building a route you can use Autorouting to automatically add a route leg to a route you have
already started to create. The Autorouting features require compatible cartography.
1. Press and hold anywhere on screen and select either Autoroute to wpt or Autoroute to here.
Selecting Autoroute to wpt will allow you to select a waypoint from your Waypoints list to include
in your route, selecting Autoroute to here will create a route leg to the cursor’s current position.

Once an Autoroute leg has been added you can select Finish route build or add further manual or
autoroute route legs.

Autorouting
Autorouting is available when using compatible cartography. Autorouting allows you to build a route
automatically between a point on the chart and your vessel.

You can select any point on the Chart and from the Chart context menu select Autoroute to here or
you can select Autoroute to from an existing waypoint’s context menu to create a route automatically
between your vessel and the chosen point.
The created route is generated by comparing data available on your cartography against the
minimum safe distances specified in the Boat details menu: (Homescreen > Settings > Boat details).
Waypoints will not be placed in areas that conflict with your specified minimum safe distances.
Caution symbols are used for waypoints that are near objects or restricted areas.
Never follow a route before checking each route leg is safe for your vessel.
Reviewing an automatically generated route
Before following any route you must ensure that it is safe to do so.
Upon Route completion:
1. Range in on each route leg and waypoint that make up the Route.
2. Check either side of the route leg and around the waypoint for any possible obstructions.

Waypoints, Routes and Tracks 99

 Obstructions can be charted objects or restricted areas. Routes generated automatically should
use the caution waypoint symbol in areas where there are possible obstructions.

3. Where obstructions exist move the necessary waypoints so that the waypoint and route leg is
no longer obstructed.

Importing a route
You can import routes created in standard gpx format.
1. Save your route to a memory card.
2. Insert the memory card into your MFD.
3. Select Import from card from the Import/export page: Homescreen > My data > Import/export
> Import from card.
4. Locate and select the gpx file that contains your Route.
The Route will be imported to your MFD.

Route management
Routes are managed using the Route list.
The Route list can be accessed from the Homescreen and from the Chart app: Homescreen > My
data > Routes, or Chart app > Menu > Waypoints, routes, tracks > Routes.
If the Route list is accessed from the Chart app menu, then the selected route is displayed in a
Chart pane on the right of the screen.

Route list

From the route list you can Delete routes or create a New route using existing waypoints.
To view a route plan, select a route and choose View route plan.

Route plan
The route plan displays a list of all waypoints in the route and when accessed from the Chart app
also includes a Chart pane showing the route’s location.

100
From the Route plan you can:
• navigate the route by selecting Follow
• change the route direction by selecting Reverse
• add an existing waypoint to the route by selecting Add waypoint
• change route options by selecting Route options
By selecting a waypoint from the route plan you can change the waypoint order by moving the
waypoint up and down the list. You can also remove the waypoint from the list, delete the waypoint,
edit the waypoint details or start the Route follow from any waypoint in the route.

Route options
Rename route Give the route a name.
Color Change the color of the route, as displayed in the Chart app.
Time Switch the time between ETA (Estimated Time of Arrival) and
TTG (Time To Go).
Speed Switch the speed between Actual (SOG) and Planned.
When the speed is set to Planned you can select a desired
speed for navigating the route.
Hide/show on chart Choose whether the Route should be displayed in the Chart
app or not.
Export Export the route to a memory card.
Delete route Delete the route.

7.3 Tracks
Tracks are used to record where you have been. Tracks are made up of track points that are created
at regular time or distance intervals. You can store up to 15 tracks on your display, each track can
contain up to 10,000 points.
Tracks can be converted into routes so that they can be followed.

Waypoints, Routes and Tracks 101

Creating a track
You can record your vessel’s journey using Tracks.

1. Select and hold on your vessel icon to display the vessel pop-over options.
2. Select Start track.
Your vessel’s journey will now be recorded.
3. Select Stop track from the pop-over options when you have completed your track.
4. Select Save to save the track or Delete to remove the track.
You can also start a new track recording at anytime from the Chart menu: Menu > New > Start a new
track. When using the Chart menu to start a track, if a track is already recording then it will be saved
before the new track is started. Once a Track is saved it can be converted to a Route so that the
same passage may be followed again at a later date.

Converting a track to a route

From the Track list: Menu > Waypoints, routes, tracks > Tracks.
1. Select a track.
2. Select Create route from track from the pop-over options.
3. Select OK.

Track management
Tracks are managed using the Track list.
The Track list can be accessed from the Homescreen and from the Chart app: Homescreen > My
data > Tracks, or Chart app > Menu > Waypoints, routes, tracks > Tracks.
If the Track list is accessed from the Chart app menu, then the selected track is displayed in a
Chart pane on the right of the screen.

102
Track list

From the track list you can Start or Stop tracks recording, Delete a track or choose how tracks are
recorded.

Track interval
The track interval determines the time period or distance between track points when recording a
track. You can choose whether to record track points by Time, by Distance or set to Auto.
• In Auto the track interval is set automatically to minimize the track points used whilst maintaining
the actual path taken.
• When set to Time, you can choose a specified time period between track points.
• When set to Distance you can choose a specified distance between track points.

Customize tracks
From the Track pop-over options you can:
• rename a track
• change track color
• create a route from a track
• delete a track
• hide/show the track in the Chart app.

Waypoints, Routes and Tracks 103

104
Chapter 8: Chart app

Chapter contents
• 8.1 Chart app overview on page 106
• 8.2 Navigation on page 113
• 8.3 SAR (Search and Rescue) Patterns on page 114
• 8.4 Laylines on page 122
• 8.5 Race Start Line (SmartStart) and Race Timer on page 127
• 8.6 Target tracking on page 132
• 8.7 Collision avoidance on page 140
• 8.8 Target intercept on page 149
• 8.9 Tides mode on page 150
• 8.10 RealBathy™ on page 154
• 8.11 Find nearest on page 156
• 8.12 SonarChart™ Live on page 158
• 8.13 UAV Chart integration on page 159
• 8.14 ClearCruise™ Augmented Reality on page 160
• 8.15 Chart settings menu on page 161

Chart app 105

8.1 Chart app overview
The Chart app displays a representation of your vessel in relation to land masses and other charted
objects, which enables you to plan and navigate to your desired destination. The Chart app requires
a GNSS (GPS) position fix in order to display your vessel at the correct location on a world map.
For each instance of the Chart app you can select which electronic cartography you want to use.
The selection will persist over a power cycle.
The Chart app can be displayed in both fullscreen and splitscreen app pages. App pages may
consist of up to 4 instances of the Chart app.

1 Waypoint 2 Track
Use waypoints to mark specific You can record the passage your
locations or points of interest. vessel takes using Tracks.
3 Vessel icon 4 Wind indicator
This icon represents your vessel, only Provides indication of wind direction
displayed when a GNSS (GPS) position and speed (Wind transducer required).
fix is available. The icon will be a black
dot if no Heading is available).
5 Route 6 Destination waypoint
You can plan your route in advance During a Goto, this is the current
by creating a Route using Waypoints destination waypoint.
to mark each route leg.
7 Heading line 8 COG line
If Heading data is available, a If COG data is available, you can
Heading vector for your vessel can be display a COG vector for your vessel.
displayed.

106
 9 Tide indicator 10 Chart range
Provides tide Set and Drift indicators. Identifies the scale for the displayed
Requires the following data: COG, Chart range.
Heading, SOG, and STW (Speed
Through Water).
11 Range rings 12 Sidebar
Provides a distance indication around The Sidebar contains system data that
your vessel at set intervals. can be viewed in all apps.

Chart app controls

Icon Description Action
Home icon Takes you to the Homescreen

Waypoint / MOB Place waypoint / hold down to activate Man overboard

(MOB) alarm

Pilot icon Opens and closes the Pilot Sidebar

Menu icon Opens the app menu

Find vessel Centers your vessel onscreen.

Range In Decreases the range/distance displayed onscreen.

Range Out Increases the range/distance displayed onscreen.

Chart ranging and panning

You can change the range displayed in the Chart app using the onscreen Range controls or by
using the pinch-to-zoom multi-touch gesture.
You can pan the chart area by swiping your finger across the chart.

Chart app 107

Chart app context menu
Context menus provide context sensitive menu options.
• Context menus are accessed in the Chart app by
pressing and holding on a location or object.
• The context menu provides Latitude, longitude, range
and bearing details for the selected location or object.
• The context menu provides quick access to relevant
settings or features.
• Select More options to display further options.
Note:
The Move boat here option is only available in
Demo/simulator mode.

Selecting a chart card

You can use LightHouse™ charts and compatible Navionics and C-MAP electronic charts. The
electronic chart cards must be inserted into the MFD’s MicroSD card reader (or the card reader of an
MFD on the same network).

From the Chart app menu:

1. Select the Settings icon.
2. Select the cartography that you want to use from the Cartography tab.
You may choose a different chart for each instance of the Chart app, accessed from the Homescreen.
Cartography selection will persist until changed.

108
Chart modes
The Chart app provides preset modes that can be used to quickly set up the Chart app for your
intended use.
To change Chart mode select the required mode from the app menu.
SIMPLE
In Simple mode, chart detail is suppressed to provide a clearer,
simpler view for navigation and only navigation related menu
options are available. Settings changes are not saved.

DETAILED
Detailed is the default mode. Full chart detail and menu
options are available. Settings changes are saved to the user
profile in use.

FISHING CHART
Fishing mode optimizes the Chart app for Fishing and if
supported by your selected cartography, displays more
detailed contour lines. Full menu options are available.
Settings changes are saved to the user profile in use.

WEATHER
Weather mode is available when the MFD is connected to a
compatible Weather receiver (SR150).
Weather mode allows you to overlay weather data directly on
the chart and view animated weather graphics or read weather
reports. Only Weather related menu options are available.
Settings changes are saved to the user profile in use.
For further details on Weather mode refer to: Chapter 9
Weather mode
TIDES
In Tides mode, Tide Station and Current Station icons are
replaced with graphics representing Tide and Current
conditions. Animation controls are displayed that enable
playback of Tide and Current predictions over a 24 hour
period.
Tides mode also suppresses chart detail, to enhance the Tide
and Current graphics and enables own vessel Tide vector
graphics.
RACING
Racing mode optimizes the Chart app for Race Sailing.
Racing mode is available when the MFD is setup with Sailing
as the boat activity.
In Racing mode, Race Start Line and Race Timer options
become available from the menu, allowing you to create a
start line and countdown timer which can help optimize your
racing start.

Chart app 109

Vessel details
The Vessel details pop-over provides access to vessel-related settings.

From the Vessel details pop-over you can:

• start/stop a track.
• offset the position of the vessel symbol.
• change the symbol used to represent your vessel.
• set the length of vessel vectors.
• show / hide Heading and COG vectors.
• show / hide Range Rings.
• show / hide Tide and Wind graphics.
Note:
In Simple mode, the only option available is Start/stop track.

Object selection and information

Charted objects, available on your cartography can be selected and object information can be
viewed.
When you select an object the cursor will change to the Object cursor.

110
Selecting and holding on the object will display the object context menu.
From the context menu select: More options > Chart info and then select the object from the list to
view its details.
In areas where there is a high concentration of charted objects, selecting Nearby objects from the
context menu will display a list of objects located nearby for you to choose from.

Layers
Layers are additional data views that can be overlaid (superimposed) on the Chart app. Types of
layer include: aerial photographs, AIS targets, Radar image, range rings, tide graphs, weather Radar
and crowd-sourced content.

The Layers tab in the Chart app Settings menu provides controls for the Chart layers: Menu
> Settings > Layers.

Chart app 111

View and motion
The view and motion tab allows you to control how the chart is displayed in relation to your vessel.

Chart motion
Chart motion controls how the chart and boat are drawn to keep the boat onscreen as you move.

Chart orientation
The orientation of the chart affects the alignment of the chart relative to your vessel, route or North.

Boat position
Adjust the boat position to allow more or less ‘look ahead’ space in front of your boat.

Sync view with other charts

Synchronize the orientation and position of all charts that have this setting enabled.

Camera tracking
When connected to a compatible Pan and Tilt Thermal camera you can track targets or point your
camera at a specific target or area.
2 options are available for camera tracking:
• Point camera here — Points the camera at a specific point onscreen, the camera will remain
pointed at this area regardless of your own vessel’s course.
• Track with camera — Tracks a selected target regardless of your own vessel’s or target’s course.
Camera tracking options are available from the Context menu in the Chart and Radar apps: Context
menu > more options > Point camera here, or Context menu > more options > Track with camera.

Automatic tracking
You can use the Camera app settings to configure automatic tracking for AIS, Radar and MoB targets:
Camera app > Menu > Settings > Camera motion > AUTO TRACKING

112
8.2 Navigation
Navigating to a waypoint or point of interest
You can perform a “Goto” to a Waypoint or specific location.

1. Select and hold on the waypoint or point of interest and select Goto from the context menu.

You can stop the Goto at any time by selecting and holding anywhere in the Chart app and
choosing Stop, or selecting another Goto.

2. The Chart app will begin navigation, if required physically engage your autopilot.
3. An alarm will sound when you reach the waypoint.
You can also perform a Goto from the Go menu: Menu > Go > Waypoint or Menu > Go > Lat/long.
For more information on waypoints and waypoint management refer to: Chapter 7 Waypoints,
Routes and Tracks

Restarting cross track error (XTE)

A cross track error (XTE) occurs when your actual route diverges from your original planned route.
Restarting XTE plots a new course directly from your current position to your destination, rather than
continuing to follow the original planned route.
1. Select Restart XTE from the Navigation menu: Menu > Navigation > Restart XTE.

Following a Route
You can follow a saved route.
With the Route displayed in the Chart app:
1. Select and hold on a Route leg within the Route you want to follow.
2. Select Follow Route from the Route context menu.

Chart app 113

8.3 SAR (Search and Rescue) Patterns
Attempting to search the water for an object can be challenging, due to the vastness of the ocean
and the effects of tide. Additionally, the object you are searching for is not normally in its last
known location.
SAR Patterns are routes that can help you find an object in the water. The pattern can be modified
and can take the effects of the tide into account, providing a more accurate and consistent route to
search. SAR Patterns can be created on your MFD in the Chart app.

Access search pattern options: Chart app > Menu > New > Search patterns.
The available Search Patterns are:
• Sector Search
• Creeping line
• Parallel Line
Once a search pattern is created it is saved as a Route and can be managed and navigated in the
same manner as any other saved Route. For more information refer to:7.2 Routes

Sector search pattern

The Sector Search pattern is made up of 9 legs, with the 3rd, 6th and 9th leg running past the datum
(the Track Spacing will change depending on whether you are with or against the drift).
Note: As the Search patterns take in to account drift, the resulting Route may not resemble the
patterns shown.

114
Creating a sector search pattern
To create a Sector Search pattern follow the steps below:

1. Set Commence Search Point (CSP)

i. Manually input the CSP coordinates; a Range and Bearing are displayed to direct your vessel
towards it.
ii. Alternatively, set the CSP as your vessel’s current location by selecting the (1) CSP Shortcut
button.
2. Set Drift
i. Drop the Datum Marker in the water and select Marker dropped.
ii. Wait for the Datum Marker to drift through the water.
iii. Return to the Datum Marker in the new location and select Drift position to calculate the
Set (Direction) and Drift (Speed).
iv. Alternatively, you can use your vessel’s Heading and SOG to define the set and drift by
selecting the (2) Set / Drift shortcut icon.
3. Set Track spacing / Radius, Search Speed, and Leg time

[All 3 variables are dependent on each other. One variable is always the product of the other two.]

i. Select one of the variables by selecting the (3) Output icon.

ii. The selected variable will then be calculated as a result of changes made to the other two
variables.
Variable Maximum Value
Track spacing / Radius 5 nm / 5 sm / 5 Km
Search Speed 40 Kts / 46 Mph / 74 Kph
Leg Time 59m 59s

Chart app 115

 1. CSP Shortcut
2. Set / Drift Shortcut
3. Output
4. Create search route

[After all the above steps have been completed you can create your SAR pattern.]

i. To create a search pattern, select the Create search route button in the bottom right of
the screen.
ii. The creation page will display your SAR pattern data and its location on the Chart app.

iii. Select Follow Route to overlay the pattern on the Chart app and automatically follow the route.
iv. Alternatively, select OK to overlay the pattern on the Chart app without following it.

Drift effects on sector search patterns

As the search patterns account for drift the resulting Route may not resemble the pattern shown
above.

116
 Example Drift
Direction: 0°
Speed: 0 Kts

Direction: 45°
Speed: 0 Kts

Direction: 0°
Speed: 0.5 Kts

Direction: 0°
Speed: 1 Kts

Expanding square search pattern

The Expanding Square search pattern is an outwards spiralling square pattern, and is particularly
suited to very detailed and methodical searches.
Note:
The Search patterns take drift into account, and therefore the resulting route may not resemble
the patterns shown.

Chart app 117

Creating an expanding square search pattern
To create a Expanding Square search pattern follow the steps below:

1. Set Commence Search Point (CSP)

i. Manually input the CSP coordinates; a Range and Bearing are displayed to direct your vessel
towards it.
ii. Alternatively, set the CSP as your vessel’s current location by selecting the (1) CSP Shortcut
button.
2. Set Drift
i. Drop the Datum Marker in the water and select Marker dropped.
ii. Wait for the Datum Marker to drift through the water.
iii. Return to the Datum Marker in the new location and select Drift position to calculate the
Set (Direction) and Drift (Speed).
iv. Alternatively, you can use your vessel’s Heading and SOG to define the set and drift by
selecting the (2) Set / Drift shortcut icon.
3. Set Track spacing / Radius, Search Speed, and Leg time

[All 3 variables are dependent on each other. One variable is always the product of the other two.]

i. Select one of the variables by selecting the (3) Output icon.

118
 ii. The selected variable will then be calculated as a result of changes made to the other two
variables.
Variable Maximum Value
Track spacing / Radius 5 nm / 5 sm / 5 Km
Search Speed 40 Kts / 46 Mph / 74 Kph
Leg Time 59m 59s

1. CSP Shortcut
2. Set / Drift Shortcut
3. Output
4. Set the number of legs
i. Select the number of legs for your expanding square search pattern.
5. Create search route

[After all the above steps have been completed you can create your SAR pattern.]

i. To create a search pattern, select Create search route in the bottom right of the screen.
ii. The creation page will display your SAR pattern data and its location in the Chart app.

iii. Select Follow Route to overlay the pattern on the Chart app and automatically follow the route.
iv. Alternatively, select OK to overlay the pattern on the Chart app without following it.

Chart app 119

Drift effects on expanding square search patterns
As the search patterns account for drift the resulting Route may not resemble the pattern shown
above.
Example Drift
Direction: 0°
Speed: 0 Kts

Direction: 45°
Speed: 0 Kts

Direction: 0°
Speed: 0.5 Kts

Direction: 0°
Speed: 1 Kts

120
Creeping line / Parallel line search pattern
The Creeping / Parallel Line search pattern covers a rectangular area. The area is searched either
by starting at one end of the search area (Creeping), which provides greater coverage of one end
but will take time to cover the whole area, or by searching the area lengthways (Parallel). This
provides reasonable coverage of the area quickly.
The Creeping Line search should be used when there is a logical end of the search area to start
your search from.

Creating a Creeping line / Parallel line search pattern

To create a Creeping line / Parallel line search pattern follow the steps below:

1. Set Commence Search Point (CSP)

i. Manually input the CSP coordinates.
ii. Alternatively, set the CSP as your vessel’s current location by pressing the (1) CSP Shortcut
button.
2. Set Search Speed, and Track Spacing
i. Select and edit each variable.
3. Define Search Rectangle (Define by axes)

Chart app 121

 i. Define the rectangle’s dimensions by using the Major axis and Minor axis boxes.
ii. Set the Creep / Parallel direction manually or set it as your Vessel’s heading by using the
(2) Shortcut button.

iii. Set the 1st turn direction by selecting Port or Starboard.

Variable Maximum Value
Track spacing / Radius 5 nm / 5 sm / 5 Km
Search Speed 40 Kts / 46 Mph / 74 Kph
Major / Minor Axis 20 nm / 23 sm / 37 Km

1. CSP Shortcut
2. Creep / Parallel Direction Shortcut
4. Define Search Rectangle (Define by corner points)
[If you would prefer to define the search rectangle dimensions using the major and minor axis, the
rectangle can be defined by setting the coordinates of each corner point]:

i. Enter the coordinates of each corner point 1–4.

Note:
• The corner coordinates need to form a rectangle. If the coordinates are not suitable then you
will not be able to create the search route.
• The CSP must be on one of the sides of the search pattern.
• For a Creeping Line search pattern the CSP must be located along one of the longer sides.
• For a Parallel Line search pattern the CSP must be located along one of the shorter sides.
• The CSP must be on a bearing of between 85° to 95° (i.e. right angle ± 5°) from the previous side.
• The CSP should be half a track width from the corner point.

8.4 Laylines
Laylines are used in sailing to show how far the vessel must sail on the current tack in order to make
a target waypoint after tacking, given present wind conditions.
When a layline is used to calculate the route to a waypoint, it will take into account a number of factors
to provide a better alternative course, compared to simply navigating in a straight line to a waypoint.
The reason why laylines are a more efficient way to sail to a specific point is because they’re
based on True Wind Direction (TWD) and either: a) fixed upwind / downwind sailing angles, or b)
the use of polars to reflect the performance of your particular vessel. In this respect, sailing along
laylines maximizes your Velocity Made Good (VMG) to windward. Another reason why laylines
are more accurate is because they can also be configured to account for tidal current, as well as
the leeway of your vessel.
To ensure the layline calculations are as accurate as possible, it’s important to ensure that the
following settings are correctly configured:

122
• Boat details (specifically those relating to sailing): Homescreen > Settings > Boat details
• Laylines settings: Chart app > Menu > Settings > Laylines
For more information on these settings, refer to: p.77 — Boat details
and p.124 — Laylines settings

Note:
You should not steer your vessel so that its heading points exactly along the layline. Instead try
to align your Course Over Ground (COG) with the visual laylines, as well as using the information
displayed on the Sailing page in the Dashboard app to help you steer to your optimum wind angle.
Your vessel should then travel along the layline, under the effects of tide and leeway.

Sailing data page

Sailing data and dials are available for display alongside laylines to help indicate which direction to
turn in order to maximise your VMG to windward.

Chart app 123

Sailing dials can be displayed in the Dashboard app by selecting the Sailing default data page. For
more information on customizing the Sailing data page, refer to Chapter 12 Dashboard app

Laylines — system requirements

To use the Laylines feature, your system must meet the following conditions:
• Your MFD must be running LightHouse™ software version 3.9 or later.
• The Boating Activity setting must be set to Sailing during the MFD Startup Wizard procedure. For
more information on how to configure the Boating Activity settings, refer to: 4.5 Getting started
• The following data must be present on the MFD network:
– Wind
– Speed Through Water (STW)
– GPS
– Heading

Enabling Laylines
The Laylines feature can be enabled from the Laylines settings page in the Chart app.
Chart app > Menu > Settings > Laylines

From this page you can select the Layline Sail Performance profile:
• Fixed, or
• Polar
With the relevant Sail Performance profile selected, laylines will be displayed automatically in the
Chart app.

Laylines settings
The following settings are available on the laylines page:
Setting Description Options
Sail Performance Allows you to select a profile • Not set
that determines the preferred
• Fixed
level of sailing performance
when using laylines. The • Polar
laylines feature is only available
when the profile is set to Fixed
Angles or Polars.
• Not set — laylines are
disabled.
• Fixed Angles — laylines are
created based on specified
Upwind and Downwind
angles. These angles are
set by default to 45° and
140° respectively and can be
configured in the menu.
• Polars — laylines will be
created using a polar table
available on your MFD. You
can select the relevant polar

124
 Setting Description Options
table using the Polar menu
item, described below.
(Fixed angle) Upwind angle • Set the upwind angle for • 15° to 70°
layline calculations.
• 45° (default)
(Fixed angle) Downwind angle • Set the downwind angle for • 125° to 175°
layline calculations.
• 140° (default)
(Polar) Polar • Select the Polar table that • List of available Polar tables
will define your layline
calculation. Selecting a
vessel’s make and model
that most closely matches
your own vessel will provide
better calculations and more
accurate laylines to follow
when sailing.
• If your vessel’s make and
model are not listed, submit
the polar data for your vessel
to:[email protected] so
it can be included in the next
software release.
Display Layines on this chart • Display or hide laylines • On
on the current Chart app
• Off
instance.
Adjust for tides • Adjust the laylines to take • On
into account tidal flow.
• Off
Boat type • Set your vessel’s boat type • List of available Boat types
to provide more accurate
leeway calculation.
Show wind shifts • Display the minimum and • On
maximum waypoint laylines,
• Off
based on the varying True
Wind Direction (TWD) over
the last specified period.
(Wind shifts) Time Period • Set the specified time period • 3 min
for wind shifts.
• 6 min (default)
• 12 min
• 30 min
• 60 min
(Wind shifts) Reset • Reset the recorded time of • Reset
historical wind shifts back to
0.

Displaying and interpreting laylines

Once laylines are enabled and correctly configured in the Laylines tab in the Chart app Settings, they
will start rendering on the Chart display as your vessel is underway.
Laylines are displayed as a parallelogram under the following conditions:
• The vessel is under active navigation towards a Waypoint or Goto.
• The tack is required to meet an active Waypoint or Goto.
• The direct distance to the destination point is less than 150 nm from your vessel.

Chart app 125

When the destination point is upwind the laylines will be displayed in a parallelogram formation, with
green and red laylines showing the port and starboard tacks, as shown below:

1. Destination
2. Starboard destination layline
3. Port vessel layline
4. Port destination layline
5. Starboard vessel layline
When the destination point is downwind the laylines will be displayed as an orange parallelogram
formation, adjusted for gybing, as shown below:

Displaying wind shift data

As True Wind Direction (TWD) is constantly changing, the position of the laylines changes over time.
These changes are shown as lighter colored shaded triangles which represent the variation of
TWD over a specified time period.
• With TWD holding at the high end of its range of variation, the vessel can tack to starboard and
will lay the windward or leeward mark as it enters the shaded area. However, if TWD shifts back
towards the lower end of its range of variation, the vessel will fall short of the layline and may have
to perform extra tacks to reach the waypoint.
• With TWD holding at the low end of its range of variation, the vessel can tack to starboard and will
only lay the windward or leeward mark when it reaches the end of the shaded area. However,
if TWD shifts back towards the high end of its range of variation, the vessel will overstand the
windward or leeward mark and may need to travel farther to reach the waypoint.

126
• Depending on the situation, the normal course of action would be to tack when the vessel is
halfway through the shaded area. However this may not be the shortest or quickest route.

Wind shift data options are available from the Laylines settings page:
Chart app > Settings > Laylines

• Show wind shifts — Toggle wind shifts ON / OFF

• Time Period — Select the time period that you want the wind shift data to cover
• Reset — Reset the recorded wind shift data

8.5 Race Start Line (SmartStart) and Race Timer

The Race Start Line and Race Timer features can help you achieve a better racing start. The features
assist you in approaching the race start line at the optimum speed, angle and time.
The basic concept of an effective race start is to guide your vessel and tune the sail configuration in
an optimum way to ensure you are approaching the start line at the very last moment with full power.
In race sailing, the countdown to this last moment is known as “Time to Burn”.
The race start line features help you to do this by providing a visual indication of the position of the
race line on the Chart, as well as key data, including race timer, distance to start line, line bias, and
Time to Burn. These features can also be used in conjunction with Laylines to further assist you in
optimizing your approach to the start line. When the Race Start Line, Race Timer and Laylines are
active, Laylines will visually protrude from the race start line’s port and starboard ends to help guide
your vessel on an optimum course to the start line.
For more information on Laylines, refer to: p.122 — Laylines
The Race Start Line and Race Timer data is displayed in 2 different places:
• In the Chart app’s Sidebar — When the Chart app is in Racing mode, you can swipe from the left
of the screen to display a sidebar showing the key race start information.
• In the Dashboard app — The dedicated Race Start page displays key race start information,
including an apparent wind sailing dial, race timer, distance to start line, line bias, Time to Burn,
and more. For more information, refer to: p.243 — Race Start data items

Chart app 127

 Note:
• Lighthouse software version 3.10 or later is required.
• The Race Start Line and Race Timer features require that the Chart app is set to Racing mode,
accessible from the Chart app Menu.
• The Race Start Line and Race Timer sync to all MFDs on the network and can be interacted
with on all MFDs on the network.
• Race Start Line and Race Timer options are available via the Sidebar when the Chart app is
in Race Start mode.

Creating the Race Start Line

A Race Start Line can be created by placing port and starboard end points.
The end points can be created by:
• Placing them anywhere on the Chart app — or for greater accuracy — placing them using existing
chart waypoints and chart objects (e.g. Buoys).
• Pinging your vessel’s current location, using GPS position data.
Once both end points have been entered, the race start line will be drawn between the two points.

Placing the Race Start Line

Race Start Line end points can be placed anywhere on the Chart app. You can use waypoints or
chart objects to place Race Start Line end points at specific coordinates.
To place an end point on a waypoint or chart object:
1. Select the waypoint or chart object to display the context menu.
2. Select Set start line.
3. Select Port end or Starboard end.
4. Repeat for the alternate end.

128
Pinging the Race Start Line
You can use your vessel’s location to ping each end of the Race Start Line.
When your vessel is at the end point:
1. Open the menu.
2. Select Race start line.
3. Select either Ping Port end or Ping Stbd (Starboard) end.
4. Repeat for the alternate end.

Important:
Pinging the Race Start Line ends will use your GPS location (from an internal or external GPS
receiver). When pinging the end points, it is important to compensate for the distance between
your vessel’s bow and the GPS location.

To increase the accuracy of start line placement:

1. Approach an end point from the same direction you will be traveling when starting the race.
2. Align your vessel so it is perpendicular to the end point.
3. When the bow of your vessel reaches the end point, ping the location.
4. Repeat for the alternate end, ensuring your vessel remains perpendicular to the line.

Chart app 129

Editing and clearing the Race Start Line
The Race Start Line can be edited and deleted.
To edit the Race Start Line:
1. Select the line or end points on the chart app.
2. Select Edit line.
From here you can choose to swap the positions of the Port and Starboard end points, re-ping
them to your vessel’s current position, or clear the start line.
3. Select Done to save changes.

Starting the Race Timer

A Race Timer is available to count down until race start.
To start the Race Timer:
1. Open the menu.
2. Select Race Timer.
3. Select Timer duration to set the countdown time (default is 5 minutes).
4. Select Start to begin the countdown.

Important: The Race Timer can be set from 1 minute to 30 minutes.

5. You can change the countdown time as well as stop and reset the timer by reopening the Race
Timer options menu.
Note:
The Race Timer can also be operated from the Dashboard app Race Start Page.

Race laylines
When the Race Start Line, Race Timer and Laylines are active, laylines will protrude from the race
start line’s port and starboard ends to help guide your vessel on an optimum course to the start line.
A Favoured End Marker will also appear on the end point that provides a more competitive start. For
more information on laylines refer to 8.4 Laylines
The start line will appear differently depending on whether it is an upwind or downwind start:
• Upwind starts will show red and green laylines as well as a Favoured End Marker on the end
point closer to the True Wind Direction (TWD).
• Downwind starts will show orange laylines as well as a Favoured End Marker on the end point
farther from the True Wind Direction (TWD).

130
Race sidebar
Race Start Line and Race Timer information and options are available via the Sidebar when it is set
to Race Start mode.
Menu item Description Options
Race Timer Displays the countdown time Before Start
until race start. When the timer
reaches 0 it will begin to count • Start
up, indicating how long it has • Timer duration
been since race start.
During Countdown
• Sync nearest minute
• Up 1 minute
• Down 1 minute
• Stop & reset
When Counting Up
• Stop & reset
Distance To Line Displays how far your vessel is N/A
from any point of the start line.
Line Bias Displays how much closer N/A
or further away the favoured
endpoint is to the wind in
comparison to the other
endpoint.
Time To Burn Displays how much time you N/A
have before you need to
navigate towards the start line.
A negative value is shown if
you are predicted to be running
behind and will not be at the
start line at race start.
Time to burn is calculated using
wind speed and speed through
water (STW):
• If you are using polars for
sail performance then speed
from the polar diagram is

Chart app 131

 Menu item Description Options
used as the assumed starting
speed through water.
• If you are using fixed angles
or have nothing set then
you can manually set the
expected speed or use your
current speed by opening
the race start line context
menu (long pressing the start
line).
For more information on sail
performance refer to Laylines
settings
Edit Line Allows you to edit the end • Ping Port end
points of the start line or clear
• Ping Stbd (starboard) end
it. You can ping the port or
starboard end points to your • Swap ends
current location as well as swap
• Clear
them.
• Done

Dashboard
New race start data items are available in the dashboard app. These can be customized and
displayed alongside the Race Start Line and Race Timer features. For more information refer to
Race Start data items

8.6 Target tracking

With compatible AIS and Radar hardware connected to your MFD, AIS and Radar targets can be
tracked in the Chart and Radar apps.
When targets are being tracked they appear in the AIS or Radar targets list.
The target lists can be accessed by selecting Targets from the app menu: Menu > Targets , and then
selecting the relevant tab.

132
Selecting a target from the list highlights the selected target in the LiveView app pane on the right of
the page.
The list identifies: Target name, Range from your vessel, and Bearing. Where relevant, CPA (Closest
point of approach) and TCPA (Time to Closest Point of Approach) values will also be displayed.

AIS list
The AIS target list displays pop-over options which enable you to View full target data or add a
target as an AIS buddy by selecting Add as buddy.
The Buddy feature enables you to add AIS-equipped friends and regular contacts to a “Buddy List”
on your MFD. As soon as a vessel on your Buddy List comes within range of your AIS receiver, the
onscreen vessel icon changes to indicate this.
AIS icons used for targets marked as buddies will be filled yellow. You can also rename buddy
targets or remove targets from your buddy list.

Radar list
The Radar target list can be Sorted By: target Number or its Range from your vessel.
Radar targets can be cancelled individually by selecting the ‘X’ next to the target’s details in the list,
or you can cancel all targets by selecting Cancel all targets.
You can display Radar target information onscreen by selecting Target info from the Radar target
pop-over options.

Target vectors
Vector graphics can be displayed for AIS targets.
Target vectors settings can be accessed from the Target Settings tab: Menu > Targets > Target
settings.

Chart app 133

The vectors can be set to True or Relative.
The Vector length identifies where the target will be after the specified time has passed. You can
adjust the length of the vector by selecting a time from the Vector length pop-over options.
AIS vectors can be set to All (displayed for all targets) or Manual (only displayed when enabled using
the target’s context menu).
Target vectors can be enabled and disabled for individual targets: Press and hold on an AIS target to
display the context menu, and then select Vector.

Dangerous targets alarm

You can use the Dangerous targets alarm to notify you if a target will reach a specified distance from
your vessel within a specified time.

134
To set up the Dangerous target alarm, first adjust the Safe distance to the desired value and then
select a Time to reach safe distance. The alarm will be triggered if a tracked target will reach the
specified Safe distance from your vessel within the time period selected.
You can select whether you want the Dangerous target alarm to track Radar targets, AIS targets or
both.
You can display a Safe distance ring around your vessel in the Chart and Radar app using the
Show safe distance control.

Radar settings
When the Radar layer is enabled in the Chart app you can configure the Radar settings from the
Targets menu: Menu > Targets > Radar settings.
Setting Description Options
Radar selection When more than 1 Radar List of available Radar scanners
scanner is connected you can
choose which Radar to use for
the Radar layer in the Chart
app.
Transmit Start the Radar scanner • On
transmitting or put it in Standby.
• Off
Dual range Enables and disables dual • On
range on compatible Radar
• Off
scanners
Channel When Dual range is active, you • 1
can switch between channels.
• 2
Show Radar overlay Enables and disables the Radar • On
layer in the Chart app.
• Off
Visibility Determines the visibility • 0% to 100%
(opacity) of the Radar layer.

Chart app 135

 Setting Description Options
Palette Selects the color used for the • Purple
Radar layer
• Black
• Red
Show sector blanking limits Enables and disables radar • On
blank sectors. For more
• Off
information on blank sectors
refer to 11.12 Blank sectors
Use Radar without heading Enables use of Radar layer • On
data when Heading data is not
• Off
available.
Range Determines the range used for Radar range values
the Radar layer.

AIS settings
When the AIS layer is enabled in the Chart app you can configure AIS settings from the Targets
menu: Menu > Targets > AIS settings.
Setting Description Options
Show AIS targets in Chart / Enables and disables AIS • On
Show AIS targets in Radar targets in the Chart and Radar
• Off
apps.
Enhanced AIS targets Enables and disables the • On
display of enhanced AIS target
• Off
icons.
Show these AIS types Determines the types of AIS • All
target displayed in the Chart
• Dangerous
and Radar apps.
• Buddies
Hide static targets When enabled, an AIS target • On
travelling under 2 knots will be
• Off
hidden, unless it is or becomes
dangerous.
Silent mode When enabled, your vessel’s • On
AIS device will not transmit your
• Off
position or details.

AIS target symbols

By default, standard AIS symbols are used to identify AIS targets.
You can enable enhanced AIS target symbols from the Advanced Settings menu: (Menu > Settings
> Advanced > Enhanced AIS targets). With enhanced mode enabled, the enhanced symbols are
used in place of the standard vessel symbols.

136
Standard AIS symbols — type
Vessel SART (Search and Rescue
Transponder)

Land-based station ATON

SAR (Search and Virtual ATON

Rescue)

* Blue Force vessel * Blue Force SAR

Note: * Requires STEDS-AIS hardware.

Vessels equipped with STEDS-AIS hardware appear as Blue Force targets if:
• your MFD has a valid passphrase.
• you have received a SITREP from them within the last 6 minutes.
• their AIS mode is not set to Receive only.
If the above conditions are not met then the target icon will revert to using the standard, Green
AIS target icon.

Chart app 137

Enhanced AIS symbols — type
Sailing Vessel Commercial

High speed vessel Cargo vessel

/ Wing In Ground
vessel

Passenger vessel Other

Enhanced AIS symbols are scaled or outlined according to the reported size of the vessel, as shown
below:
Relative length (Grey
outline)

138
AIS symbol status
Lost (No border, Uncertain (Dashed outline)
crossed through)

Buddy (Yellow fill) Dangerous and Uncertain

(Dashed outline and Flashes
Red)

Dangerous (Flashes ATON off position (Red

Red) border)

Blue Force overview

Blue Force allows suitably-equipped vessels and AIS base stations to transmit and receive secure
messages with each other.
The Blue Force features offer secure (encyrpted) communications and surveillance capability through
the existing Automatic Identification System (AIS) network.
As these messages cannot be received by standard AIS receivers, Blue Force-equipped vessels are
effectively invisible to non-Blue Force users, in terms of AIS transmissions. Blue Force users can still
receive the standard AIS transmissions of other non-Blue Force vessels.
Unique AIS target icons are used onscreen to represent Blue Force participants.
Note:
• Blue Force features require an AIS5000 unit connected to your MFD network.
• Blue Force features require LightHouse 3 version 3.10 or later.

Blue Force SITREP

If your MFD is networked to an AIS5000 and you have entered your passphrase, you can update
your Situation Report (SITREP) status as well as view other Blue Force vessels equipped with
STEDS-AIS hardware and see their SITREP status.
Note:
• Requires Lighthouses software version 3.10 or later.
• For more information about Blue Force features, refer to: p.139 — Blue Force overview
• For more information on how to setup blue force features refer to p.84 — Responder setup

Once responder information has been entered, other Blue Force vessels equipped with STEDS-AIS
hardware using the same passphrase will display on the Chart app. Opening a Blue Force vessel’s
AIS context menu will display their vessel type and SITREP status.

Chart app 139

You can set your SITREP status from the Homescreen, by touching the Status Area in the top right
of the Homescreen.

Note:
• SITREP status will update every 15 seconds if a vessel is traveling at 3 knots or more.
• SITREP status will update every 30 seconds if a vessel is traveling under 3 knots for more than
3 minutes.

8.7 Collision avoidance

The Collision Avoidance feature tracks AIS targets in relation to your own vessel’s Course Over
Ground (COG) and Speed Over Ground (SOG). An Interception line is displayed from your vessel and
the target if your paths are projected to cross.
Additionally, Predicted Area of Danger zones are displayed to indicate where there is an increased
risk of collision. The Warning line and Predicted Area of Danger zones are based on your current
speed and AIS data received from targets and can help you determine whether you should change
course and / or speed to avoid danger.
The Collision Avoidance graphics automatically refresh when the MFD receives new position data
from the target.

140
 Important: The Collision Avoidance feature is a graphical aid only, provided to help increase user
awareness of the potential for collision. It is vital to have a good understanding of the International
Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea (IRPCS / COLREGS), to ensure all actions taken are in
accordance with the IRPCS. Important concepts to understand in relation to Collision Avoidance
include (but are not limited to): Risk assessment; Right of Way; Restricted visibility; interpreting
lights and shapes; interpreting sound and light signals. In the event of conflict, the IRPCS
regulations must take precedence. For more information on IRPCS / COLREGS, refer to: IRPCS

Moving Target

1. Predicted Area of Danger zone (Predicted area based on target’s last reported position)
2. Warning line
3. Target COG line
4. AIS Target (Last received position)
Stationary Target
(Target moving less than 2 kts)

Chart app 141

1. Predicted Area of Danger zone (Predicted area based on target’s last reported position)
2. Stationary AIS Target (Last received position)
Important: You must still maintain a permanent watch for:
• Vessels that are not equipped with AIS or AIS-equipped vessels that are not currently
transmitting their position, as these targets will not be displayed in the Chart application.
• AIS-equipped vessels reporting an inaccurate GPS position, your own vessel’s GPS accuracy, or
AIS targets with delayed location updates. These situations will cause your vessel’s position and
/ or AIS target positions to be displayed inaccurately in the Chart application.
• Obstructions not equipped with AIS transmitters.

Enabling collision avoidance

The Collision Avoidance feature can be enabled in the Chart app.
Chart app > Menu > Targets > Collision Avoidance

In the Collision Avoidance menu you can change the settings to determine which types of target
(e.g. AIS or Radar) will have a Predicted Area of Danger zone:

142
 Setting Description
Radar Targets Enable / disable — Radar targets will have a
Predicted Area of Danger zone.
AIS Targets Enable/disable — AIS targets will have a
Predicted Area of Danger zone.
All targets Displays a Predicted Area of Danger zone on all
targets in your vessel’s vicinity.
Targets crossing my course Displays a Predicted Area of Danger zone
only on targets which will potentially cross your
vessel’s Interception line.
Distance ahead Change the maximum distance of the
Interception line in front of your vessel (only
available with Targets crossing my course
enabled).
• Minimum: 0.5 nm
• Maximum: 5.0 nm
Hide areas for static targets Enable/disable — Static targets (targets travelling
less than 2.0 kts) will NOT have a Predicted
Area of Danger zone.

Collision scenarios
There are 3 potential scenarios the Collision Avoidance feature can warn you of:
• Own vessel moving faster than target
• Target moving faster than own vessel
• Both targets moving at similar speed

Example scenario 1 — Own vessel moving faster than target vessel

Note: These scenarios are examples provided for guidance only.

Chart app 143

In the example above the vessel’s COG will cross with the target’s COG within the Interception zone,
which could cause a collision. You should alter course and / or speed to avoid the potential collision.
Scenario 1 Course change examples

1. Course alteration to pass ahead of the Interception zone [Not recommended] — Proceed with
caution, there is always an inherent risk when passing in front of other vessels.
2. Course alteration to pass ahead of the target vessel [Not recommended] — This manoeuvre is
not recommended as your vessel will still cross through the target’s Interception zone.
3. Course alteration to pass astern of the target vessel and its Interception zone — This manoeuvre
alters your vessel’s course so that it does not come into contact with the target’s Interception
zone and passes astern of the target.
4. Course alteration to pass clear astern of the target vessel and its Interception zone. This is the
preferred manoeuvre as it correctly alters your vessel’s course so that it is clear of the target’s
Interception zone and passes safely astern of the target. This manoeuvre also clearly indicates
to the target vessel your actual change of course.

144
Figure 2. Scenario 1 Speed change examples

1. (1)Speeding
up [Not recommended] — Increasing vessel speed to pass ahead of the target vessel.
Proceed with caution, there is always an inherent risk when passing in front of other vessels.
2. No speed change [Not recommended] — Not changing speed or course is not an option as
it can result in a collision.
3. Slowing down [Not recommended] — Slowing down a sufficient amount will allow the target
vessel to pass ahead of your vessel.
4. (2)Slowingdown — Slowing down more than a sufficient amount will allow the target vessel to
pass safely ahead of your vessel.

Chart app 145

 Note:
• In this example the paths will still cross within the Intercept distance, so the graphics are
(1)
still displayed.
• (2) In this example the paths will no longer cross within the Intercept distance, so the graphics
are not displayed.

Example scenario 2 — Target vessel moving faster than your vessel

Note: These scenarios are examples provided for guidance only.
In certain situations, when the target vessel is travelling faster than your vessel, there may be more
than one opportunity for your paths to cross within the Intercept distance. If this is the case then a
second Interception zone is displayed.

1. 1st — The first Interception zone (displayed closest to the target vessel) represents a bow-to-bow
collision.
2. 2nd — The second Interception zone (displayed farthest from the target vessel) represents the
target vessel running you down from behind.
When altering course and speed, both Interception zones must be avoided.

146
Scenario 2 Course change examples

1. Course alteration to pass ahead of the Interception zone [Not recommended] — As the target
vessel is moving faster than your vessel you will pass astern of the target.
2. Course alteration to pass ahead of the first Interception zone [Not recommended] — Although
this course alteration is sufficient to avoid a potential bow-to-bow collision, it has created a
second Interception zone where the target may now run you down from behind.
3. Course alteration to pass between the 2 Interception zones [Not recommended] — Although this
may seem like the quickest option, proceed with caution, as the gap between the 2 Interception
zones can close quickly, especially when your vessel slows down.
4. Course alteration to clear astern of the target vessel and its Interception zone. This would be the
preferred manoeuvre as it correctly alters your vessel’s course so that it is clear of the target’s
Interception zone, and passes safely astern of the target. This manoeuvre also clearly indicates
to the target vessel your change of course.

Chart app 147

Figure 2. Scenario 2 Speed change examples

1. Speeding up [Not recommended] — Increasing vessel speed to pass ahead of the target vessel.
Proceed with caution, there is always an inherent risk when passing in front of other vessels.
2. No change [Not recommended] — Not changing speed or course may result in a collision.
3. Slowing down [Not recommended] — Slowing down slightly may result in the 2 Interception
zones closing up or merging into a single zone.
4. Slowing down — Slowing down a sufficient amount will allow the target vessel to pass safely
ahead of your vessel, avoiding the Interception zone(s).

Example scenario 3 — Both vessels travelling at the same speed

Note: These scenarios are examples provided for guidance only.

148
Course change
When both vessels are travelling at the same speed, course alterations should be made in
accordance with the guidance provided in examples 1 and 2.
Speed change
When both vessels are travelling at the same speed, altering your speed will change the collision
scenario to one of the scenarios detailed in examples 1 and 2.

8.8 Target intercept

The Intercept feature can be used to help rendezvous with friends or for Pilot boats and the
Coastguard to intercept vessels that are to be boarded.
To use the Intercept feature, select and hold the target icon until the menu is displayed,
then select Intercept. The Chart app will automatically plot a direct course to a point
where your vessel and the target will cross (intercept).
An interception mark is placed at a predicted point where both your vessel and the
target will cross.
Important:
When performing an individual interception, you are placing your vessel on a collision
course with the target vessel. It WILL be necessary to change to a parallel course to
prevent a collision.

Pre-requisites:
• It is vital to have a good understanding of the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at
Sea (IRPCS / COLREGS), to ensure all actions taken are in accordance with the IRPCS. For more
information on IRPCS / COLREGS, refer to: IRPCS
• You must be familiar with the AIS feature.
• You must have a thorough understanding of the Target interception feature and its implications
before attempting to use it in a real life scenario.

1. Initial Target interception graphics.

2. Actual vessel movements to perform the rendezvous.

Chart app 149

8.9 Tides mode
In Tides mode the Tides animation control is displayed onscreen and the Tide station and Current
station symbols in the Chart app are replaced with dynamic graphics which identify Tide and Current
conditions. You can use the animation controls to play Tide and Current predictions for a 24 hour
period. The own vessel Tide vector is also enabled in Tides mode.
Note:
• The Tides mode is only available if you have cartography that provides the Tides and Current
data. Refer to your cartography provider for more information.
• The Tides mode requires accurate date information, usually taken from the GNSS (GPS) position
data available to your MFD. Alternatively, you can input a specific date manually.

1. Animation progress bar — The progress bar is Blue for the current 24 hour period, or Green
when playing animations from a different day.
2. Skip forwards — Skips forwards in user defined intervals, when the end of the progress bar is
reached skipping forward will progress to the next day.
3. Skip backwards — Skips backwards in user defined intervals. When the beginning of the
progress bar is reached, skipping backward will regress to the previous day.
4. Skip to the actual date / time — Position data is required from your GNSS (GPS) receiver to
obtain current date and time.
5. Play / Pause animation — When the animation is playing it will cycle through the current 24
hour period continuously.
6. Own vessel tide (Set and Drift) vector.
7. Dynamic tide height graphic.
8. Dynamic current graphic.
Important:
The data provided in the Tide and Current graphs and graphics is for information purposes only
and must NOT be relied upon as a substitute for prudent navigation. Only official government
charts and notices to mariners contain all the information needed for safe navigation.

Using animation controls

The animation controls can be selected using the Touchscreen, alternatively you can use the MFD’s
physical buttons or a RMK controller to control animations as described below:
With the Chart app set to Tides mode.
1. Select Animate tides from the menu.
2. Use the Left button on the Uni-controller to skip forwards in user defined intervals.

150
3. Use the Right button on the Uni-controller to skip backwards in user defined intervals.
4. Use the Uni-controller’s OK button to Play or Pause the animation.
You can define the User skip time interval form the Advanced menu: Menu > Settings > Advanced
> Tide animation interval.

Setting a specific date for animations

You can select a specific date for the Tide and Current animation predictions.
1. Select Select date from the main menu.
2. Use the Up and Down arrows to change the date to the required day.
3. Select Save.
The animation will be set for the specified date.

Tide station information

Depending on your cartography, Tide station information may be available at the location of Tide
stations.

Tide station symbol

The location of Tide stations is marked on the Chart using a diamond-shaped
symbol with a ‘T’ in the middle.
• The symbol is colored Red when using Navionics cartography.
• The symbol is colored Black when using C-Map cartography.

Dynamic tide graphic

Using Navionics cartography, when the Tides layer is enabled or when the Chart app is in Tides
mode, the standard symbol is replaced with a dynamic Tide height graphic:

1. Tide bar — The tide bar plots the current tide height against the maximum predicted tide
height for that day.
2. Red arrow indicates tide height is increasing.
3. Tide height — Tide height is displayed in user-selected depth units, with decimals displayed in
subscript. Decimals are not shown for values of 10 or greater.
4. Blue arrow indicates tide height is decreasing.

Tide graph
Tide graphs are available with applicable Navionics and C-Map cartography by selecting more
options and then Tide station from the Tide station’s context menu.

Chart app 151

1. Sunrise — Indicates time of sunrise.
2. Sunset — Indicates time of sunset.
3. Height — Provides tide height in selected units.
4. Time — Indicates time of day.
5. Low / High tide — Indicates the time of low and high tides.
6. Time and date options — Use the buttons to view previous, next or today’s tide predictions, or
enter a date by selecting the date field.

Current station information

Depending on your cartography, Current station information may be available at the location of
Current stations.

Current station symbol

The location of Current stations is marked on the Chart using a diamond-shaped
symbol with a ‘C’ in the middle.
• The symbol is colored Blue when using applicable Navionics cartography.
• The symbol is colored Black when using applicable C-Map cartography.

Dynamic current graphic

When the Tides layer is enabled or when the Chart app is in Tides mode, the standard symbol is
replaced with a dynamic Current graphic.

152
 When using Navionics cartography the dynamic Current graphic is an arrow
pointing in the direction of the current flow. Arrow length indicates the speed of
the current; the longer the arrow, the faster the speed.
The arrow’s border indicates current status:
• Red = increasing current speed.
• Blue = decreasing current speed.
Current speed is shown inside the arrow. Current speed is displayed in
user-selected speed units, with decimals displayed in subscript. Decimals are
not shown for values of 10 or greater.
If tidal conditions are “slack”, the word “SLACK” appears in a box with a Blue
border.
When using C-Map cartography, arrows are used to indicate the direction of current flow. The size
and color of the arrow indicates the strength of the current:
Yellow 0 to 0.1 Knots

Yellow 0.2 to 1.0 Knots

Orange 1.1 to 2.0 Knots

Orange 2.1 to 3.0 Knots

Red >3.0 Knots

Current graph
Current graphs are available by selecting more options and then Current station from the Current
station’s context menu.

Chart app 153

1. Sunrise — Indicates time of sunrise.
2. Sunset — Indicates time of sunset.
3. Speed — Provides current speed in selected units.
4. Time — Indicates time of day.
5. Direction — Indicates the direction of the current (relative to North).
6. Time and date options — Use the buttons to view previous, next or today’s tide predictions, or
enter a date by selecting the date field.
7. Ebb / Flood — Displays a list showing ebb, slack and flood tides.

Displaying tide or current graphs

1. Select a tide or current station symbol or dynamic graphic.
2. Select more options from the context menu.
3. Select Tide station or Current station
Note:
You can also access tide and current graphs by selecting More info from the pop-over options
when performing a Find nearest search for tides.

8.10 RealBathy™
You can create precise personal bathymetric charts in realtime using Raymarine’s RealBathy™ feature.
When using the RealBathy™ feature, new contour lines are drawn in realtime on the screen based on
your transducer’s depth readings. Color shading is used to reflect depth, with the darkest shades
signifying the shallowest area. The sonar data is recorded to the inserted memory card.

154
Requirements
The Realbathy feature requires the following:
• LightHouse™ software version 3.9 or later.
• LightHouse™ NC2 charts, which must include tide station information for the location you wish
to survey.
• MicroSD card with sufficient free space to record depth and bathymetry data.
• You must ascertain the distance above the bottom face of your depth transducer to the waterline,
as shown in the following illustration:

1. Waterline.
2. Water depth below transducer face.
3. Distance above the bottom face of your depth transducer to the waterline.

Setting up and creating RealBathy contours

Important:
• You will need to know the distance above the bottom face of your transducer to the waterline.
• For tidal environments, ensure you have LightHouse™ NC2 cartography that includes tide station
information for your location.
From the chart app.
1. Insert your LightHouse™ NC2 chart card into the display’s card reader.

Chart app 155

2. Select your LightHouse™ chart card as your cartography for the chart app.
For details on choosing your cartography refer to: Selecting a chart card

3. Enter the distance above the bottom face of your transducer to the waterline in the Waterline
to tdcr: setting field.
4. Enable the RealBathy toggle switch, located in the Depths menu: Menu > Depths
5. Select the relevant Height correction option:
• None — No corrections are made.
• Tidal — Uses nearby tide station data to correct height. When Tidal is selected a tidal station
search is performed and a list of available stations is displayed. Select the closest tide station
to your location.
• Lake level — User specified value using the water level marker for your location.
Note:
To ensure accurate contour depths it is recommended that:
• in tidal environments (for example, seas and oceans) you use LightHouse™ NC2 cartography that
includes tide station information and select the tide station closest to your location;
• in fresh water environments (for example, lakes), select Lake level in the Height correction: field
and then enter the current reading from the water level marker for your location into the field
located under the height correction option.
6. Adjust the Visibility: setting to the desired transparency.
100% provides full visibility of the RealBathy contours; as the percentage decreases the chart
detail behind the RealBathy contours becomes more visible.

7. Select the required Density: setting.

Steep drop-offs can result in overlapping contour lines; lowering the density in these situations
provides a clearer view.

8.11 Find nearest

The Find nearest feature allows you to select a location and search for nearby objects.

The objects available depend on the cartography type you are using:

156
 Object LightHouse Navionics® C-MAP®
Marinas

Tide Station

Current Station

Lakes

Obstructions

Wrecks

Port Services

Businesses

Port (Search by name)

Point of Interest

Outdoor Recreational Areas (ORA)

ORA Services

Small Craft Facility

Harbor Facility

Search using find nearest

To search for nearby objects, follow the steps below.

Chart app 157

 Note:
The list is sorted by an object’s proximity to the selected location. However, the Range and Bearing
displayed is relative to your vessel’s position.
1. Select a location near where you want to search.
The Chart context menu is displayed.
2. Select more options.
3. Select Find nearest.
4. Select the required object type.
5. If required, select a sub-category or when searching for a port, use the onscreen keyboard to
enter a port name and select Search.
6. A list of nearby objects of the type selected is displayed.
7. Select an object from the list.
The Pop-over menu is displayed and the LiveView on the right of the screen will highlight and
zoom to the selected object.
8. From the Pop-over menu you can:
i. View more information about the object by selecting More info.
ii. Navigate to the selected object by selecting Goto.
iii. Create an automatic route to the selected object by selecting Autoroute to.
iv. Display the selected object in the Chart app by selecting Show on chart.

8.12 SonarChart™ Live

You can create personal bathymetry charts using your depth transducer and the SonarChart™ Live
feature, available with compatible Navionics® electronic cartography cards.
Note: Before using SonarChart™ Live ensure you have correctly configured your transducer
depth settings.

When using SonarChart™ Live, new contour lines are drawn in real time on the screen based on your
transducer’s depth readings. Color shading is used to reflect depth, with dark red signifying the
shallowest area. The sonar data is recorded to your cartography card and is shared with Navionics
when you update your chart card online.

158
Tide correction
SonarChart™ Live records the actual readings from your depth transducer under current tide / water
level conditions. You can enable automatic adjustment of depth readings based on normalized low
tide / low water level depth data taken from a nearby Tide station.

Enabling SonarChart Live

To enable creation of real time SonarChart™ Live bathymetry lines:
With your transducer depth settings correctly configured and compatible cartography selected:
1. Select the Depth tab from the Chart app settings menu: Chart app > Menu > Settings > Depth.
2. Enable Sonar logging.
3. Enable SonarChart Live.
4. Select the Visibility setting field, and adjust to your preferred value.
5. If required, enable Tide correction.

8.13 UAV Chart integration

When a compatible UAV with a GNSS (GPS) position fix is connected to your MFD, a UAV icon
representing the position of the UAV is displayed in the Chart app.

1 UAV COG
The direction of the Blue line indicates the UAV’s current Course Over Ground
(COG). The length of the line indicates the UAV’s predicted position when the
specified vector Reference period has passed.
The Vector Reference period can be adjusted from the vessel icon’s context menu.
2 UAV Icon
Displayed when the UAV option is enabled in the Chart app settings, and your UAV
has a GNSS (GPS) position fix.
3 Camera heading
The Black Camera heading arrow is fixed to provide an indication of the direction
the UAV’s camera is pointing towards.
4 Line to vessel
The Yellow dotted line represents the angle of the UAV’s position relative to your
vessel.

Chart app 159

Showing or hiding the UAV icon
The UAV icon is displayed by default in the Chart app. The icon can be hidden if required.
From the Chart app menu:
1. Select Settings.
2. Select the Layers tab.
3. Select the UAV: toggle switch.
Selecting the UAV toggle switch will make the UAV icon visible (on) or invisible (off).

Performing a UAV Goto

When your UAV is in flight you can select a location or object in the Chart app and perform a UAV
Goto (your UAV will fly to the selected location or object and hover).
1. Select a location or object in the Chart app.
The Chart context menu is displayed.
2. Select More.
3. Select UAV Goto.
A UAV waypoint marker is placed to signify the UAV’s destination and the UAV will fly to that
location.
You can stop a UAV Goto at anytime by selecting the Red Cancel UAV Goto that is displayed
onscreen in the UAV app, when a UAV Goto is active. Cancelling a UAV Goto will stop the Goto
action and the UAV will hover in its current location.
A UAV Goto can be cancelled at any time by selecting Stop UAV Goto from the Chart context menu.

8.14 ClearCruise™ Augmented Reality

The Chart app has additional Augmented Reality features, which are available when an AR200 and a
compatible IP camera are connected.
Augmented Reality features must also be enabled and configured in the Video app.
With the Augmented Reality features enabled, the AIS Target, Waypoint and Chart Object data
available in the Chart app will also be available in the video app, where the data will be overlaid
onto the live video feed.

For further information on ClearCruise™ Augmented Reality, refer to p.274 — ClearCruise™ features
.

160
Field of View
The Field of View (FOV) cone acts as a range indicator to illustrate the area of coverage of the
camera with respect to displaying chart objects in the Video app as part of the ClearCruise™
Augmented Reality features.
Chart objects that are within the scope of the displayed FOV cone will be displayed in the Video app
as “flags”. For more information on flags, refer to p.282 — Augmented Reality flags

The area of coverage of the FOV cone is determined by:

• The camera’s horizontal Field of View (FOV). This setting can be adjusted in the Video app: Video
settings > Camera Setup tab.
• The Augmented Reality Range Limit. For more information refer to p.287 — Range limit
. You can also manually specify the maximum range limit; refer to
p.286 — ClearCruise settings (Augmented Reality)
for more information. When you adjust this setting, the FOV cone in the Chart app will change
accordingly.

The FOV cone can be enabled/disabled in the Chart app settings: Menu > Settings > Layers.

8.15 Chart settings menu

The table below lists settings applicable to the Chart app and their location within the app’s Settings
menu. Available settings are dependent on the cartography in use. If a setting is not displayed then
the feature is not compatible with your cartography. If a feature is grayed out then it requires a
subscription to activate the feature.

Cartography
Settings Description Options
LightHouse Charts Allows you to select the cartography that you • List of available
Navionics want to use in the current Chart app. cartography
C-MAP

Chart app 161

Layers tab
Chart vendor and
Settings Description Layer options
Chart detail Allows you to select the level of detail displayed Chart vendor:
Layer options: onscreen for vector-based cartography.
• All (Vector)
• Low
• Medium
• High
Aerial Enables and disables the display of a Chart vendor:
Layer options: photographic aerial overlay.
• Navionics
• On
• C-MAP (Vector)
• Off
AIS Enables and disables the display of AIS targets Chart vendor:
Layer options: in the Chart app.
Requires AIS hardware. • All
• On
• Off
Radar Enables and disables the display of your Radar Chart vendor:
Layer options: scanner’s image in the Chart app.
Requires Radar scanner hardware. • All
• On
• Off
Range rings Enables and disables the display of Radar-like Chart vendor:
Layer options: range rings in the Chart app.
• All
• On
• Off
FOV: Field of View Chart vendor:
Layer options: Enables and disables the ClearCruise™
Augmented Reality (AR) camera’s field of view • All
• On (FOV) overlay in the Chart app.
• Off
Weather Radar Enables Weather Radar precipitation data Chart vendor:
Layer options: overlay in the Chart app.
Only available when connected to a compatible • All
• On SiriusXM weather receiver with a valid Layer options:
• Off subscription.
• On
• Off
Tides Enables and disables the display of Tide and Chart vendor:
Layer options: Current graphics at Tide and Current stations in
the Chart app. • Navionics
• On
• Off
EasyView Enables and disables the magnification of useful Chart vendor:
Layer options: icons and text, making them easier to read.
• Navionics
• On
• Off
Community edits Enables and disables the display of Chart vendor:
Layer options: crowd-sourced data.
• Navionics
• On
• Off

162
 Chart vendor and
Settings Description Layer options
High res bathy Enables and disables the display of High Chart vendor:
Layer options: Resolution Bathymetry charts, which provide
improved bottom detail, contours and structure. • C-MAP
• On
• Off
Sports fishing Allows you to display easy-to-use information Chart vendor:
Layer options: pages about fishing locations including fish type,
size, depth, and reef and bottom composition. • C-MAP
• On
• Off
Marine protected areas Allows clear identification of areas where Chart vendor:
Layer options: commercial and recreational fishing is prohibited
or restricted. • C-MAP
• On
• Off
Fishing AOI Enables and disables the display of Fishing AOIs Chart vendor:
Layer options: (Areas Of Interest).
• C-MAP
• On
• Off
ActiveCaptain Enables and disables the display of Chart vendor:
Layer options: crowd-sourced data.
• C-MAP
• On
• Off

Depths tab
Chart vendor and
Settings Description Setting options
Show soundings Enables and disables the display of depth Chart vendor:
Setting options: soundings on the chart. When set to Manual,
depth soundings will be shown from zero to the • LightHouse
• None maximum depth you specify. (Vector)
• Manual • Navionics
• All • C-MAP
Show contours Enables and disables the display of depth Chart vendor:
Setting options: contours on the chart. When set to Manual,
contours will be shown from zero to the maximum • Navionics
• None depth you specify. • C-MAP
• Manual
• All
Shallow water Determines the depth at which the Shallow Chart vendor:
Setting options: contour is displayed.
Numeric value The Shallow contour cannot be set to a value • LightHouse
greater than the Safety or Deep contour value. (Vector)

Safe water from Determines the depth at which the Safety Chart vendor:
Setting options: contour is displayed.
Numeric value The Safety contour cannot be set to a value that • LightHouse
is less than the Shallow contour or greater than (Vector)
the Deep contour.

Chart app 163

 Chart vendor and
Settings Description Setting options
Deep water from Allows you to specify the depth at which Deep Chart vendor:
Setting options: water will be displayed.
Numeric value • LightHouse
(Vector)
• Navionics
• C-MAP
Depth gradient Allows you to specify the gradient shade Chart vendor:
Setting options: between shallow and deep.
• LightHouse
• Dark to light (Vector)
• Light to dark • NC2
Deep water color Allows you to specify the color that will be used Chart vendor:
Setting options: to display Deep water.
• Navionics
• White
• C-MAP
• Blue
Sonar logging Allows logging of depth and position data to your Chart vendor:
Setting options: Navionics chart card.
• Navionics
• On
• Off
SonarChart Live Enables and disables the Navionics SonarChart Chart vendor:
Setting options: Live feature, which enables the realtime creation
and display of high resolution bathymetry charts. • Navionics
• On
• Off
Visibility Determines the level of transparency used when Chart vendor:
Setting options: displaying SonarChart data.
• Navionics
• 0% to 100%
Tide correction Enables Sonar logging depth measurements to Chart vendor:
Setting options: be offset by tide height data from nearby tide
stations. • Navionics
• On
• Off
Shallow depth shading Enables and disables the identification of areas Chart vendor:
Setting options: deemed to be shallow. When set to On, a red
hatched area is displayed in areas shallower than • Navionics
• On the specified depth.
• Off
Density Determines the density of available depth Chart vendor:
Setting options: contours.
• Navionics
• Very high
• High
• Medium
• Low
Fishing Range You can set up a Fishing Range by enabling Chart vendor:
Setting options: Fishing Range and specifying a minimum and
maximum depth. Areas on the chart that are • Navionics
• On between these depths will be colored White;
• Off areas outside of these depths will be colored
Blue.

164
 Chart vendor and
Settings Description Setting options
Record depth data Enables depth and position data to be recorded Chart vendor:
Setting options: to memory card.
• LightHouse
• On (Vector)
• Off
Waterline to tdcr Enter the distance between the waterline and Chart vendor:
Setting options: your depth transducer.
Numeric value • LightHouse
(Vector)
Save to When a suitable MicroSD card has been inserted Chart vendor:
Setting options: the free space available for recording depth data
Numeric value and RealBathy is displayed. • LightHouse
. (Vector)

RealBathy Displays previously recorded RealBathy™ data Chart vendor:

Setting options: saved on memory card on the chart.
• LightHouse
• On (Vector)
• Off
Visibility Determines the transparency of the RealBathy Chart vendor:
Setting options: data and SonarChart live data displayed
Numeric value onscreen. • LightHouse
(Vector)
Height correction Determines the level of height correction applied Chart vendor:
Setting options: to RealBathy and depth data.
• LightHouse
• None (Vector)
• Tidal
• Lake level
Safety depth shading Determines the depth at which the Safety Chart vendor:
Setting options: contour is displayed.
Numeric value • LightHouse
(Vector)
Density Selects the density of available depth contours. Chart vendor:
Setting options:
Note: • LightHouse
• Low (Vector)
The ‘Very high’ option is only available when
• Medium using Navionics cartography. • Navionics
• High
• Very high

View & Motion tab

Settings Description Options
Chart motion Relative motion • Relative motion
In Relative motion mode the vessel icon remains
• True motion
fixed onscreen and the chart area moves relative
to your position. • Auto range
In this mode you can adjust your vessel’s fixed
position using the Boat position setting.
True motion
In True motion mode the chart is fixed and your
vessel icon moves around the chart. As your
vessel’s position reaches the edge of the screen,
the chart is redrawn to reveal the area in front
of your vessel.
Auto range

Chart app 165

 Settings Description Options
In Auto range the largest possible scale is
maintained that will display both your vessel and
the destination / target waypoint simultaneously.
Chart orientation North-up • North-up
In North-up the top of the screen always points
• Head-up
towards north. As your vessel’s heading changes,
the vessel icon rotates accordingly. • Course-up
Head-up
In Head-up the top of the screen always points
towards your vessel’s current heading, and
as your heading changes the chart rotates
accordingly.
Course-up
In Course-up the top of the screen always points
towards your destination, and as your destination
changes the chart rotates accordingly.
Boat position The boat position determines the position of your • Center
vessel icon onscreen. The default is Center but
• Partial offset
you can adjust this to provide a greater distance
in front of your vessel. • Full offset
Your boat position can only be changed when
Chart motion is set to Relative motion.
Sync view with All charts with Sync turned On will synchronize • On
other charts: orientation and position.
• Off

Laylines
Setting Description Options
Sail Performance Choose between Layline types: • Not set
• Not set — Laylines are • Fixed
disabled • Polar
• Fixed Angles — the vectors
are created based on
specified Upwind and
Downwind angles. These
angles are set by default to
45° and 165° respectively
and can be configured in the
menu
• Polars — the vectors use an
imported polar table for your
vessel to create the laylines
(Fixed angle) Upwind angle • Set the angle of upwind • 15° to 70°
layline calculations
• 45° (default)
(Fixed angle) Downwind angle • Set the angle of downwind • 125° to 175°
layline calculations
• 165° (default)
(Polar) Polar • Select the Polar table that will • List of available Polars
affect your layline calculation.
Selecting your vessel’s make
and model will provide better
calculated laylines to follow
when sailing
Display Layines on this chart • Display or hide laylines • On
on the current Chart app
• Off
instance

166
 Setting Description Options
Adjust for tides • Adjust the laylines to take • On
into account tidal flow
• Off
Boat type • Set your vessel’s boat type • List available Boat types
to provide more accurate
leeway calculation

Advanced tab
Settings Description Options
Chart orientation The orientation of the chart affects alignment • North-up
relative to your vessel, route or North.
• Head-up
• Course-up
Enhanced AIS Switches between using standard and enhanced • On
targets AIS targets.
• Off
Use Radar without Enables use of Radar overlay without Heading • On
heading data data.
• Off
Cursor info boxes Allows display of the cursor’s Range and Bearing • On
from your vessel. When an object is highlighted
• Off
the object name is also displayed.
Tide animation Allows you to select the time interval used for the • 15 minutes to 2 hours
interval Tide and Current animations in Tides mode. in 15 minute steps.
Cartographic Enables and disables the display of cartographic • Navigation marks
objects objects. The settings available are dependent on
• Navigation mark
the cartography in use.
symbols
• Rocks
• Light sectors
• Routing systems
• Caution areas
• Marine features
• Land features
• Business services
• Panoramic photos
• Roads
• Additional wrecks
• Colored seabed areas
Chart appearance Allows you to change the appearance of the • 2D shading
Chart app. The settings available are dependent
• Aerial overlay
on the cartography in use.
• Aerial overlay opacity
• Relief shading
• Visibility
• Grid
• Chart text
• Chart boundaries
• Text/symbol size
• Deep water color

Chart app 167

 Settings Description Options
• Community edits
My data You can change how your User data appears in • Waypoints names
appearance the Chart app.
• Route names
• Track names
• Route width
• Track width
• Vector width
• Vector length

Weather settings tab

Settings Description
Wind symbol Determines whether Arrows or Barbs are used
for Wind direction graphics in Weather mode.
Marine zone boundaries Determines whether marine boundaries are
shown in Weather mode.
Watchbox alerts Enables and disables Watchbox alerts.
Watchbox range Determines the range from your vessel that
Watchbox alerts are displayed
Signal strength Displays the signal strength of a connected
weather receiver.
Receiver ESN Displays the Electronic Serial Number (ESN) of
a connected weather receiver.

Note:
The Weather settings tab is only displayed when the Chart app is set to Weather mode.

Page settings tab

Settings Description
Data Overlays Enables configuration of Data overlays, which
overlay key information from connected sensors
onto the Chart, Radar, Sonar and Camera apps.
Edit split ratio Enables you to customize the position of the
partitions in splitscreen app pages. For example,
50/50, 70/30 etc.

168
Chapter 9: Weather mode

Chapter contents
• 9.1 Weather mode on page 170
• 9.2 Activating your SiriusXM receiver on page 171
• 9.3 Animated weather on page 172
• 9.4 Weather mode context menu on page 173
• 9.5 Weather Radar layer on page 173
• 9.6 Cities and Surface observation stations layers on page 175
• 9.7 Cloud top and Lightning layers on page 176
• 9.8 Storm cast and Storm tracks layers on page 177
• 9.9 Sea surface temperature and Surface pressure layers on page 178
• 9.10 Wind and Watchbox layers on page 180
• 9.11 Wave direction, height and period layers on page 181

Weather mode 169

9.1 Weather mode
Weather mode is available in the Chart app if you have a weather receiver and valid subscription.
Switching the Chart app to weather mode allows you to overlay weather data and information from
your weather receiver.
To enter Weather mode, open the Chart app menu and select WEATHER.
Weather mode allows you to track weather systems in relation to your vessel by overlaying live,
historical and forecasted weather data directly on the chart. In Weather mode you can also view
animated weather graphics and read weather reports. Weather mode sets the Chart detail setting to
Low and hides other data which increases the visibility of Weather data.
Important:
• Compatible hardware and a valid subscription is required to enable Weather mode.
• By enabling Weather mode you agree to its terms of use.
• Do not use Weather mode for navigation.
• Weather data is only available in North America and its coastal waters.

Weather symbols are organized into layers, accessible from the Chart menu: Menu > Weather
layers. Each layer can be enabled and disabled independently.
The following Layers are available:
Weather radar Surface pressure
Cities Surface observation stations
Cloud top Wind
Lightning Watchbox
Sea surface temperature Wave height
Storm cast Wave period
Storm tracks Wave direction

In Weather mode the Chart orientation is fixed in North-Up.

170
9.2 Activating your SiriusXM receiver
Your MFD is compatible with the SR150 and SR200 SiriusXM receivers. Your receiver must be
activated before you can use Weather mode on your MFD.
Note:
Lighthouse Software Version
• LH3.10 – SR200 SiriusXM receiver for Weather mode is compatible on all Axiom Multifunction
Displays on the same network as the data master.
The following information is required to activate your SiriusXM receiver:
• Electronic Serial Number (ESN) — The ESN is printed on the product label located on the underside
of your SiriusXM receiver. You can also access the ESN from the Weather settings tab in the Chart
app: (Menu > Settings > Weather > Receiver ESN).
• Current billing information (if you already have a valid subscription).
• Desired subscription package.
1. Obtain your SiriusXM receiver’s ESN.
2. Visit the Sirius Marine Weather website: http://www.siriusxm.com/sxmmarine, and choose a
subscription package.
3. Follow the “Activate Now” link to activate your receiver online. Alternatively, call
1–855–796–9847.
Once your SiriusXM receiver is activated, you will be able to enable Weather mode and display
Weather layers in the Chart app. To enable Weather mode, open the Chart app and select WEATHER.

SR200 diagnostics mode

The SR200 diagnostic mode can be accessed from the audio settings menu from the master MFD on
the network. The diagnostics mode should be referred to when liaising with Sirius product support.

1. Reset — Performs a factory reset and power cycle of the SR200.

2. Diagnostics mode — Displays the SR200’s diagnostic information.

Weather receiver status

The status of your weather receiver is displayed in the app info area in the bottom left of the screen.

The app info area displays:

• chart orientation mode — (N-up) orientation is fixed in weather mode.
• signal strength of your Weather receiver:
– Animated dots = no signal; searching for signal.

Weather mode 171

 – 1 bar (orange) = poor signal strength.
– 3 bars (blue) = good signal strength.
• time and date related to the weather data being displayed.

9.3 Animated weather

In Weather mode you can play weather animations of historical Weather radar data and forecasted
wind, wave and surface pressure data.
Weather animations can be accessed in Weather mode by selecting Animate weather from the menu.
When Animate weather is selected the animation player controls and symbols representing the type
of animated data available are displayed onscreen.

Player controls
Player controls include a progress bar, Play/Pause, Fast forward and rewind options.
Animated weather data
Duration of forecasts are dependent on subscription type.
Weather Radar
Historical precipitation data for the previous 2 hours can be played.

Wind
Offshore wind forecast for up to 48 hours.
High resolution coastal and inland wind forecast for up to 24 hours.

Wave height
Offshore wave height forecast for up to 48 hours.
High resolution coastal wave height forecast for up to 24 hours.
Great Lakes wave height forecast for up to 24 hours.

172
 Wave period
Offshore wave period forecast for up to 48 hours.
Great Lakes wave period forecast for up to 24 hours.

Wave direction
Offshore wave direction forecast for up to 48 hours.
Great Lakes wave direction forecast for up to 24 hours.

Surface pressure
Surface pressure forecast for up to 48 hours.

To exit Animate weather open the main Menu.

9.4 Weather mode context menu

The Weather context menu provides Lat/Lon and Range and Bearing information, relative to your
vessel. The context menu also provides access to further weather-related data.
The context menu provides access to:
• Weather info
• Reports.
Depending on the symbol selected, the context menu also
provides additional data when the Cities, Storm cast, Storm
tracks or Watchbox option is selected.

9.5 Weather Radar layer

With the Weather Radar layer enabled a color coded Radar image is displayed. This image shows a
complete view of any precipitation across North America, including the type and intensity. Rain is
shown as light green, dark green, yellow, orange and red as intensity increases. Hail, freezing rain
and snow are represented with colors from bright pink to blue. The images are displayed as pixels
on screen and the resolution of this feature is 2 km per pixel. Coverage includes the Continental
US, Canada, and portions of Mexico/Caribbean.

Weather mode 173

174
9.6 Cities and Surface observation stations layers
The Cities layer and Surface observation stations layer display symbols which represent the location
of Cities and Surface observation stations respectively. The symbols used for Surface observation
stations also identify the station type.

City forecasts are available from the context menu when a City is selected.

Layer Description
1 Cities City
2 Surface observation station Buoy station
3 Surface observation station Coastal-marine automated network (C-MAN)
4 Surface observation station Weather services international (WSI)

Weather mode 175

9.7 Cloud top and Lightning layers
The Cloud top layer provides a satellite image of current cloud coverage and the Lightning layer
provides symbols to show the location of recent lightning strikes.

Cloud tops
Cloud tops use Gray shading to identify cloud top height. The shading changes at 5,000 feet
increments, from Dark Gray to White. Clouds lower than 5,000 feet are not displayed.

Lightning
The shade of the lightning symbols represent the time the lightning strike was detected.

0 to 5 minutes ago 5 to 10 minutes ago 10 to 15 minutes ago

176
9.8 Storm cast and Storm tracks layers
The Storm cast layer displays arrows that show a storm’s direction and speed. The Storm tracks layer
identifies a storm’s historic, current and forecasted path. Associated wind fields are also shown for
the storm’s current location.

Storm tracks
Storm track symbols identify the type and time period of the storm.

Item Category Color Description

1, 2, 3 Historical Grey Hurricane (Category 1–5)
4, 5, 6 Current Red Tropical storm
7, 8, 9 Forecast Orange Tropical disturbance,
tropical depression
Storm data is available from the context menu when a symbol is selected.
Surface wind fields (Wind Radii) are shown using colored shapes representing the wind field area
and speed.

Weather mode 177

• Pink — wind speed = 64 knots or greater.
• Orange — wind speed = 50 knots or greater.
• Yellow — wind speed = 34 knots or greater.

9.9 Sea surface temperature and Surface pressure layers

The Sea surface temperature layer uses color coding to identify water temperature. The Surface
pressure layer uses standard pressure patterns and Isobars to identify surface pressure.

Sea surface temperature color coding

The colors used for the Sea surface temperature are shown below:

178
Surface pressure patterns
The Surface pressure layer uses standard meteorological patterns to represent surface pressure
conditions.
Symbol Description
High / low pressure (Blue and Red)

Warm front (Red)

Cold front (Blue)

Occluded front (Purple)

Stationary front (Red-Blue)

Trough (Brown)

Squall line (Red)

Dry line (Red)

Isobars (Gray)

Weather mode 179

9.10 Wind and Watchbox layers
The Wind layer uses Arrows or Barbs to identify wind direction and speed. The Watchbox layer
identifies areas where severe weather is occurring or forecast within a specified range.

Wind arrows
The direction of the arrow indicates wind direction and the size of the arrow indicates wind speed,
the larger the arrow the greater the wind speed. Where conditions are calm a circular symbol is used.
You can switch between using Arrows or Barbs for Wind data from the Weather tab of the Chart
menu: Menu > Settings > Weather > Wind symbol.

Wind barbs
Wind barbs identify wind direction and speed.
Barbs provide a more accurate speed resolution than arrows.

Adding the half barbs, full barbs and flags together provides wind speed. The direction the barbs
point towards indicates where the wind is coming from.
• Half barbs = 5 knots
• Full barbs = 10 knots
• Flag = 50 knots

180
Watchbox
Selecting Watchbox data from the Weather context menu display the data associated with the
Watchbox alert.
Watchbox alerts can be enabled and disabled from the Chart menu: Menu > Settings > Weather >
Watchbox alerts.
You can also adjust the area that is monitored for Watchbox alerts using the Watchbox range control
on the Weather tab.

9.11 Wave direction, height and period layers

Wave direction
The Wave direction layer uses arrows to identify the direction of waves.

Wave height
Wave height uses colors to identify the height of waves. The colors used are as follows:

Weather mode 181

Wave period

Wave period uses colors to identify the gap between successive waves. The colors used are as
follows:

182
Chapter 10: Fishfinder app

Chapter contents
• 10.1 Fishfinder app overview on page 184
• 10.2 Opening the Fishfinder app on page 186
• 10.3 Sonar channels on page 188
• 10.4 Placing a Waypoint (Sonar, DownVision and SideVision) on page 189
• 10.5 Sonar scroll back on page 190
• 10.6 Sonar sensitivity controls on page 191
• 10.7 Fishfinder settings menu on page 192

Fishfinder app 183

10.1 Fishfinder app overview
The Fishfinder app displays a visualization of the echoes received from a Sonar module and
transducer. The Fishfinder app is compatible with Traditional, CHIRP, DownVision™, SideVision™ and
RealVision™ 3D sonar modules and transducers. The Fishfinder app builds an underwater view of
bottom structure and targets in the water column.
Multiple Sonar modules can be connected at the same time. Sonar modules can be internal (built-in
to your MFD) or external (a separate box on your network).
For each instance of the Fishfinder app you can select which Sonar module and channel that you
want to use, the Sonar module and channel selection will persist over a power cycle.
The Fishfinder app can be displayed in both Fullscreen and splitscreen app pages. App pages may
consist of up to 4 instances of the Fishfinder app.

Fishfinder app controls

Icon Description Action
Home icon Takes you to the Homescreen

Waypoint / MOB Place waypoint / activate Man overboard (MOB) alarm

Pilot icon Opens and closes the Pilot Sidebar

Menu icon Opens the app menu

184
 Icon Description Action
Image adjustment Displays onscreen sensitivity / image adjustment controls

Pause Pause RealVision™ 3D sonar image.

Unpause When the Fishfinder app is paused, you can recommence

scrolling by selecting the Unpause icon.

Range/Zoom In When Auto range is enabled, pressing the plus icon activates
Zoom mode, subsequent presses will increase the Zoom
factor. When Range is set to Manual pressing the Plus icon
decreases the distance displayed onscreen.
Auto range can be enabled and disabled from the Menu:
Menu > Auto range.
Range/Zoom Out When in Zoom mode, pressing the minus icon will decrease
the Zoom factor and finally revert to normal mode. When
Range is set to Manual pressing the Minus icon increases the
distance displayed onscreen.

Touchscreen controls
• Pinch-to-zoom changes the magnification of the image.
• The Range control determines how far the sonar will ping.
• Press and hold onscreen to display the context menu

RealVision 3D controls
When using RealVision 3D sonar you can manipulate the view using touch gestures.

Fishfinder app 185

Touchscreen controls
• One finger swipe rotates the image.
• Two finger swipe pans the image around the screen.
• Pinch-to-zoom changes the magnification of the image.
• The Range control determines how far the sonar will ping.
• Press and hold onscreen to display the context menu
Physical buttons
• Ok button pauses Sonar scrolling.
• Back button resumes Sonar scrolling.
• Ok button when paused opens the context menu.
• Use the Uni-controller’s Directional (Up, Down, Left, Right) controls to rotate the image.
• Use the Uni-controller’s Rotary control or a RMK’s Range In and Range Out buttons to Range
in and out.

10.2 Opening the Fishfinder app

The Fishfinder app is opened by selecting a page icon from the Homescreen that includes a
Fishfinder app.
Pre-requisites:
1. Ensure your Sonar module is compatible (check the latest details available on the Raymarine
website). If in doubt contact an authorized Raymarine dealer for advice.
2. Ensure you have installed your Sonar module in accordance with the documentation that was
supplied with the module.
The Fishfinder app will open in 1 of 4 states:

Please select a sonar channel

The first time you open a new app page that includes the Fishfinder app you will need to select a
Sonar channel.

Select OK and then choose the Sonar channel you want to use from the list:

186
Sonar on and pinging
If your Fishfinder app has already been set up then when the Fishfinder app is opened the Sonar
image will be displayed and start scrolling.

No sonar source available

If the ’No sonar source available’ warning is displayed then either:
• your sonar module is still powering up.
• your MFD cannot establish a connection with your external Sonar module
• your Internal Sonar module has no transducer connected.

Fishfinder app 187

Check your external sonar module’s network and power connection, check your MFD’s network or
transducer connection ensuring the connections and cabling is correct and free from damage,
then power cycle your system. If the Sonar module is still not found then refer to your equipment’s
installation documentation for further troubleshooting information.

No transducer connected
If the ‘No transducer connected’ warning is displayed then your Sonar module cannot connect to
your transducer.

Check your transducer connection(s) are correct and free from damage, then power cycle your
system. If the transducer is still not found then refer to your equipment’s installation documentation
for further troubleshooting information.

10.3 Sonar channels

The Sonar channels that are available depend on the Sonar module and transducer you have
connected.

RealVision™ 3D SideVision™ DownVision™

High CHIRP / High Frequency Medium CHIRP / Medium Low CHIRP / Low Frequency
Frequency

188
Selecting a Sonar channel
The first time you open a new Fishfinder app page you will be requested to select a channel,
subsequently you can change the sonar channel by selecting a channel icon from the Fishfinder
app menu.
1. Select a relevant channel icon from the Menu.
2. Alternatively select All channels from the Menu and then choose your desired sonar module
and channel.

10.4 Placing a Waypoint (Sonar, DownVision and SideVision)

When you observe something of interest in the Fishfinder app you can place a waypoint at its location
so that you can find the area again.
1. Select and hold on the point of interest onscreen.
The Context menu is displayed and scrolling is paused, temporarily.
2. Select Add Waypoint from the context menu.

The Sonar image will remain paused for approximately 10 seconds after the Waypoint has been
placed.

Placing a waypoint RealVision 3D

To place a waypoint whilst viewing a RealVision 3D channel follow the steps below.
1. Select and hold a location onscreen.
The Waypoint context menu and Red waypoint marker is displayed:

2. Select Place waypoint to create a waypoint at the marker’s location, or

Fishfinder app 189

3. Select Move position to adjust the marker’s position before creating the waypoint.

You can move the waypoint along its current axis by sliding 1 finger across the screen. You can
also adjust the view onscreen using the usual 2 finger touch gestures.
4. When the marker is over the desired location select Place waypoint to save a waypoint at the
marker’s location.

10.5 Sonar scroll back

You can “scroll back” in the Fishfinder app to view sonar history.
To activate sonar “scroll back”, perform the following:
• Sonar and DownVision — Swipe your finger left to right across the sonar screen.
• SideVision — Swipe your finger from the bottom to the top of the sonar screen.
• RealVision 3D — Select the onscreen Pause icon.
When sonar scroll back is active the sonar Scroll back bar and Unpause icons are displayed.

190
1. Unpause — Selecting this option resumes live sonar scrolling.
2. Scroll back bar — Use this to move back and forward through the available sonar history. You
can either drag the position indicator right or left or select a specific location on the bar to
jump to that position.
In Sonar, DownVision and SideVision channels, subsequent swipes will rewind the sonar history and
swiping in the opposite direction will fast forward the sonar history.

10.6 Sonar sensitivity controls

Optimum performance is usually achieved using the default settings. You can adjust the image using
the Sensitivity controls to improve the displayed image. Sensitivity setting adjustment is also applied
to the sonar history that is displayed when using sonar scroll back.
Sensitivity settings can be accessed using the onscreen Image adjustment
icon, or the Adjust sensitivity menu option: Menu > Adjust sensitivity.

The Sensitivity controls available are dependant upon the Sonar module in use.
Control Name Description
‘G’ Gain The control determines the signal strength at which
target returns are shown onscreen.
The Gain control can be set to Auto or Manual.
Depending on Sonar module, in Auto you can add
an offset of up to ± 50%.
A higher value produces more target returns and
noise onscreen.

‘I’ Intensity, or The control sets the lower limit for the color used for
‘CG’ Color Gain the strongest target returns. All target returns above
this value are displayed in the strongest color. Those
with a weaker value are divided equally between the
remaining colors.
The control can be set to Auto or Manual. Depending
on Sonar module, in Auto you can add an offset of
up to ± 50%.
‘SF’ Surface Filter , or The control determines the amount of noise
‘NF’ Noise filter displayed onscreen by varying the gain throughout
the water column.
A lower value decreases the depth at which the
control is applied.
The control can be set to Auto or Manual.

Fishfinder app 191

 Control Name Description
‘TVG’ Time Varied The control determines the amount of attenuation
Gain applied throughout the water column to ensure that
targets of a similar size appear the same regardless
of depth.
A higher value produces weaker targets and less
noise onscreen.
The control can be set to 1 of 3 Auto modes or can
be set to Manual.
All to Auto Sets all Sensitivity settings to Auto with 0% offset.

10.7 Fishfinder settings menu

The table below lists settings applicable to the Fishfinder app and their location within the app
Settings menu. The settings available are dependant upon the Sonar module in use.

Sonar display tab

Settings Description Options
Color palette Various color palettes are available to suit List of color palettes.
different conditions or your personal preference.
View selection Enables and disables SideVision™ Left, Right and • On
buttons Both onscreen channel selection icons.
• Off
A-scope A-Scope mode provides a splitscreen view that • Off
includes the normal scrolling sonar image and a
• Center
smaller pane which shows a ‘live’ image of what
is directly below your transducer. • Right
• Cone
Bottom lock Bottom lock flips the range indication so that the • On
bottom always appears flat.
• Off
Range lines Displays vertical range lines when viewing. • On
• Off
Depth lines Displays horizontal depth lines. • On
• Off
White line Displays a solid white line along the bottom • On
contour.
• Off
Bottom fill Displays a solid color fill for the bottom. • On
• Off
Color threshold Color threshold determines the signal strength • 0% to 100%
below which target returns are not shown.
A low value results in only the strongest colors or
lightest shades being displayed.
Scroll speed Determines the scrolling speed for the Sonar • 10% to 500%
image.

192
RealVision™ 3D — Sonar display tab
Settings Description Options
Boat icon Choose which boat icon to use. List of available Boat
icons.
Image stabilization Uses RealVision™ 3D transducer’s built-in sensors • On
to counter-act the rocking motion of your vessel
• Off
to produce a stable sonar image.
Target colors Changes the color palette used for target returns. List of color palettes.
Color targets by Changes the way targets are colored. • Depth
Depth colors targets according to their depth, a
• Intensity
gradient scale can be shown on the 3D grid to
aid depth identification.
Intensity colors targets according to their size,
the bigger the target the darker the color used.
Show targets as Changes the method of rendering targets, Point • Point
provides the highest resolution, Sphere provides
• Sphere
a lower resolution but increases target size for
increased visibility.
Bottom colors Changes the color used for bottom structure. List of colors.
Background Changes the color used for the app background. List of colors.
View mode In GPS track mode the boat icon will remain • GPS track
in the same position and bottom structure and
• Scrolling image
target detail will move in true relation to your
vessel movements.
In Scrolling image mode the sonar pings at a
constant speed and displays a scrolling image
behind the boat icon.

Transducer tab
Settings Description Options
Transducer Allows selection of Sonar transducer. List of available
transducers.
Display depth as Determines the position from where depth • Below keel
readings are taken from.
• Below waterline
• Below transducer
Speed transducer Allows selection of Speed transducer. List of available
transducers.
Calibrate speed Allows you to enter an offset between actual Offset value.
measured speed and the current speed
displayed by your transducer.
Enable Enables and disables the selected transducer’s • On
temperature temperature sensor.
• Off
sensor
Calibrate temp Allows you to enter an offset between actual Offset value.
measured water temperature and the current
temperature displayed by your transducer.

Sounder tab
Settings Description Options
Sounder name Allows you to rename your sonar module. Onscreen keyboard.
Ping enable Enables and disables transducer ping. • On
• Off

Fishfinder app 193

 Settings Description Options
Ping rate limit Allows you to restrict the transducer’s maximum • 1 to 100
ping rate to suit current conditions.
Power mode Adjusts the transducer’s signal strength. In Auto • 1 to 100
the sonar module will automatically determine
the optimal power based on current depth,
speed and bottom signal. In Manual you can
adjust the power to the desired level.
Ping rate Hyper ping should be used at speeds of up to • Normal
40 knots in shallower waters (6 metres or less).
• Hyper
When the depth reaches 6 metres or above the
ping rate will automatically reduce to normal until
depth conditions are met.
Dual channel ping On sonar modules that offer simultaneous dual • Auto
mode channel operation, such as the CP570, The ping
• Independent pings
mode can be changed.
Auto the Fishfinder app will select the best mode • Simultaneous pings
chosen based on range settings.
Independent pings maximizes ping rate but may
introduce interference.
Simultaneous pings reduced ping rate and
reduces chance of interference.
Tune frequency Enables manual tuning of non-CHIRP frequency • -50% to +50%
channels.
AHRS stabilization The AHRS built in to the RealVision™ 3D • On
transducer is used to stabilize the sonar image
• Off
onscreen based on your vessel’s detected
movements.
Reverse When a RV100 transducer is hull/step mounted • Enabled
Port/Starboard the transducer can be installed with the cable
• Disabled
orientated towards either the bow or the stern of
the vessel. On installations where the transducer
cable is orientated towards the stern of the
vessel then the Reverse Port/Starboard control
must be enabled.
Interference Removes interference caused by other • Auto
rejection transducers on your vessel or from vessels
• Low
equipped with transducers close by.
• Medium
• High
• Off
2nd echo rejection The control helps to remove false target returns • Off
or false bottom that can be caused by signal
• Low
reflection.
• High
Reset sounder Resets the sonar module to factory default • Yes
settings.
• No
Reset trip In installations that include a speed transducer • Yes
connected via the sonar module a trip log is
• No
automatically recorded. Selecting this option
resets the sonar module’s trip log.

194
Page settings tab
Settings Description
Data Overlays Enables configuration of Data overlays, which overlay key
information from connected sensors onto the Chart, Radar,
Sonar and Camera apps.
Edit split ratio Enables you to customize the position of the partitions in
splitscreen app pages. For example, 50/50, 70/30 etc.

Fishfinder app 195

196
Chapter 11: Radar app

Chapter contents
• 11.1 Radar app overview on page 198
• 11.2 Radar feature comparison on page 200
• 11.3 Opening the Radar app on page 203
• 11.4 Set up on page 205
• 11.5 Radar modes on page 206
• 11.6 Range and bearing on page 208
• 11.7 AIS targets on page 210
• 11.8 Radar targets on page 214
• 11.9 Dangerous targets alarm on page 221
• 11.10 Guard zone alarms on page 222
• 11.11 Doppler Radar overview on page 223
• 11.12 Blank sectors on page 224
• 11.13 Radar sensitivity controls on page 225
• 11.14 Radar settings on page 226

Radar app 197

11.1 Radar app overview
The Radar app displays a visualization of the echoes received from a connected Radar scanner. The
Radar app is a navigation aid used to help enhance collision and situational awareness by enabling
target’s distance and speed to be tracked in relation to your vessel.
Up to 2 Radar scanners can be connected at the same time. However, only 1 Radar in a system
can be a Quantum™ Radar.
For each instance of the Radar app you can select which Radar scanner you want to use, the Radar
scanner selection will persist over a power cycle.
The Radar app can be displayed in both Fullscreen and splitscreen app pages. App pages may
consist of up to 2 instances of the Radar app.

Tracked Radar targets and AIS targets are displayed using target symbols.
The Radar app allows you to configure alarms which are triggered when a target or object conflicts
with the Dangerous targets or Guard Zone alarm settings.
The Range rings, bearing ring and VRM/EBLs can be used to identify a targets distance and heading
in relation to your vessel.

Radar app controls

Icon Description Action
Home icon Takes you to the Homescreen

Waypoint / MOB Place waypoint / activate Man Overboard (MOB) alarm

Pilot icon Opens and closes the Pilot Sidebar

198
 Icon Description Action
Menu icon Opens the App menu

Image adjustment Displays onscreen sensitivity / image adjustment

controls

Power Off Powers down the current Radar scanner

Power On Powers up the selected Radar scanner

Transmit Start Radar transmission

Range In Decreases the distance displayed onscreen (minimum

range: 1/16nm).

Range Out Increases the distance displayed onscreen (up to your

Radar scanner’s maximum range).

Radar app context menu

Context menus provide context sensitive menu options.
• Context menus are accessed in the Radar app by
selecting a location or target.
• The context menu provides Latitude, longitude, range
and bearing details for the selected location or object.
• The context menu provides quick access to relevant
settings or features.
• Select More options to display further options.

Radar app 199

Camera tracking
When connected to a compatible Pan and Tilt Thermal camera you can track targets or point your
camera at a specific target or area.
2 options are available for camera tracking:
• Point camera here — Points the camera at a specific point onscreen, the camera will remain
pointed at this area regardless of your own vessel’s course.
• Track with camera — Tracks a selected target regardless of your own vessel’s or target’s course.
Camera tracking options are available from the Context menu in the Chart and Radar apps: Context
menu > more options > Point camera here, or Context menu > more options > Track with camera.

Automatic tracking
You can use the Camera app settings to configure automatic tracking for AIS, Radar and MoB targets:
Camera app > Menu > Settings > Camera motion > AUTO TRACKING

11.2 Radar feature comparison

The range of features and settings that are available in the Radar app is dependent on the type of
connected Radar scanner.

Sensitivity controls
Features/settings Radar type
Gain • All
Color Gain • Magnum Open Array
• Quantum™ 2 Doppler
• Quantum™
• SuperHD™ Open Array
• HD Open Array
• HD Radome
Rain • All
Sea Clutter • All
FTC (Fast Time Constant) • Digital Radome
Power Boost • Magnum Open Array
• SuperHD™ Open Array
Antenna Boost • Magnum Open Array
• SuperHD™ Open Array

Gain Modes
Features/settings Radar type
Buoy • Magnum Open Array
• SuperHD™ Open Array
• HD Open Array
• HD Radome
Harbor • All
Coastal • All
Offshore • All

200
 Features/settings Radar type
Bird • Magnum Open Array
• SuperHD™ Open Array
• HD Open Array
• HD Radome
Weather • Quantum™ 2 Doppler
• Quantum™

Features
Features/settings Radar type
Doppler • Quantum™ 2 Doppler
Dual Range • Magnum Open Array
• SuperHD™ Open Array
• HD Open Array
• HD Radome
Interference Rejection • All
Interference Rejection Level • Quantum™ 2 Doppler
• Quantum™
• Digital Radome
Target Expansion • All
Expansion Level • Digital Radome
Guard Zones • All = 2
Guard Zone Sensitivity • All
Radar Targets • Magnum Open Array = 25
• Quantum™ 2 Doppler = 25
• Quantum™ = 10
• SuperHD™ Open Array = 25
• HD Open Array = 25
• HD Radome = 25
• Digital Radome = 10
Auto acquire (targets) • Magnum Open Array = 25
• Quantum™ 2 Doppler = 25
Tuning • Magnum Open Array
• SuperHD™ Open Array
• HD Open Array
• HD Radome
Transmit Frequency • Quantum™ 2 Doppler
• Quantum™

Radar app 201

 Features/settings Radar type
Scanner Rotation Speed • Magnum Open Array = 24 RPM / Auto (48 RPM)
• Quantum™ 2 Doppler = 24 RPM
• Quantum™ = 24 RPM
• SuperHD™ Open Array = 24 RPM / Auto (48 RPM)
• HD Open Array = 24 RPM / Auto (48 RPM)
• HD Radome = 24 RPM / Auto (48 RPM)
• Digital Radome = 24 RPM
Sea Clutter Curve • All
Parking Offset • Magnum Open Array
• SuperHD™ Open Array
• HD Open Array
Antenna Size selection • Magnum Open Array
• SuperHD™ Open Array = 4ft / 6ft
• HD Open Array = 4ft / 6ft
Timed Transmit • All
Bearing Alignment • All
MBS (Main Bang Suppression) Off • All
Tuning Preset • Magnum Open Array
• SuperHD™ Open Array
• HD Open Array
• HD Radome
• Digital Radome
STC (Sensitivity Time Control) Preset • Digital Radome
VRM/EBL (Variable Range Markers/Elec- • All
tronic Bearing Line)
Display Timing • SuperHD™ Open Array = 0–767m
• HD Open Array = 0–767m
• HD Radome = 0–767m
• Digital Radome = 0–153.6m
Max Range • Magnum Open Array = 4kW = 72nm, 6kW = 96nm
• Quantum™ 2 Doppler = 24nm
• Quantum™ = 24nm
• SuperHD™ Open Array = 72nm
• HD Open Array = 72nm
• HD Radome = 48nm
• Digital Radome = 48nm
Colors • Magnum Open Array = 256
• Quantum™ 2 Doppler = 256
• Quantum™ = 256
• SuperHD™ Open Array = 256
• HD Open Array = 256
• HD Radome = 256
• Digital Radome = 8
202
Compatible Radar scanners
• Magnum Open Array.
• Quantum™ 2 Doppler.
• Quantum™.
• SuperHD™ Open Array.
• HD Open Array.
• HD Radome.
• Digital Radome.

11.3 Opening the Radar app

The Radar app is opened by selecting a page icon from the Homescreen that includes the Radar app.
Pre-requisites:
1. Ensure your Radar scanner is compatible, check the latest details available on the Raymarine
website, if in doubt please contact an authorized Raymarine dealer for advice.
2. Ensure you have installed your Radar scanner in accordance with the documentation that was
supplied with your Radar.
The Radar app will open in 1 of 3 states:
Off/Not Connected

If the ‘Off/Not Connected’ message is displayed then:

• your Radar scanner may be powered down, or
• your MFD cannot establish a connection with your Radar scanner
Select On to power up your Radar. If the ‘Radar not found’ message is displayed then a connection
could not be established, ensure that network and power connections to your Radar and MFD are
correct and free from damage and then power cycle your system. If the Radar scanner can still not be
found refer to your Radar’s installation documentation for further troubleshooting information.
Off

If the ‘Off’ message is displayed then your Wi-Fi connected Radar scanner is paired but powered off,
select On to power up your Radar

Radar app 203

Standby (Not transmitting)

If the ‘Standby’ message is displayed then select Transmit to begin transmitting.

Transmitting

If your Radar scanner is connected, powered up and transmitting then the Radar image is displayed
and echoes/targets are displayed onscreen.

Putting the radar into standby

With your selected radar displayed onscreen:
1. Select Transmit from the main menu.
The radar scanner will stop transmitting and is put into standby mode.

Powering down your radar scanner

With your radar scanner in standby mode:
1. Select the Off icon.
2. Select Yes to confirm power down.

The radar scanner will still consume a small amount of power whilst it is powered off, this is to
ensure the radar can be powered back up quickly.

204
11.4 Set up
Selecting a Radar scanner
On systems with 2 Radar scanners, you can select which Radar scanner is used in each instance of
the Radar app.
1. Select the Settings icon from the Radar app menu.

2. Select the Scanner: box on the Transmission tab.

A list of available Radar scanners is displayed.
3. Select the Radar scanner that you want to associate with the current instance of the Radar app.
4. Close the Settings page.
The current instance of the Radar app will change to display the selected Radar scanner. Radar
scanner selection shall persist over a power cycle.
Alternatively, with the Radar powered off or in Standby, you can select switch Radar scanner by
selecting Change scanner.

Dual range
HD and SuperHD Radar scanners are capable of Dual range. Dual range enables you to view 2
ranges (i.e. Short range and Long range) simultaneously.
To view both ranges you will need to configure a splitscreen, dual Radar, app page that displays the
same Radar scanner in each window. You can then enable Dual Range mode and set the Channel
for each window from the Transmission tab: Menu > Settings > Transmission.

Radar app 205

Dual range limitations:
• Dual range cannot be enabled when Radar targets are being tracked (clear the target list and
try again).
• When Dual range is enabled Radar target tracking is disabled.
• When Dual range is enabled Automatic Radar target acquisition is disabled.
• In Dual range the maximum rotation speed is 24rpm.
• When using a SuperHD Radar Antenna boost and Power boost controls are only applied to the
Long range channel.Open Array Radar scanners running version 1.xx or 2.xx software will have
the Short range channel’s maximum range restricted to 3 nm.
• When Dual range is enabled on a Radar scanner running version 1.xx or 2.xx software the
Expansion control will be disabled.

Timed Radar transmission

To help conserve power you can configure your Radar to only transmit periodically.
From the Radar menu:
1. Select the Settings icon.
The settings page is displayed.
2. Switch on Time Transmit: using the toggle switch.
3. Select Standby: and choose a time interval.
4. Select Transmit: and choose the number of rotations you want the Radar to perform.
The Radar will transmit for the specified number of rotations and then will switch to Standby for the
specified time interval, the sequence will repeat until Timed Transmit is switched off.
The Timed transmit will revert to Off after a power cycle.

Setting open array antenna size

When connected to an Open Array Radar Scanner you can configure the Antenna size. Setting the
antenna size can help when setting a Parking offset.
From the Radar app:
1. Select Menu > Settings > Transmission.
2. Select the correct size for your Radar’s antenna from the Antenna size option.

Bearing alignment
The Radar bearing alignment ensures that Radar objects appear at the correct bearing relative to
your vessel’s bow. You should check the bearing alignment for any new installation.
Checking alignment
Align the bow with a stationary object between 0.25 and 2 NM away.
Reduce the gain to make the target as small as possible on the screen.
Note the position of the object on the Radar screen. If the target is not under the ship’s heading
marker (SHM), then bearing alignment adjustment is required.
Adjusting alignment
Adjust the Bearing alignment setting until the target object appears under the SHM.
Bearing alignment setting can be accessed from the Installation tab: Menu > Installation > Bearing
alignment.
Note: Heading (HDG) is displayed in the Radar application. Please be aware that bearing alignment
refers to the relative bearing of targets to the vessel's bow using visual checks / traditional means.

11.5 Radar modes

The Radar app provides preset modes that can be used to quickly achieve the best picture
depending on your current situation. Only Radar modes supported by your Radar scanner are shown.
To change Radar mode select the required mode from the Radar app menu.

206
 HARBOR
Harbor mode takes into account land clutter that is typically
encountered in a Harbor, so that smaller targets are still
visible. This mode is useful when navigating in a Harbor.
Radar scanners: All.

BUOY
Buoy mode enhances the detection of smaller targets such as
mooring buoys, and is useful at ranges up to 3/4nm.
Radar scanners: SuperHD™ Open Array, HD Open Array and
HD Radome.

COASTAL
Coastal mode takes into account slightly higher levels of Sea
clutter that are encountered out of Harbor areas. This mode is
useful when in open water but keeping to coastal areas.
Radar scanners: All.

OFFSHORE
Offshore mode takes into account high levels of Sea clutter
so that targets are still visible, useful when navigating in open
water away from the coast.
Radar scanners: All.

BIRD
Bird mode optimizes the display to help identify flocks of birds,
useful when trying to locate a fishing area.
Radar scanners: SuperHD™ Open Array, HD Open Array and
HD Radome.

WEATHER
Weather mode optimizes the display to help identify
precipitation, useful for helping determine weather fronts.
Radar scanners: Quantum™ and Quantum™ 2 Doppler.

Radar app 207

11.6 Range and bearing
The Radar app helps you identify a target’s range (distance) and bearing from your vessel.

1. SHM (Ships heading marker).

2. COG/SOG line (Points in the direction of travel (COG), with the length of the vector providing an
indication of speed (SOG)).
3. Range rings.
4. Vessel position.
5. Range and bearing indicator (The White ring identifies the distance from your vessel to the top
edge of the screen. Bearing indicators are also provided around the ring).
6. North indicator (Always points North).
7. Current displayed Range and Ring separation distance (Range: identifies the distance from your
vessel to the top edge of the screen. Rings: identifies the distance between each Range Ring).
The displayed range can be adjusted at anytime using the Range controls.
Range rings can be switched off from the Presentation tab: Menu > Settings > Presentation >
Range rings:
You can also choose whether to display a numerical range indicator against each ring using the
Range ring labels: option.

VRM (Variable Range Marker) / EBL (Electronic Bearing Line)

VRM/EBL is used to determine a targets range and bearing from your vessel, or from another target.
2 VRM/EBLs are available which are enabled from the context menu.
Context menu > More options > VRM/EBL 1 or Context menu > More options > VRM/EBL 2

208
1. Centered VRM/EBLYou can use a ‘Centered’ (on your vessel) VRM/EBL to determine the range
and bearing of targets in relation to your vessel.
2. Floating VRM/EBLYou can use a ‘Floating’ VRM/EBL to determine the range and bearing
between 2 targets.

Editing a VRM-EBL
Once a VRM/EBL has been placed you can adjust its size and position.

1. Select Edit VRM/EBL from the context menu.

2. To adjust the VRM/EBL select the desired target or drag the labelled circle to the target.
3. To create a floating VRM/EBL Drag the center circle to the desired target.

Radar app 209

11.7 AIS targets
With compatible AIS hardware connected to your MFD, AIS targets can be automatically displayed in
the Chart app and Radar app.
Tracked AIS targets are identified onscreen using target symbols.

Up to 100 AIS targets can be tracked simultaneously. If more than 100 targets exist, within your
range, the 100 targets nearest to your vessel will be displayed.
Target vectors and information can be displayed for each target by selecting the relevant option from
the AIS target context menu. The AIS target context menu is accessed by selecting the AIS target.
You can also select the type of AIS targets that should be displayed, i.e.: All, Dangerous, Buddies
and hide static targets from the AIS Settings tab.

AIS target list

AIS targets appear in the AIS target list.
The AIS target list can be accessed by selecting the AIS tab from the Targets menu: Menu >
Targets > AIS.

210
The list identifies: Target name and Range and Bearing (from your vessel). Where relevant, CPA
(Closest point of approach) and TCPA (Time to Closest Point of Approach) values are also shown.
Selecting a target from the list will highlight the selected target in the LiveView pane on the right of
the screen and display Pop-over options. Pop-over options enable you to View full target data or
add an AIS target a buddy by selecting Add as buddy.
AIS icons used for targets marked as buddies will be filled yellow. You can also rename buddy
targets or remove buddies using the Pop-over options.

AIS target symbols

By default, standard AIS symbols are used to identify AIS targets.
You can enable enhanced AIS target symbols from the Advanced Settings menu: (Menu > Settings
> Advanced > Enhanced AIS targets). With enhanced mode enabled, the enhanced symbols are
used in place of the standard vessel symbols.

Standard AIS symbols — type

Vessel SART (Search and Rescue
Transponder)

Land-based station ATON

Radar app 211

 SAR (Search and Virtual ATON
Rescue)

* Blue Force vessel * Blue Force SAR

Note: * Requires STEDS-AIS hardware.

Vessels equipped with STEDS-AIS hardware appear as Blue Force targets if:
• your MFD has a valid passphrase.
• you have received a SITREP from them within the last 6 minutes.
• their AIS mode is not set to Receive only.
If the above conditions are not met then the target icon will revert to using the standard, Green
AIS target icon.

Enhanced AIS symbols — type

Sailing Vessel Commercial

High speed vessel Cargo vessel

/ Wing In Ground
vessel

Passenger vessel Other

Enhanced AIS symbols are scaled or outlined according to the reported size of the vessel, as shown
below:

212
 Relative length (Grey
outline)

AIS symbol status

Lost (No border, Uncertain (Dashed outline)
crossed through)

Buddy (Yellow fill) Dangerous and Uncertain

(Dashed outline and Flashes
Red)

Dangerous (Flashes ATON off position (Red

Red) border)

AIS settings
When the AIS layer is enabled in the Chart app you can configure AIS settings from the Targets
menu: Menu > Targets > AIS settings.
Setting Description Options
Show AIS targets in Chart / Enables and disables AIS • On
Show AIS targets in Radar targets in the Chart and Radar
• Off
apps.
Enhanced AIS targets Enables and disables the • On
display of enhanced AIS target
• Off
icons.
Show these AIS types Determines the types of AIS • All
target displayed in the Chart
• Dangerous
and Radar apps.
• Buddies

Radar app 213

 Setting Description Options
Hide static targets When enabled, an AIS target • On
travelling under 2 knots will be
• Off
hidden, unless it is or becomes
dangerous.
Silent mode When enabled, your vessel’s • On
AIS device will not transmit your
• Off
position or details.

11.8 Radar targets

With a compatible Radar scanner connected to your MFD, radar targets can be tracked in the Chart
app and Radar app. Depending on your Radar scanner, radar targets can be acquired manually or
automatically, based on your configured Guard zones.
Tracked radar targets are identified onscreen using target symbols.

Multiple radar targets can be tracked simultaneously.

Target vectors and information can be displayed for each target.
Radar target options are available from the Radar target context menu. The Radar target context
menu provides options for you to Cancel target, Show CPA graphic or display Target info onscreen
by selecting the relevant option. The Radar context menu is accessed by selecting the radar target.

Radar target acquisition data source requirements

Radar target acquisition requires the following data sources to be available on your system (e.g.
connected to your multifunction display, via SeaTalkng ® or NMEA 0183).
Data type Example data source
COG (Course Over Ground) GPS or GNSS receiver (MFD internal receiver or
external receiver).
SOG (Speed Over Ground) GPS or GNSS receiver (MFD internal receiver or
external receiver).
HDG / HDT (True Heading) Compass or Autopilot sensor providing
Fastheading data (e.g. Evolution EV-1 / EV-2).

214
Radar target symbols
Symbol Status Description
Acquiring target — Manual Thin dashed Green circle

Acquiring target — Auto Thick dashed Red circle, flashes until

acknowledged

Auto-acquired target — Red circle, flashes until acknowledged

Unacknowledged

Acquired target Green circle with Target ID

Dangerous target Red circle with Target ID, flashes until

acknowledged

Lost target (Target not detected for 4 Gray circle with Red cross through
Radar scans)

Once acquired the target’s COG (Course Over Ground) and SOG (Speed Over Ground) can be
displayed below the target ID.
The Target info is colored Blue if COG and SOG values are True or Orange if values are Relative.
Target info will turn Red if the target becomes dangerous.

Radar app 215

Acquiring a target manually
To acquire a Radar target manually using MARPA (Mini Automatic Radar Plotting Aid) follow the
steps below.
With the Radar app, or Chart app with Radar overlay enabled:
1. Select the target.
The context menu is displayed.
2. Select Acquire target.
Once acquired the target will be tracked.

Automatic target acquisition

With a compatible Radar scanner connected, Radar targets can be acquired automatically.

Once configured, targets which enter or appear in your chosen Guard Zone(s) will be automatically
acquired.
Note:
• Automatic target acquisition cannot be enabled at the same time as Timed Transmit or Dual
Range.
• Automatic target acquisition will be temporarily paused if the Radar display range is 12nm or
greater.

Setting up automatic target acquisition

Follow the steps below to configure automatic target acquisition.

216
1. Select the Auto Acquisition tab from the Target menu: (Menu > Targets > Auto Acquisition).
2. Enable Automatic Target Acquisition by selecting the Automatically acquire Radar returns as
targets toggle switch.
3. Select the Acquire within box and choose Guard zone 1, Guard zone 2 or Zones 1 & 2 as required.
4. To enable onscreen pop-up notifications of new targets which have been acquired automatically,
select the Warn me about new targets toggle switch.
When multiple targets are acquired simultaneously, an Info dialog is displayed.
5. You can also adjust the size and position of the Guard zones directly from the Auto Acquisition
page by selecting Adjust zone 1 or Adjust zone 2.

Radar target list

Tracked Radar targets appear in the Radar target list.
The AIS target list can be accessed by selecting the Radar tab from the Targets menu: Menu >
Targets > Radar.

Radar app 217

The list identifies: Target number and Range and Bearing (from your vessel). Where relevant, CPA
(Closest point of approach) and TCPA (Time to Closest Point of Approach) values are also shown.
Selecting a target from the list will highlight the selected target in the LiveView pane on the right of
the screen and display Pop-over options. Pop-over options enable you to Cancel target, Show CPA
graphic or Display Target info by selecting the relevant option.
The Radar target list can be Sorted By: target Number or its Range from your vessel, by selecting
the Sorted By: option at the bottom of the LiveView.
Radar targets can also be cancelled individually by selecting the ‘X’ next to the target’s details in the
list, or you can cancel all targets by selecting Cancel all targets.

Target settings
Target vectors, target history and object trail graphics can be displayed onscreen to improve
situational and collision awareness.
Target settings can be accessed from the Target Settings tab: Menu > Targets > Target settings.
Reference mode
Target settings can be configured to either True or Relative mode. In True mode, Trails, Vectors
and History are colored Blue and are shown ground referenced (i.e. the object or target’s actual
Course Over Ground (COG)). In Relative mode, Trails, Vectors and History are colored Orange and
are shown relative to your vessel’s movement.
To switch the target reference mode, select the REFERENCE MODE setting. Alternatively, you
can switch reference mode by selecting the onscreen Image Adjustment icon and then selecting
either True or Relative.

True mode Relative mode

218
The Target Settings reference mode is independent of your vessel’s motion mode.

Target vectors
Target vectors show the predicted future course of a target.
Target vectors for acquired Radar targets are always shown. By default, target vectors are also
shown for all AIS targets. You can switch the Show AIS vectors to Manual, enabling you to switch
vectors for AIS targets On or Off for each target individually, via the target context menu.
The length of the Vector line signifies where the target will be after the time specified in Vector
period has passed. The Vector period can be adjusted by selecting the current Vector period value
and choosing a time from the Pop-over options.

Target history
Target history shows a target’s previous positions.
Target history can be enabled or disabled using the Show history toggle switch.
Target history is plotted by displaying a target symbol at the vessel’s position each time the value
specified in the Interval setting has passed. The Interval is automatically calculated based on
the target vector’s Vector period, divided by 4.

Radar app 219

Trails
Trails plot the historical movements of objects (Radar returns) for the time specified in the Trails
period setting.
Trails are subject to the selected “Reference Mode” (i.e. True, to show actual motion over “ground”
(COG), or Relative, to show motion relative to your vessel).
Trails can be enabled and disabled using the Show trails toggle switch.
Historical object position is shown as a colored trail behind the object.

Onscreen target settings

Target settings and information are also available using the onscreen Image adjustment icon.

The following target settings and information is available:

• REFERENCE MODE — Choose whether Radar targets and objects are displayed in True or
Relative reference mode.
• Vector period and Trail interval — Displays currently selected values.
• Clear trails — Clears and resets the trails displayed onscreen.

Clearing / resetting trails

In an area with multiple target returns, trails can clutter the Radar image, reducing its ability to
provide a target’s path, under these circumstances you can remove all existing trails using the
onscreen Clear trails option.
1. Select the onscreen Image adjustment icon.
2. Select Clear trails.

220
Target context menu
A target context menu is available that provides quick access to useful target settings.
To open the Radar target context menu, select a target onscreen.
The Radar context menu provides CPA, TCPA, COG and SOG data
for the selected target.
The context menu also provides the following target menu options:
• Cancel target — The Radar target will no longer be tracked.
• Show CPA — Determines whether CPA graphics are shown.The
default option is Auto which displays CPA graphics for the target
if it becomes dangerous. You can also set CPA graphics to
On, which displays CPA graphics, if there is an intersect point
between your vessel’s current course and the target’s. When
set to Off no CPA graphics will be displayed for the target.
• Target info — Determines whether the target’s SOG and COG
information is displayed under the target onscreen.

11.9 Dangerous targets alarm

You can use the Dangerous targets alarm to notify you if a Radar or AIS target will reach a specified
distance from your vessel within a specified time.

To set up the Dangerous target alarm, first adjust the Safe distance to the desired value and then
select a Time to reach safe distance. The alarm will be triggered if a tracked target will reach the
specified Safe distance from your vessel within the time period selected.
You can choose whether you want the Dangerous target alarm to trigger for Radar and / or AIS
targets.
You can display a Safe distance ring around your vessel in the Radar app using the Show safe
distance control.

Radar app 221

11.10 Guard zone alarms
Guard zones alert you if a Radar return is detected within the Guard zone area.
2 Guard zones can be configured for each connected Radar scanner.
The Guard zones can be configured from the Alarms menu: Menu > Alarms > Guard zone 1 or
Menu > Alarms > Guard zone 2

A Guard zone can be configured as a sector or as a circle around your vessel.

Selecting Adjust Zone allows you to configure the size of the Guard Zone.

Adjust the guard zone’s size by dragging the inner and outer perimeter end points (circles) to the
desired locations.
Once configure select Back.
If required, you can also adjust the Guard zone sensitivity. Sensitivity determines the size at which
objects trigger the alarm.

222
11.11 Doppler Radar overview
Doppler Radar technology makes it easier to track moving targets with significant ground speed
exceeding 3 knots.
Typically Doppler Radar works best with objects that are moving directly towards or away from the
vessel. Doppler Radar can highlight only those targets that are moving relative to the vessel (e.g.
other boats, but not land or buoys, for example).
Doppler Radar works by transmitting a microwave signal which is then reflected off a desired moving
target at a distance. By analyzing how the object's motion has altered the frequency of the returned
signal, the Doppler Radar can interpret the variation to provide highly accurate measurements of a
target's direction of travel, relative to the Radar scanner.
Doppler Radar technology is particularly beneficial in a marine environment, where poor weather
conditions and visibility can make target tracking difficult. Additionally, it is not always easy to
interpret the information displayed by traditional Radar technology. With the integration of Doppler
information, the process of matching on-screen radar returns with real-world objects becomes
a much simpler task.

Doppler mode
When a compatible Radar is connected Doppler mode is available.

Doppler mode — Enabling and disabling

Doppler mode is enabled from the Main menu: Menu > Doppler.
With Doppler mode enabled the color palette will change to the default Doppler palette, all
approaching targets will be colored Red and all targets moving away from you will be colored Green.
Doppler mode is suspended at ranges of 12 nm and greater. The Radar color palette will remain
the same but targets will not be highlighted.

Doppler mode — Color palettes

Doppler has unique color palettes which help to ensure the Red and Green Doppler targets stand
out from the Radar image. When Doppler is enabled the standard color palette setting will show only
the unique Doppler color palettes: Doppler grey, Doppler blue and Doppler yellow.
The Color palettes can be selected from the Presentation tab: Menu > Settings > Presentation.

Radar app 223

Doppler data source requirements
Use of the Doppler Radar features requires the following data sources to be available on your system
(e.g. connected to your multifunction display, via SeaTalkng ® or NMEA 0183).

Required data sources

Data type Example data source
COG (Course Over Ground) GPS or GNSS receiver (MFD internal receiver or
external receiver).
SOG (Speed Over Ground) GPS or GNSS receiver (MFD internal receiver or
external receiver).

Recommended data source

Data type Example data source
HDG / HDT (True Heading) Compass or Autopilot sensor providing
Fastheading data (e.g. Evolution EV-1 / EV-2).

Note:
A Heading data source is not essential for Doppler operation. However it will improve the
performance of Doppler mode at slower speeds (< 15 knots), when tide set and leeway are present.

11.12 Blank sectors

Blank sectors can be manually set to hide sections of your radar display. This is useful for vessels
that experience false radar readings from onboard structures or equipment.
Note:
Sector blanking is only compatible with Magnum Open Array radar scanners.
Blank sectors can be enabled from the Radar app settings: Radar app > Settings menu > Installation
Two blank sectors can be enabled. You can edit the minimum and maximum limits of each blank
sector; this will determine how much of the radar display is hidden.

Blank sectors can be enabled / disabled on the radar overlay in the Chart app: Chart app > Settings
menu > Radar settings
For more information refer to Radar settings

224
11.13 Radar sensitivity controls
Optimum performance is usually achieved using the default settings. You can adjust the image using
the Sensitivity controls to improve the displayed image.
Sensitivity settings can be accessed using the onscreen Image adjustment
icon, or the Adjust sensitivity menu option: Menu > Adjust sensitivity.

The Sensitivity controls available are dependant upon the Radar scanner in use.
Control Name Description
‘G’ Gain The control determines the signal strength at which
target returns are shown onscreen.
The Gain control can be set to Auto or Manual.
A higher value produces more target returns and
noise onscreen.

‘R’ Rain Precipitation appears on the Radar screen as lots

of small echoes which continuously change size,
intensity and position. The Rain control suppresses
these echoes making it easier to identify real object.
The higher the Rain control is set the more echoes
will be suppressed.

Radar app 225

 Control Name Description
‘S’ Sea Radar echoes from waves can clutter the Radar
screen. The Sea control suppresses these echoes
(for up to 5 nm depending on conditions) making it
easier to identify real objects.
The higher the Sea control is set the more echoes
will be suppressed.

‘CG’ Color Gain The control sets the lower limit for the color used for
the strongest target returns. All target returns above
this value are displayed in the strongest color. Those
with a weaker value are divided equally between
the remaining colors.
The control can be set to Auto or Manual.

All to Auto Sets all Sensitivity settings to Auto with 0% offset.

11.14 Radar settings

The Settings menu provides access to the Radar app’s features and functions. The options available
in the Settings menu are dependent on the type of Radar scanner connected.

Transmission tab
Settings Description Options
Scanner Allows you to select the Radar scanner that you List of available Radar
want to use. scanners.
Dual range Enables and Disables dual range. • On
• Off
Channel Determines which channel is shown in the Radar • Channel 1
app.
• Channel 2
Antenna size Open Array Radar antenna size selection. • 4ft
selection
• 6ft
Timed transmit Enables and disables Timed transmit. • On
Timed transmit configures your Radar to transmit
• Off
at periodic intervals to conserve power.
Standby Determines the length of time the Radar is in • 3 min
Standby for in Time transmit mode.
• 5 min
• 10 min
• 15 min
Transmit Determines the amount of scans the Radar will • 10 scans
perform when transmitting in Time transmit
• 20 scans
mode..
• 30 scans

226
View & Motion tab
Settings Description Options
Orientation Head-up • Head-up
The top of the screen always points towards your
• North-up
vessel’s current heading and as your heading
changes the Radar image rotates accordingly. • Course-up
In Head-up the motion mode is fixed to Relative
motion.
North-up
The top of the screen always points towards
north and as your vessel’s heading changes the
SHM rotates accordingly.
Course-up
In Course-up the top of the screen always points
towards your destination and as your heading
changes the SHM rotates accordingly.
Motion mode Relative motion • Relative motion
The position of your vessel remains fixed
• True motion
onscreen and the Radar image moves relative to
your position.
In Relative motion mode you can adjust your
vessel’s onscreen position using the Boat
position setting.
True motion
Stationary Radar targets remain fixed and moving
targets, including your vessel, move in true
perspective to each other and to landmass. As
your vessel’s position reaches the edge of the
screen, the image is redrawn to reveal the area
ahead.
In True motion mode the boat position is fixed
to Full offset.
Boat position The boat position determines the position of • Center
your vessel onscreen. You can adjust the Boat
• Partial offset
position to provide a greater distance ahead of
your vessel. • Full offset
Your boat position can only be changed in
Relative motion mode.

Presentation tab
Settings Description Options
Range rings Enables and disables Range rings in the Radar • On
app.
• Off
Range ring labels Enables and disables Range ring distance labels • On
in the Radar app.
• Off
Color palette Allows selection of the color palette. List of color palettes.

Preferences tab
Settings Description Options
VRM/EBL Determines the reference point used for • True/Mag
reference VRM/EBLs.
• Relative
Interference Suppresses interference from other close by • On
rejection Radar scanners.
• Off

Radar app 227

 Settings Description Options
Interference Determines the level of suppression used. Quantum™
rejection level Only available when Interference rejection is
enabled. • Level 1 to Level 5
Non-HD Digital
Radomes
• Normal
• High
Target expansion When enabled, increases the Radar pulse length • On
to provide larger target returns.
• Off
Expansion level Determines the level of expansion used. • Low
Only available when Target expansion is
• High
enabled.
Tune adjust Allows you to adjust the Radar scanners receiver • Auto
for maximum target returns.
• Manual (0% to 100%)
It is recommended that the Radar scanner is
allowed to warm up for at least 10 minutes prior
to making adjustments.
Radar speed Allows you to select the appropriate rotation • 24 RPM
speed for your range.
• Auto (24 / 48 RPM)
The Auto option provides an increased refresh
rate at Radar ranges up to 3 nm.
Transmit frequency Changing the Transmit frequency can reduce • Low
interference on the Radar image.
• Normal
• High

Installation tab
Under normal circumstances it should not be necessary to adjust Installation settings.
Settings Description Options
Bearing alignment Enables you to align the Radar image correctly • 179.5° Port to 180°
in relation to your vessel’s bow. Starboard
Parking offset Allows you to select the “parked” position of your • 0° to 359°
Open Array’s antenna.
This feature is only available when the Open
Array radar scanner is in Standby.
Blank sector 1 Allows you to hide a specific section of the radar • 0° to 359°
display, creating a “blank” sector onscreen that
• 0° to 10° (default)
shows no radar signal returns.
Note:
Sector blanking is only compatible with
Magnum Open Array radars and Lighthouse
software version 3.9 or later.

Blank sector 2 Allows you to hide an additional section of the • 0° to 359°

radar display, creating a “blank” sector onscreen
• 180° to 190° (default)
that shows no radar signal returns.
Note:
Sector blanking is only compatible with
Magnum Open Array radars and Lighthouse
software version 3.9 or later.

228
 Settings Description Options
Main Bang MBS eliminates saturation immediately around • Off
Suppression (MBS) your vessel. When adjusting Zero range it is
• On
recommended that MBS is set to Off.
Sea clutter curve Adjusts the Radar scanner’s sensitivity to Sea • 1 to 8
clutter.

Advanced tab
Under normal circumstances it should not be necessary to adjust Advanced settings.
Settings Description Options
Tune preset Radar tuning is controlled either automatically or • 0 to 255
manually, using the Tune adjust setting. Tune
preset controls the range available to the Tune
adjust control.
STC preset The Sensitivity Time Control (STC) can be used • 0% to 100%
to equalize targets across the image. If you find
targets are brighter or dimmer nearer the center
of the image adjust the STC preset until the
desired result is achieved.
Zero range Zero range (Display timing) is used to configure • 0 to 153m / 502ft
the zero range of the Radar scanner so that
objects appear at the correct distance.
Reset Resets Installation and advanced settings to • Yes
factory defaults.
• No

Page settings tab

Settings Description
Data Overlays Enables configuration of Data overlays
Edit split ratio Enables you to customize the position of the partitions in
splitscreen app pages.

Radar app 229

230
Chapter 12: Dashboard app

Chapter contents
• 12.1 Dashboard app overview on page 232
• 12.2 Default data pages on page 233
• 12.3 Customizing existing Data pages on page 234
• 12.4 Dashboard settings menu on page 238
• 12.5 Navigation and Sailing dials on page 241

Dashboard app 231

12.1 Dashboard app overview
The Dashboard app enables you to view system data. System data may be generated by your MFD
or by devices connected to your MFD via SeaTalkng ® / NMEA 2000 and SeaTalkhs ™. The Dashboard
app can also be configured to provide control of your compatible Digital Switching devices.
Note: For data to be available in the Dashboard app it must be transmitted to your MFD from
compatible hardware using supported protocols and messages.

The Dashboard app can be displayed in Fullscreen and half screen portrait app pages.
For each instance of the Dashboard app you can select which Data pages you want to use, the Data
page selection will persist over a power cycle.

The Dashboard app is pre-configured with a number of customizable data pages.

Dashboard app controls

Icon Description Function
Home icon Takes you to the Homescreen.

Waypoint / MOB Place waypoint / activate Man overboard (MOB)

alarm.

Pilot icon Opens and closes the Pilot Sidebar

Menu icon Opens the app menu.

232
 Icon Description Function
Left arrow Displays the previous data page.

Right arrow Displays the next data page.

Switching data page

1. Use the Left arrow and Right arrow buttons, located at the bottom of the screen, to cycle through
the available data pages.
2. Alternatively, you can select a specific data page from the Dashboard app menu.

Selecting Data pages to display

For each instance of the Dashboard app you can select which Data pages you want to be able to view.
1. Select the Pages tab: Menu > Settings > Pages.
2. Select the relevant page from the list.
3. Select Hide page from the pop-over options.

The selected page will no longer be available in the current instance of the Dashboard app.
Selecting Show page for a hidden page will include the page in the app instance again.

12.2 Default data pages

The Dashboard app comes with a selection of default data pages:
• Engines
• Sailing (only shown if boating activity is set to Sailing in startup wizard)
• Race start (only shown if boating activity is set to Sailing in startup wizard)
• Navigation
• Rolling road with data
• Tanks
• Bidata
• Single data
• Fuel

Dashboard app 233

The displayed data items on each of these pages can be customized.

12.3 Customizing existing Data pages

The data items displayed on each page can be changed.
1. Select and hold on the relevant Data item.
2. Select Edit from the Data item pop-over menu.
3. Select the new Data item that you want to display.
Alternatively you can select Customize page from the app menu: Menu > Customize page.

Available data items

The data items listed below can be added to a Dashboard data page or to an app’s Data overlay.
Data type Data item Notes
Battery • Temperature • Data items available
for up to 5 batteries.
• Voltage
• Current
Boat • Mast rotation
• Live Well
• Black Water
• Gray Water
• Fresh Water
• Roll
• ROT (Rate Of Turn)
Depth • Maximum Depth
• Minimum Depth
• Depth

234
 Data type Data item Notes
Distance • Distance to line • Distance to line,
Distance to tack and
• Distance to tack
Line bias are only
• Trip season available with sailing
• Trip month vessels.

• Trip day
• Trip manual
• Ground Trip 4
• Ground Trip 3
• Ground Trip 2
• Ground Trip 1
• Ground Log
• Trip
• Log
• Line bias
Engine • ECO Mode • Data items available
for up to 5 engines.
• Transmission Oil Temperature
• Transmission Oil Pressure
• Fuel Pressure
• Average Fuel Rate
• Instantaneous Fuel Economy
• Engine Fuel Rate
• Engine Tilt
• Engine Hours
• Engine Load
• Coolant Temperature
• Coolant Pressure
• Alternator
• Oil Pressure
• Oil Temperature
• Boost Pressure
• RPM (Revolutions Per Minute)
• RPM Engine Hours
Fuel For tanks 1 to 5: • Data items available
for up to 5 fuel tanks.
• Fuel Economy
• An ‘All tanks’ category
• Fuel Rate (Total) is also available which
• TTE (Time To Empty) combines data from
all fuel tanks.
• DTE (Distance To Empty)
• Est. Fuel Level
• Season Fuel
• Total Trip Fuel
• Trip Fuel

Dashboard app 235

 Data type Data item Notes
• Est. Fuel
• Fuel Level
For All tanks:
• Engine economy total
• Fuel flow total
• Time to empty
• Distance to empty
• Fuel used (season)
• Fuel used (trip)
• Est. fuel remaining
Environment • Humidity
• Pressure
• Drift from position
• Apparent Wind Chill
• True Wind Chill
• Dew Point
• Maximum Air Temperature
• Minimum Air Temperature
• Air Temperature
• Maximum Water temperature
• Minimum Water Temperature
• Water Temperature
• Set
• Drift
• Set & Drift
GPS • COG (Course Over Ground )
• Average SOG
• Maximum SOG
• SOG (Speed Over Ground)
• Position
• COG & SOG
Heading • Steer to layline • Steer to layline is only
available with sailing
• Locked Heading Error
vessels
• Track Heading
• Locked Heading
• Heading
• Locked Heading & Locked Heading Error
• Heading & STW (Speed Through Water)

236
 Data type Data item Notes
Navigation • BOTW (Bearing Origin To Waypoint)
• XTE (Cross Track Error)
• Next waypoint name
• Original target distance
• Next turn angle
• Route ETA (Estimated Time of Arrival)
• Route TTG (Time To Go)
• Waypoint
• Waypoint TTG
• Target position
• VMG (Velocity Made Good) to Waypoint
• Waypoint ETA (Estimated Time of Arrival)
• DMG (Distance Made Good)
• CMG (Course Made Good)
• DTW (Distance To Waypoint)
• XTE (Cross Track Error)
• BTW (Bearing To Waypoint)
• Compass
• CMG & VMG to Waypoint (Course Made
Good & Velocity Made Good)
• CMG & DMG (Course Made Good &
Distance Made Good)
• BTW & DTW (Bearing To Waypoint and
Distance To Waypoint)
Speed • Polar performance • Polar performance
is only available with
• VMG to Wind
sailing vessels
• Average STW (Speed Through Water)
• Maximum STW (Speed Through Water)
• STW (Speed Through Water)
Time • Sunset Time • Race timer, Time to
burn, Time to tack
• Sunrise Time
are only available with
• UTC Date sailing vessels
• UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) Time • Race timer can be
used to start, stop and
• Race Timer
edit the countdown
• Local Time timer
• Local Date
• Time to burn
• Time to tack
Wind • Cardinal Wind
• Beaufort
• GWD (Ground Wind Direction)
• GWS (Ground Wind Speed)

Dashboard app 237

 Data type Data item Notes
• TWD (True Wind Direction)
• Minimum TWA (True Wind Angle)
• Maximum TWA (True Wind Angle)
• TWA (CH) (Close Hauled)
• TWA (True Wind Angle)
• Maximum TWS (True Wind Speed)
• Minimum TWS (True Wind Speed)
• TWS (True Wind Speed)
• Minimum AWA (Apparent Wind Angle)
• Maximum AWA (Apparent Wind Angle)
• AWA (CH) (Apparent Wind Angle, Close
Hauled)
• AWA (Apparent Wind Angle)
• Minimum AWS (Apparent Wind Speed)
• Maximum AWS (Apparent Wind Speed)
• AWS (Apparent Wind Speed)
• GWS & GWD (Ground Wind Speed &
(Ground Wind Direction)
• AWA & VMG to Wind (Apparent Wind
Angle & Velocity Made Good)
• AWA (CH) & AWS (Apparent Wind Angle,
Close Hauled) & (Apparent Wind Speed)
• AWA & AWS (Apparent Wind Angle, Close
Hauled) & (Apparent Wind Speed)
• TWA & VMG to Wind (True Wind Angle &
Velocity Made Good)
• TWA (CH) & TWS (True Wind Angle (Close
Hauled) & True Wind Speed)
• TWA & TWS (True Wind Angle & True
Wind Speed)
• GWD & Beaufort (Ground Wind Direction)

12.4 Dashboard settings menu

Pages tab
The Pages tab provides a list of all available pages.

238
 Settings Description Options
Page list Pop-over options allow you to customize the • Hide/Show page
Dashboard app.
• Move up
You can rearrange pages, add new pages,
rename existing pages or reset pages to default • Move down
settings.
• Add page
Note: * You can only delete pages added • * Delete page
using the Add page option.
• Rename
• Reset all
Add page You can add new dashboard pages that you can Displays pop-over with
customize by selecting Add page. page layouts.
Import custom You can import digital switching pages . Displays file browser
pages Please refer to Raymarine Product support for
more details.
Export custom You can export your digital switching pages so Save dialog
pages that they can be restored at a later date. You
must use this feature if you wish to export or
backup your digital switching pages, as digital
switching pages are not included in the standard
MFD “Backup and restore” process, which is
used to backup user settings only.
Please refer to Raymarine Product support for
more details.
Exporting digital switching pages must be
performed on each MFD configuration.

Circuits tab
Settings Description Options
List of tripped In Digital Switching systems, the circuit tab • Acknowledged
channels provides a list of tripped channels.
• Reset
Tripped circuits can be acknowledged and reset
from the pop-over options.

Units tab
Measurement Units
Distance units • Nautical Miles
• NM & m
• Statute Miles
• Kilometers
Speed units • Kts
• MPH
• KPH
Depth units • Meters
• Feet
• Fathoms
Temperature units • Celsius
• Fahrenheit

Dashboard app 239

 Measurement Units
Date format • MM:DD:YYYY
• DD:MM:YYYY
• MM:DD:YY
• DD:MM:YY
Volume units • US Gallons
• Imperial Gallons
• Liters
Economy units • Distance per Volume
• Volume per Distance
• Liters per 100 km
Wind speed units • Knots
• Meters per Second
Pressure units • Bar
• PSI
• Kilopascals
Time format • 12hr
• 24hr

Settings Description Options

Bearing mode Determines how bearing and heading data is • True
displayed.
• Magnetic
System Datum Determines the datum used by your MFD. List of available datums.
This should be set to the same datum used by
your paper charts.
Variation When set to Auto the MFD will automatically • Auto
compensate for the naturally-occurring offset of
• Manual
the Earth’s magnetic field.
Manual variation When variation is set to Manual, you can specify • 30° W to 30° E
an offset.

Advanced tab
Settings Description Options
Maximum RPM You can select a maximum RPM for your engine • Auto
dials, or allow the system to automatically
• 3,000 RPM to 10,000
configure the Maximum RPM.
RPM
Custom RPM Red You can create a custom Red zone for your RPM • 0 RPM to 10,000 RPM
zone dials.
Wind angle You can configure the rate at which Wind angle • 1 to 15
response data is updated on the MFD.
The Higher the response setting the faster the
update rate will be.
Wind speed You can configure the rate at which Wind speed • 1 to 15
response data is updated on the MFD.
The Higher the response setting the faster the
update rate will be.

240
Page settings tab
Settings Description
Data Overlays Enables configuration of Data overlays
Edit split ratio Enables you to customize the position of the partitions in
splitscreen app pages.

12.5 Navigation and Sailing dials

Navigation and Sailing dials are available which provide a compass dial with various data indicators.

1. Apparent Wind Angle (AWA) indicator

2. True Wind Direction (TWD) indicator
3. Apparent Wind Angle (AWA)
4. Heading
5. Tide direction indicator
6. Course Over Ground (COG) indicator

Dashboard app 241

Sailing dials for laylines
The Sailing page and Navigation page can display an Apparent wind or True wind dial to aid with
sailing along laylines.

1. Port wind angle target

2. Starboard wind angle target
3. Downwind wind angle target
4. Apparent wind speed
5. Apparent wind angle
6. True wind speed
7. True wind angle
8. Historical wind angle
When sailing you may aim the wind angle so it aligns with the centre of the
wind angle target to maximise your velocity made good (VMG) when tacking
upwind or gybing downwind.

Sailing data items

The default sailing page comes with a selection of data items designed to help with sailing:
• Apparent wind sailing dial
• Distance to tack
• Time to tack
• Sailing distance to waypoint
• Waypoint sailing Time To Go
• Speed through water
• Target speed through water

242
• Steer to layline
• Polar performance (only active with sailing profile set to polar)
• Rudder bar
It is advised to use the Sailing data items in combination with the Laylines feature available in the
Chart app. For more information refer to: 8.4 Laylines

Race Start data items

The Race Start page comes with a selection of data items designed to help achieve a better racing
start:
Note:
Lighthouse software version 3.10 is required.

• Apparent wind sailing dial

• Race Timer (can be used to start, stop and edit the countdown timer)
• Distance to line
• Line bias
• Time to burn
• Time
It is advised to use the Race Start data items in combination with the Laylines feature and the Race
Start and Race Timer features available in the Chart app. For more information refer to:
8.4 Laylines
8.5 Race Start Line (SmartStart) and Race Timer

Dashboard app 243

244
Chapter 13: Yamaha app

Chapter contents
• 13.1 Yamaha app overview on page 246
• 13.2 Customizing Data pages on page 247
• 13.3 Engine page on page 251
• 13.4 Settings on page 256

Yamaha app 245

13.1 Yamaha app overview
The Yamaha app enables you to view engine system data from a connected Yamaha Command
Link or Command Link Pro network.
Note:
• The Yamaha app will only display data when a compatible Yamaha Command Link or Command
Link Pro network is connected to the MFD via a Yamaha NMEA 2000 gateway or CL7 gauge.
• The Yamaha app can only be displayed as a Fullscreen app page.
• The Yamaha app is pre-configured with a number of customizable data pages.
• For each instance of the Yamaha app you can select which Data pages you want to use; the
Data page selection will persist over a power cycle.

Requirements
The Yamaha app features are enabled (unlocked) when the following requirements are met:
• A compatible Yamaha Command Link or Command Link Pro network is connected to the MFD via
a Yamaha NMEA 2000 gateway (6YG-8A2D0-00-00) or CL7 Gauge.
• Your MFD must be running LightHouse 3 version 3.9 or above.
Note:
Do not use a Gateway module (6YG-8A2D0-00-00) and CL7 Gauge together on the same network.

Yamaha app controls

Icon Description Function
Home icon Takes you to the Homescreen.

Waypoint / MOB Place waypoint / activate Man overboard (MOB)

alarm.

Pilot icon Opens and closes the Pilot Sidebar

246
 Icon Description Function
Menu icon Opens the app menu.

Left arrow Displays the previous data page.

Right arrow Displays the next data page.

Switching data page

1. Use the Left arrow and Right arrow buttons, located at the bottom of the screen, to cycle through
the available data pages.
2. Alternatively, you can select a specific data page from the Yamaha app menu.

13.2 Customizing Data pages

The Yamaha App contains 3 default data pages: Engines, Data and Tanks. The data items displayed
on each page can be changed, hidden or reset.
To customize each page:
1. Select and hold the relevant Data item.
i. Alternatively you can select Customize page from the app menu: Menu > Customize page.
2. Select Edit, Hide or Reset from the Data item pop-over menu.
i. Edit — you can select the new data item you want to add to the page.
ii. Hide — removes the data item from the page.
iii. Reset — reset the value of the selected data item (only available for certain data items).

Yamaha app 247

Available data items
Engine page

Cell 1 and Cell 2

Data type Data item Data type Data item
Depth • Depth Environment • Water Temp
Distance • Trip GPS • SOG
Engine • Engine Trip Hours Pilot • Rudder
• Engine Hours
Fuel • Engine economy total Speed • STW
• Fuel flow total
• Fuel used (trip)
• Est. fuel remaining
Cell 3 Cell 4
Data type Data item Data type Data item
Engine • Coolant Temp Boat • Accessory voltage level
• Coolant Pres • Accessory voltage
• Alternator Level • Supply voltage level
• Alternator • Supply voltage
• Oil Pres

248
Data Page

Data type Data item Data type Data item

Battery • TTZ GPS • COG
• SOC • Avg SOG
• Max SOG
• SOG
• Loran Position
• Position
• COG SOG
Boat • Mast Rot Heading • Lock Hdg Err
• Roll • Tack Heading
• ROT • Lock Hdg
• Heading
• Heading & STW
Depth • Max Depth Navigation • VMG to Wpt
• Min Depth • BTW & DTW
• Depth • CMG & VMG to WPT
• Compass
• BTW
• XTE
• DTW
• CMG
• DMG
• Wpt ETA
• TTP
• Target Pos
• Loran Target Pos

Yamaha app 249

 • Wpt TTG
• Wpt
• Rte ETA
• Next turn angle
• Origin target distance
• Next waypoint name
• BOTW
Distance • Trip season Pilot • Rudder
• Trip month
• Trip day
• Trip manual
• Ground Log
• Trip
• Log
Engine • RPM Speed • VMG to Wind
• Engine Trip Hours • Avg STW
• Fuel Rate (Avg) • Max STW
• Inst Fuel Economy • STW
• Engine Fuel Rate
• Engine Hours
Fuel • Engine economy total Time • Timer
• Fuel flow total • Sunset Time
• Time to empty • Sunrise Time
• Distance to empty • UTC Time
• Fuel used (season) • Local Time
• Total Trip Fuel • UTC Date
• Fuel used (trip) • Local Date
• Est. fuel remaining • Tme and Timer
Environment • Drift from ps Wind • Max AWA
• Wind Chill (App) • GWD + Beaufort
• Wind Chill (True) • TWA & TWS
• Dew Point • TWA (CH) & TWS
• Max Air Temp • TWA & VMG to Wind
• Min Water Temp • AWA & AWS
• Water Temp • AWA (CH) & AWS
• Set • AWA & VMG to Wind
• Drift • GWS & GWD
• Sunrise/Sunset • AWS
• Set Drift • Max AWS
• Min AWS
• AWA
• AWA (CH)

250
 • Cardinal Wind
• Min AWA
• TWS
• Min TWS
• Max TWS
• TWA
• TWA (CH)
• Max TWA
• Min TWA
• TWD
• GWS
• GWD
• Beaufort (wind force scale)

Tanks Page

Data type Data item Data type Data item

Boat • Fresh Water Fuel • Total Fuel (vol)
• Live Well • Total Fuel
• Gray Water • Fuel level
• Black Water

13.3 Engine page

In addition to the customizable data cells available, the Engine page also displays the following
engine and tank data for your vessel:
• Rudder position (single engine only)
• Transmission
• Speed

Yamaha app 251

• Revolutions Per Minute (r/min)
• Engine trim
• Number of fuel tanks and fill level
Troll mode can also be enabled from this page.

Engines
The number of Yamaha engines connected to your MFD’s network determines how the engine
page is displayed.

252
The number of engines and their manufacturer can be set on the Boat details page.
Homescreen > Settings > Boat details

If your vessel is setup using the old quad engine system (2 MFDs for Port and Starboard Engines),
you can select which engines are displayed per MFD by selecting Configure Yamaha Quad display
and choosing Port side or Starboard side.

The engine page will update to reflect which engines your MFD is networked to, with Port and
Central Port symbols or Starboard and Central Starboard symbols.

1. Port engine
2. Central Port engine
3. Central Starboard engine
4. Starboard engine

Transmission
The transmission icons indicate which transmission mode your vessel’s engine is currently in:

Yamaha app 253

1. Neutral
2. Forward
3. Reverse
4. No transmission data detected
Note:
If no transmission information is detected from the CAN bus after 3 seconds, it will timeout. Ensure
that your engine(s) are compatible and have been connected to your MFD network correctly.

Status and warning indicators

The engine page will display indicators for engine status
and warnings.

These status and warning symbols are described below:

1. Engine warming up status

2. Synchronization status
3. Immobilizer lock status

254
1. Overheat warning
2. Low oil pressure warning
3. Water in fuel warning
4. Low voltage warning
5. Check engine warning
6. Steering system warning
7. Catalyst warning

Tanks
The engine page displays the number of tanks aboard
your vessel, their type, instance number and fill level.
Note:
• The number of tanks and their type is determined
during the installation wizard.
• Tanks require calibration, for more information refer
to Calibrating tanks
• No more than 6 tanks can be displayed on the engine
page.
• If there are more than 6 tanks detected on your
vessel’s network the engine page will display them
using the following hierarchy: fuel, fresh water, waste
water, gasoline, followed by prioritizing the lowest
instance numbers first.

Engine trim
The trim bar displays the trim level of your engine(s), a
higher blue bar equates to a higher trim percent. The trim
bar will begin to flash if you attempt to set the engine trim
beyond 100%.

Yamaha app 255

Troll mode
If your engine supports Troll mode it can be enabled from
the engine page. Troll mode is enabled by pressing the
Troll mode toggle or by selecting it from the menu.
Note:
• Lower engine RPM and go into idle mode before
attempting to activate Troll mode.
• When Troll mode is enabled your RPM gauge will
change from x100 r/min to r/min, allowing for more
precise control.

13.4 Settings
The settings page can be used to view fault codes, schedule maintenance, and calibrate your
engine(s).

Fault codes
The fault codes tab displays all live engine faults detected on the network.

Note:
• The fault codes tab default setting is to display fault codes from all engines.
• You can use the filter option to display fault codes for a specific engine and hide codes for all
other engines.

Maintenance
The Maintenance tab displays the amount of time since your Yamaha engine(s) have been serviced.
The amount of hours since last service will automatically accumulate when your Yamaha engine(s)
are running. When your engine(s) have been serviced you can long hold the row and select Reset
from the pop up to return the amount of hours back to 0.

256
 Note:
• A default interval of 100 hours is displayed at the top, this is the recommended maximum amount
of time you can use your engine(s) before a service is required.
• Additional user configurable intervals can be customized by long holding each row and choosing
the interval length.

Advanced
The Advanced tab is used during the installation and calibration of your Yamaha engine(s). For more
information on how to install and calibrate your Yamaha engine(s) refer to Yamaha engine installation
manual or Yamaha dealer.
Options:
Gateway reset — System protocol information reset.
Engine instances reset — Engine instances reset. Engine(s) will be reordered based on engine
position:
Engine Port Central or Central Starboard
Central Port Starboard
Single Engine 0 - - -
Twin Engine 0 - - 1
Triple Engine 0 1 - 2
Quad Engine 0 1 2 3

All pages reset — All data items on each data page are reset to default.
Fuel flow offset — Set the Fuel flow offset value in accordance with your Fuel flow gauge reading.
Trim Calibration — Calibrate your engine trim by pressing Set to zero if any number other than 0
is showing on the Trim Position when engine(s) have stopped.

Yamaha app 257

258
Chapter 14: Video app

Chapter contents
• 14.1 Video app overview on page 260
• 14.2 Opening the Video app on page 262
• 14.3 Video app settings on page 264
• 14.4 Maritime (M-Series) camera compatibility on page 267

Video app 259

14.1 Video app overview
Analog video feeds (Axiom™ Pro only) and IP (Internet Protocol) digital video feeds can be viewed,
recorded and played back on the MFD using the Video app. Examples of video feeds include: CCTV
cameras and Thermal imaging cameras, DVD player etc. It may also be possible to view analog video
feeds from other sources using a suitable third party analog-to-IP video converter.
Up to 4 video feeds can be displayed simultaneously when using a splitscreen app page.
Axiom™ Pro MFDs will transmit a connected analog video feed over RayNet to enable the feed
to be viewed on networked MFDs.

Video app pages

Each Video app instance is unique, this means that once you have selected a feed to display in a
Video app page then your feed selection is saved and the same feed will be displayed whenever
that app page icon is opened from the Homescreen. If you open the same Video app page from a
networked MFD, the same feed will be displayed on each MFD.

260
You can create additional Video app pages and assign a different feed to each. This will allow you to
view multiple feeds on multiple networked MFDs simultaneously.
For example, if you want to display a different video feed on different networked MFDs, you must first
create additional Video app pages.
Note:
When you have multiple Video app page icons on your Homescreen, you may wish to rename
each icon to help you easily identify the feeds(s) assigned to each app page. For information on
how to rename Homescreen icons, refer to:
5.4 Creating / Customizing an App page

Renaming video feeds

In multi camera installations you can rename your feed from within the Video app.
From the Video app menu:
1. Select the icon for the camera you want to rename so that its feed is displayed.
2. Goto the Video app’s Settings menu: Menu > Settings.
3. Select the Camera setup tab.
4. Select the Camera name field.
5. Use the onscreen keyboard to rename your feed and then select Save.
Repeat the above steps for each video feed you want to rename. You can also associate a different
icon to your video feed by selecting om the Icon field.

Video app controls

Icon Description Function
Home icon Takes you to the Homescreen

Waypoint / MOB Place waypoint / activate Man overboard (MOB)

alarm

Pilot icon Opens and closes the Pilot Sidebar

Menu icon Opens the app menu

Record Start recording (Replaced by Stop icon whilst

recording.)

Stop Stop recording (Replaced Record icon when not

recording.)

Take photo Take a photo of what is currently displayed in the

active feed.

Video app 261

Pan, Tilt, Zoom (PTZ) camera controls
Extra controls are available for cameras that can pan, tilt or zoom.
Swiping your finger across the screen to pan or tilt the camera.
Use Pinch-to-Zoom to zoom in and out.
When not in use place the camera in the Parked position by selecting Park camera from the menu:
Menu > Park camera
Select Home from the menu: Menu > Home to move the camera to its Home position.

14.2 Opening the Video app

The Video app is opened by selecting an app page icon from the Homescreen which includes
the Video app.
Pre-requisites:
1. Ensure your video feed is compatible by checking the latest details available on the Raymarine
website against your device’s specification. If in doubt please contact an authorized Raymarine
dealer for advice.
2. Ensure you have installed your video device in accordance with the documentation that was
supplied with your device.
The Video app will open in 1 of 3 states:
Note: If the Video app is opened soon after powering on your system, you may have to wait for the
device(s) to finish booting before the video feed is displayed.

Video feed displayed

If your device is powered up and operational then the Device’s video feed is displayed.

Camera not yet available

The ‘Camera not yet available’ message is displayed if:
• a Video app page is opened before the camera has finished booting up.
• connection to the camera is lost.

262
If the ‘Camera not yet available’ message is displayed for more than 2 minutes, then your MFD
cannot connect to your camera. Ensure network and power connections to your camera and MFD
are correct and free from damage and then power cycle your system. If the camera feed is still
not displayed, refer to your equipment’s installation documentation for further troubleshooting
information.

No camera detected
The ‘No camera detected’ message is displayed if:
• a Video app page is opened for the first time and no compatible camera is connected.
• a Video app page is opened for the first time before the camera has finished booting up.

If the ‘No camera detected’ message is displayed for more than 2 minutes, then your MFD cannot
connect to your camera. Ensure network and power connections to your camera and MFD are correct
and free from damage and then power cycle your system. If the camera feed is still not displayed,
refer to your equipment’s installation documentation for further troubleshooting information.

Selecting a video feed

You can change the feed that is displayed in the Video app.
From the Video app main menu, select the icon for the camera that you
want to display.

Dual streaming
M-Series cameras with dual payloads (visible and thermal camera lens) can stream a visible feed and
thermal feed simultaneously.

Video app 263

 Note:
Dual streaming requires:
• A dual payload M-Series camera: M300, M400 and M500.
• Lighthouse software version 3.11 or later.

Single MFD
Activate dual video streaming on a single MFD.
1. From the Homescreen, create a custom combo app that comprises of at least 2 Video
apps. For more information on creating and customizing LightHouse apps, refer to:
p.55 — Creating / Customizing an App page
2. Open the combo app and select one of the Video app sections.
3. Select the dual payload camera and select the stream you want to display (visible or thermal):
Combo app > Menu > Settings > Image Tab > Active feed > Visible / Thermal

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other section and video stream.
Dual MFDs
Activate dual video streaming on at least 2 MFDs connected on the same network.
Note:
Make sure your MFDs are both correctly connected on the same network as the dual payload
camera.
1. Open the Video app on one of the MFDs.
2. Select the dual payload camera and select the stream you want to display (visible or thermal):
Video app > Menu > Settings > Image Tab > Active feed > Visible / Thermal

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the other MFD and video stream.

14.3 Video app settings

The Settings menu provides access to the Video app’s features and functions. The options available
in the Settings menu are dependent on your system configuration and connected devices.
Image tab
Settings Description Options
Active feed On cameras with more than 1 payload you can • Thermal
select which feed to display in the Video app.
• Visible
Blending Mode On cameras with more than 1 payload you can • Off
blend the two feeds together, displaying an
• CTV
overlap of daylight stream on top of thermal
image, providing enhanced detail. • MSX
• CTV - Coloured daylight image blended with
the thermal feed.
• MSX - Black and white daylight image detects
and sharpens the edges of objects shown on
the thermal feed.
Blending Level Set the percentage of the blend between both • 0% to 100%
camera feeds for CTV or MSX blending.
Light For cameras that include a light this setting • On
switches the camera’s light on and off as well as
• Off
flashing mode and SOS mode.
• Flash
• SOS

264
 Settings Description Options
Palette Various color palettes are available to suit • WhiteHot
different conditions or your personal preference.
• BlackHot
• RedHot
• RedHot Inverse
• Fusion
• FireIce
• FireIce Inverse
Scene Scene presets that have been optimized for • Day
different running conditions.
• Night
• Docking
• High contrast
Auto focus The camera will focus the image. • Activate
Low light mode Visible cameras supporting low light mode can • On
set this during low light conditions.
• Off
• Auto
Wide Dynamic Improves the viewable range of darkness to • Disable
Range lightness of the image.
• Enable
Contrast Adjusts the brightness and contrast of the • Disable
Enhancement image to make dark and bright sections more
• Enable
distinguishable.
Electronic Stabilizes the image to reduce blurring caused • Disable
stabilization by camera shake.
• Enable
Digital Zoom Zooms the camera feed to maximum. • Disable
• Enable
Roll Accounts for boat tilting and will adjust video • Disable
correction(Requires feed accordingly. Video feed horizon will be
• Enable
AR200) parallel with the actual horizon.

Camera setup tab

Settings Description Options
Heater Enables and disables the camera’s built-in heater • Disable
used to de-mist the camera lens.
• Enable
Zoom Lock Synchronise zoom level between visible and • Disable
thermal camera feeds.
• Enable
Mirrored view Flips the camera image to provide a mirror • Disable
image, suitable for rear view installations.
• Enable
Camera name Change your camera name. • Displays the onscreen
keyboard.
Icon Select the icon to be used for the camera. • List of icons.
Flip image vertical Flips the camera image upside down, suitable for • Disable
Ball-down installations.
• Enable
UI language Select the language of the user interface. • List of languages.

Video app 265

 Settings Description Options
On-screen icons Sets the level for the camera’s built-in onscreen • None
icons
• Minimal
• All
Save default Save the current camera settings as the default. • Save
settings
Restore default Restore the camera settings to default. • Run default restore
settings
Self-tests and Offers a series of tests and calibration options for • Pan/tilt test
calibration your camera.
• Reset IR lens
• Flat Field Correction
• Set elevation reference
• Set forward position
Restore factory Restore camera settings to factory default. • Run factory restore
settings

Photo & Video recording tab

Settings Description Options
Save files to: Determines the save location for photos and • SD 1
video recordings.
• External SD 1 USB
Note: External SD 1 and USB Media are Media
available when using the RCR-SDUSB
Accessory.

ClearCruise tab (Augmented Reality) (Requires AR200)

Settings Description Options
Augmented Reality Enables / disables Augmented Reality and • Disable
Augmented reality settings.
• Enable
AIS labels Display other vessels as flags (requires AIS). • Disable
• Enable
Hide static targets Hide AIS targets travelling under 2 knots • Disable
(requires AIS).
• Enable
Waypoints Display Waypoints as flags. • Disable
• Enable
Chart objects Display Chart objects as flags (requires • Disable
compatible charts).
• Enable
Cartography Select the cartography ClearCruise displays data • Cartography source
source from (requires compatible charts). options
Compass Display the Compass bar. • Disable
• Enable
Range limit Set the maximum range flags will automatically • 1/8nm to 13nm
be displayed from.

266
ClearCruise tab (Object Detection)
Settings Description Options
Highlight detected Uses proprietary ClearCruise™ technology to • Disable
objects highlight and track objects detected in the water.
• Enable
Beep on detection When enabled the MFD will beep when an object • Disable
is detected.
• Enable
Display estimated When enabled the MFD will display an estimated • Disable
range range for highlighted objects (objects must be
• Enable
closer than 300ft)

Camera motion tab

Settings Description Options
Camera height To ensure correct alignment of the camera for • 0ft to 99ft
above the tracking purposes the height the camera has
waterline been installed at, above the waterline, must be
set.
Set forward Adjust the Forward position of your camera Displays the forward
position alignment picture
Man overboard Enables and disables automatic tracking of a • Disable
MOB alarm.
• Enable
The most recent target is tracked.
Dangerous AIS Enables and disables automatic tracking of • Disable
targets Dangerous AIS targets.
• Enable
The most recent target is tracked.
Dangerous MARPA Enables and disables automatic tracking of • Disable
targets Dangerous Radar targets.
• Enable
The most recent target is tracked.
Enable scan Enables and disables Surveillance mode. • Disable
Surveillance mode pans the camera left to right
• Enable
continuously to the specified speed
Scan width Determines how far the camera pans from left to • Narrow
right when in Surveillance mode.
• Medium
• Wide
Scan speed Determines the speed at which the camera pans • Slow
from left to right when in Surveillance mode.
• Medium
• Fast

Page settings
Settings Description Options
Edit data overlays Add data overlays to video feed. • List of data overlays

14.4 Maritime (M-Series) camera compatibility

Support for the various video features and settings, as per each M-Series camera variant.
For an explanation of the settings listed in the following table, refer to: p.264 — Video app settings
Not applicable to product
—
Applicable to product

Video app 267

 Applicable to product (M200 only) (M200 only)
Applicable to dual payload M300 variants only ***

IMAGE TAB
Setting M100/M200 M300*** M400 M500
Active feed —
• Thermal
• Visible
Blending mode — — —
• Off
• CTV
• MSX
Blending level — —
• 0% to 100%
Light — —
• Off
• On
• Flash
• SOS
Palette (Thermal feed)
• WhiteHot
• BlackHot
• RedHot
• RedHot Inverse
• Fusion
• Fusion Inverse
• FireIce
• FireIce Inverse
Scene (Thermal feed)
• Day
• Night
• Docking
• High Contrast
Auto focus (Visible feed) — —
• Activate
Low light mode (Visible feed) —
• Off
• On
• Auto
Wide dynamic range (Visible feed) —
• Disable
• Enable

268
 IMAGE TAB
Contrast enhancement (Visible feed) —
• Disable
• Enable
Electronic stabilisation (Visible feed) — — —
• Disable
• Enable
Digital Zoom
• Disable
• Enable
Roll correction (Requires AR200) — —
• Disable
• Enable

CAMERA SETUP TAB

Setting M100/M200 M300*** M400 M500
Heater
• Disable
• Enable
Zoom lock —
• Disable
• Enable
Mirrored view
• Disable
• Enable
Camera name
• Onscreen keyboard
Icon
• List of camera icons
Flip image vertical
• Disable
• Enable
UI language —
• List of available languages
On-screen icons —
• None
• Minimal
• All
Save default settings —
• Save
Restore default settings —
• Run default restore

Video app 269

 CAMERA SETUP TAB
Self-tests and calibration
Pan/tilt test —
Set elevation reference
Set forward position
Spotlight test — —
Self-tests and calibration (Thermal
feed)
IR test pattern — —
Reset IR lens —
Flat field correction
Restore factory settings
• Run factory restore

PHOTO & VIDEO RECORDING

Setting M100/M200 M300*** M400 M500
Save files to
• List of connected SD cards

CLEARCRUISE™
Setting M100/M200 M300*** M400 M500
ClearCruise™ Augmented Reality — —
(Requires AR200)
Augmented Reality — —
• Disable
• Enable
AIS targets — —
• Disable
• Enable
Hide static targets — —
• Disable
• Enable
Waypoints — —
• Disable
• Enable
Chart objects — —
• Disable
• Enable
Cartography source — —
• Disable
• Enable
Compass — —
• Disable
• Enable

270
 CLEARCRUISE™
Range limit — —
• Disable
• Enable
ClearCruise™ Object Detection — — —
Highlight detected objects — — —
• Disable
• Enable
Beep on detection — — —
• Disable
• Enable
Display estimated range — — —
• Disable
• Enable

CAMERA MOTION
Setting M100/M200 M300*** M400 M500
Camera height above waterline
• Adjust value
Forward position (M200 only)
• Adjust position and Save
Man overboard (M200 only)
• Disable
• Enable
Dangerous AIS target (M200 only)
• Disable
• Enable
Dangerous MARPA target (M200 only)
• Disable
• Enable
Vertical stabilization (M200 only)
• Disable
• Enable
Horizontal stabilization (M200 only)
• Disable
• Enable
Enable scan (M200 only)
• Disable
• Enable

Video app 271

 CAMERA MOTION
Scan width (M200 only)
• Disable
• Enable
Scan speed (M200 only)
• Disable
• Enable

PAGE SETTINGS
Setting M100/M200 M300*** M400 M500
Edit data overlays
• List of data overlays

272
Chapter 15: ClearCruise (Object Detection and Augmented Reality)

Chapter contents
• 15.1 ClearCruise™ features on page 274
• 15.2 Camera setup on page 275
• 15.3 AR200 setup for Augmented Reality on page 279
• 15.4 ClearCruise™ object detection overview on page 279
• 15.5 Augmented Reality (AR) overview on page 281
• 15.6 Augmented Reality flags on page 282
• 15.7 ClearCruise settings (Augmented Reality) on page 286
• 15.8 Roll correction on page 288
• 15.9 AR200 Calibration (Linearization) on page 290

ClearCruise (Object Detection and Augmented

Reality) 273
15.1 ClearCruise™ features
ClearCruise™ features are designed for enhancing situational awareness and aiding navigation.
ClearCruise™ technology provides 2 separate features:
• Object Detection
• Augmented Reality (AR)

Object Detection
Object Detection is a feature available for M100 and M200 Series thermal cameras. Intelligent
thermal analytics technology provides audible and visual alerts when “non-water” objects are
identified in the scene. Vessels, obstacles, and navigation markers can all be automatically identified
by the camera without the need for Chart or Radar data.
Required components for Object Detection
• MFD: Axiom / Axiom Pro / Axiom XL, or eS Series / gS Series running LightHouse 3.
• Thermal Camera (M100 or M200 Series)
• LightHouse™ software (v3.0 or later)

Augmented Reality
The Augmented Reality feature places layers of digital information directly over the top of the Video
app’s video feed. Data from the Chart app is used to generate informative text and images (flags)
on the Video app. When calibrated correctly, ClearCruise™ Augmented Reality accurately overlays
automatically-updating flags on the Video app so they overlap real-life objects.
Required components for Augmented Reality (IP cameras)
• MFD (Axiom, Axiom Pro or Axiom XL)
• AR200 Augmented Reality Sensor
• IP camera (CAM210IP or CAM220IP)
• LightHouse™ software (v3.7 or later)
Required components for Augmented Reality (M-Series cameras)
• MFD (Axiom, Axiom Pro or Axiom XL)
• AR200 Augmented Reality Sensor
• M-Series camera (M100, M200 and M300 Series)
• M100 / M200-Series cameras require LightHouse™ software version 3.9 or later.
• M300-Series cameras require LightHouse™ software version 3.10.71 or later.
Important:
Cameras utilizing ClearCruise™ Augmented Reality are subject to an unstable image on rough
waters.

274
 Note: ClearCruise’s performance is dependent on environmental conditions and is not a
replacement for maintaining a visual watch.

15.2 Camera setup

Before using the Augmented Reality features, it’s important to correctly install and setup your
compatible camera.
Refer to your camera’s installation manual to determine the correct physical installation and
connections for using the camera as part of an Augmented Reality system.
A number of additional camera-related settings and calibrations must be completed in the Video app
before Augmented Reality features can be used:
• Camera height above the waterline.
• Camera direction.
• Camera horizontal field of view [not required for cameras which auto assign their field of view].
• Horizon calibration.
Note:
• The camera’s height above the waterline and camera’s view direction need to be physically
measured for accurate camera installation.
• The camera’s horizontal field of view can be found in your camera’s installation manual
specification.

Fixed camera calibration

Fixed mount cameras require calibration for Augmented Reality to function correctly.
1. For first time setup, either:
i. Select the Enter Details prompt in the Video app.
ii. Select the ClearCruise tab in the Video app’s Settings, Video app > Settings > ClearCruise.
There will be a prompt to Enter Details using the Camera Installation page.
2. Go directly to the Camera Installation page in the Video app (Settings > Camera Setup >
Camera Installation).
ClearCruise (Object Detection and Augmented
Reality) 275
3. The Camera Installation page will offer a series of camera installation options which all need
to be completed correctly.

Note:
Incorrect physical camera installation and incorrect settings provided in the camera setup page
could result in an inaccurate Augmented Reality overlay.

• To adjust the values of Camera height above waterline, Camera direction and Field of view,
select the value boxes of each option and adjust using the arrows.
Menu item Options
Camera height above waterline • 0m to 50m
• 0ft to 165ft
Camera direction • 0° (Forward) (default)
• 0° to 180°p (Port)
• 0° to 180°s (Starboard)
Field of view • 30° to 120°
• [CAM210IP – 53°]
• [CAM220IP – 93°]

• To Calibrate horizon, use the up, down, rotate left and rotate right arrow keys until the red line is
placed on the horizon. When the line is in position, select Save.
Important:
Calibrating the horizon correctly is essential for accurate Augmented Reality overlay. Calibrating
on calm water and in clear sight of the horizon is recommended.

276
Pan and Tilt camera calibration
Pan and Tilt cameras require calibration for Augmented Reality to function correctly.
1. For first time setup, either:
i. Select the Enter Details prompt in the Video app.
ii. Select the ClearCruise tab in the Video app’s Settings, Video app > Settings > ClearCruise.
There will be a prompt to Enter Details using the Camera Installation page.
2. Go directly to the Camera Installation page in the Video app (Settings > Camera Setup >
Camera Installation).
3. The Camera Installation page will offer a series of camera installation options which all need
to be completed correctly.

ClearCruise (Object Detection and Augmented

Reality) 277
 Note:
Incorrect physical camera installation and incorrect settings provided in the camera setup page
could result in an inaccurate Augmented Reality overlay.

• To adjust the values of Camera height above waterline select the value box and adjust using
the arrows.
Menu item Options
Camera height above waterline • 0m to 50m
• 0ft to 165ft

• To Calibrate the camera’s Forward Position adjust the camera direction so the vertical black line is
positioned directly forward, parallel to your vessels forward position.

Important:
• Calibrating the cameras forward position is essential for accurate
Augmented Reality overlay when the camera pans and tilts. Calibrating
on calm water and with a clear view of the front of your vessel is
recommended.
• Certain cameras display a camera direction indicator which can help
identify when the camera is facing directly forward.

• To Calibrate the camera’s Horizon position use the arrow keys to align the horizontal red line so
it is level with the horizon.
• Pan and tilt the camera 360° during calibration to ensure the horizon line has been positioned
correctly.

278
 Important:
Calibrating the horizon correctly is essential for accurate Augmented Reality overlay. Calibrating
on calm water and in clear sight of the horizon is recommended.

15.3 AR200 setup for Augmented Reality

Before using the Augmented Reality features, it’s important to correctly install and setup the AR200
Augmented Reality sensor.
Refer to the AR200 Installation manual (87372) to determine the correct physical installation and
connections for using the AR200 as part of an Augmented Reality system.

15.4 ClearCruise™ object detection overview

Object detection provides audible and visual alerts when “non-water” objects are identified by
connected M100/M200 Series cameras.
Objects that visually differ from the water will be identified by the camera as a “non-water” object.
The following features are available with Object detection:
• Highlight detected objects — Enables/disables object highlighting, which automatically identifies
and highlights “non-water” objects.
• Beep on detection — Enables/disables a beep when an object is detected (Highlight detected
objects must be enabled)
• Display estimated range — Enables/disables display of an object’s estimated range from your
vessel (Highlight detected objects must be enabled, and object must be closer than approximately
100 m (~300 ft)).

ClearCruise (Object Detection and Augmented

Reality) 279
 • Object detection can be particularly useful at night or visually limiting
environments such as storms or fog.
• In the event of an emergency, such as man overboard, Object detection
could be a useful aid that helps to identify and predict the distance from
the MOB.
Note: ClearCruise’s performance is dependent on conditions and is not a
replacement for maintaining a visual watch.

ClearCruise settings (Object Detection)

Object Detection features and settings can be enabled and disabled in the ClearCruise tab in the
Video app.
Video app > Settings > ClearCruise

280
 Setting Description
Highlight detected objects Enables/disables object highlighting.
Beep on detection Enables/disables an audible beep when an
object is detected (Highlight detected objects
must be enabled).
Display estimated range Enables/disables display of an object’s
estimated range from your vessel (Highlight
detected objects must be enabled, and the
object must be closer than approximately 100
m (~300 ft).

Important: ClearCruise Object Detection is only compatible with cameras that are positioned
upright. ClearCruise Object Detection will not function with cameras that are upside down and
have vertical flip enabled.

15.5 Augmented Reality (AR) overview

ClearCruise™ Augmented Reality uses data from the Chart app and displays this data in realtime as
an overlay in the Video app.

ClearCruise (Object Detection and Augmented

Reality) 281
The Augmented Reality feature places layers of digital information directly over the top of the Video
app’s video feed. Data from the Chart app is used to generate informative text and images (flags)
on the Video app. When calibrated correctly, ClearCruise™ Augmented Reality accurately overlays
automatically-updating flags on the Video app so they overlap real-life objects.
The Augmented Reality feature requires an Axiom, Axiom Pro or Axiom XL MFD, an AR200 sensor
and a compatible camera.
For more information, refer to: p.274 — ClearCruise™ features
Note:
• The Augmented Reality feature requires correct camera calibration for accurate image overlay.
• The Augmented Reality feature serves as an aid to navigation and situational awareness only,
and should not be solely relied on for precise navigation. Always maintain a visual watch.

Important: Rear-facing cameras with a flipped or mirrored image may not place Augmented Reality
content as accurately as a forward-facing camera.

15.6 Augmented Reality flags

ClearCruise™ Augmented Reality displays AIS Targets, Waypoints and Chart Objects as individual
Augmented Reality Flags in the Video app.
All flags display an icon and your vessel’s distance from the target’s location.

282
 1 Waypoint flag
2 Chart Object flag (buoy)
3 AIS Target flag (passenger ferry; icon points in the direction of travel relative to the
camera feed)
4 Dangerous AIS Target flag (passenger ferry; icon points in the direction of travel,
relative to the camera feed)

Note: AIS flags update periodically; however, accurate placement is not guaranteed.

• AIS Targets, Waypoints and Chart Object flags can be quickly enabled / disabled via buttons in
the Video app.
• The maximum range within which flags are automatically shown can also be adjusted in the
Video app.
• For more information on adjusting flag settings, refer to: 15.1 ClearCruise™ features

Selected flags
Augmented Reality flags in the Video app can be selected (highlighted), providing access to more
information about the object and additional features.
A flag is an onscreen visual overlay element displayed in the Video app when the Augmented
Reality features are enabled. A flag represents an object from the Chart application: e.g. AIS target,
Waypoint, or other chart object.
When a flag is selected, the corresponding object is also highlighted in the Chart app. Conversely,
selecting an object in the Chart app highlights the corresponding flag in the Video app.
Only one flag may be selected at a time.

ClearCruise (Object Detection and Augmented

Reality) 283
 1 AIS Flag
2 Selected AIS Flag

Selecting a flag highlights it in red and provides additional information about the object in a context
menu. The menu also provides additional features. The range of features available in the context
menu depends on the type of object selected:
AIS Target Flag
Option Description
AIS Target name The name of the target vessel.
Target data Vessel (name), CPA, TCPA, COG, SOG.
View AIS data Displays the AIS data transmitted by the target vessel.

284
 Option Description
Buddy (toggle ON/OFF) Add the vessel to your “Buddy List”, with the option
to rename it. The Buddy feature enables you to add
AIS-equipped friends and regular contacts to a “Buddy
List” on your MFD. As soon as a vessel on your Buddy List
comes within range of your AIS receiver, the onscreen
vessel icon changes to indicate this.
Goto The Chart app will plot a direct route to the last known
location of the target.
Place waypoint The Chart app will place a waypoint at the last known
location of the target.
Waypoint Flag
Option Description
Waypoint name The name of the waypoint.
Target data Lat, Lon, Rng, Brg.
Goto The Chart app will plot a direct route to the last
known location of the target.
Delete Delete the waypoint.
Edit Edit the waypoint’s Name, Symbol, Group,
Position, and add a Comment.
Chart Object Flag
Option Description
Chart Object name The name of the chart object.
Target data Lat, Lon, Rng, Brg.
Goto The Chart app will plot a direct route to the last
known location of the target.

Goto flag
Selecting Goto on a selected Augmented Reality flag will plot a direct course to the flag’s last
known location.
A Goto flag will appear in the last known location of the selected flag in both the Video and Chart
apps, and in the Video app’s Compass bar. The flag is displayed with a Goto icon, as a blue copy of
the original flag.
Selecting the Goto flag makes it a selected flag, and also displays a context menu providing more
information about the location of the flag, and the option to stop a goto action.

ClearCruise (Object Detection and Augmented

Reality) 285
• Selecting Stop removes the Goto flag from the Video app and Chart app.
• If the camera loses sight of the Goto flag, it will display red and green navigational arrows on the
Compass bar, indicating whether you need to turn port or starboard to regain sight of the flag.
However, this only works if the camera is forward-facing.

15.7 ClearCruise settings (Augmented Reality)

Augmented Reality settings can be edited in the ClearCruise tab in the Video app.
Setting Description
AIS labels Enables/disables the display of other vessels as
Augmented Reality flags (requires AIS).
Hide static targets Enables/disables the display of AIS targets
travelling under 2 knots (requires AIS).
Waypoints Enables/disables the display of Waypoint
Augmented Reality flags.
Chart objects Enables/disables the display of Chart objects
(requires compatible charts).
Cartography source Select the cartography source that the
ClearCruise™ features will use for the display
of chart objects in the Video app Augmented
Reality features. (Requires compatible charts).
Compass Enables/disables the display of the Compass
bar in the Video app.
Range limit Sets the maximum range at which the camera
will detect and display Augmented Reality flags.
This range is displayed visually in the Chart app
with the “FOV cone”. Refer to: Field of View
. For the maximum range supported by your
camera, refer to: Range limit

286
 Note:
The variety of chart objects is dependent on the selected cartography source. For more information
on different cartography sources, refer to: 8.11 Find nearest

Range limit
The Range Limit is the maximum range at which ClearCruise™ can display AIS targets, Waypoints and
Chart Object flags in the Video app.
The range limit can be checked using the Field of View (FOV) cone in the Chart app. All AIS targets,
Waypoints and Chart Objects within the area of coverage of the FOV cone can be displayed as
Augmented Reality flags in the Video app. For more information, refer to: Field of View

ClearCruise (Object Detection and Augmented

Reality) 287
 Note:
Some chart objects just outside of the FOV cone might still display in the Video app as flags.
You can specify this range limit manually in the Video app: Video Settings > ClearCruise tab. Any
adjustments you make will be reflected in the FOV cone display in the Chart app.

15.8 Roll correction

Roll Correction automatically adjusts the Video app image when the vessel tilts (rolls) to port or
starboard.
Note: Roll correction is only available with IP cameras.
Roll Correction can be enabled/disabled in the Video app: Settings > Image.

When enabled, the Roll Correction feature accounts for the boat tilting and stabilizes the video feed
accordingly. This means that the video feed’s horizon will be parallel with the actual horizon. When
disabled, the video feed will tilt with the boat and the MFD screen.

288
 1 Roll correction disabled
2 Roll correction enabled

ClearCruise (Object Detection and Augmented

Reality) 289
15.9 AR200 Calibration (Linearization)
To enable accurate placement of Augmented Reality (AR) flags on the camera’s video feed, the
AR200’s AHRS sensors need to compensate for local magnetic fields, as well as the Earth’s magnetic
fields.
Calibration is achieved using an automatic linearization process. The linearization process starts
automatically after your vessel has turned approximately 100°, when travelling at a speed of between
3 to 15 knots. The linearization process requires no user input, however at least a 270° turn is
required before linearization can be completed. The duration of the linearization process can be
decreased by completing a full 360° turn, when travelling at a speed of between 3 to 15 knots. The
linearization process can also be restarted at anytime.

In the Video app the Linearization progress bar is displayed when linearization is in progress. The bar
is filled to indicate completeness, and will turn Red if the process is paused or otherwise interrupted.
The time taken to complete the linearization process will vary according to the characteristics of the
vessel, the AR200’s installation location, and the levels of magnetic interference present at the time
linearization is performed.
Magnetic interference can be caused by objects onboard your vessel, such as:
• Speakers
• Electronic equipment
• Electrical cabling
• Metal bulkhead or hull
Magnetic interference can also be caused by external objects in close proximately to your vessel,
such as:
• Metal hulled vessels
• Underwater electrical cables
• Marine pontoons

Magnetic deviation
Magnetic deviation is the error induced in a compass caused by interference from local magnetic
fields.
The automatic linearization process results in a deviation value being set for your AR200. If
Augmented Reality flags in the Video app are not aligned with their onscreen objects, or the compass
is out of alignment, you should check the AR200’s current calibration settings. For instructions on
how to do this, refer to: AR200 calibration settings

AR200 calibration settings

The calibration settings page provides access to the AR200’s compass calibration options.
The AR200 calibration page can be accessed using your Data master MFD; from the Homescreen
select: Settings > Network > Data sources > Heading > AR200 > Calibrate.

290
 1 Current reading:
The current heading reported by the AR200.
2 Maximum deviation at last calibration:
The maximum deviation reported during the last linearization process.
Important:
• If the Maximum deviation at last calibration is 45° or above, it is recommended
that the AR200 unit is moved and re-installed in a location which is subject to
less magnetic interference.
Calibration in progress:
While linearization is in progress the progress percentage is displayed.
3 Compass offset
Once the linearization process has completed, it is possible that the heading value
may be slightly out of alignment. This is common where installation space is limited
and the AR200 is not properly aligned with your vessel’s longitudinal axis. In this
case, it is possible to manually adjust the Compass offset.
4 Compass lock
When enabled, the Compass lock prevents the continual monitoring and adaptation
of the compass linearization process. For more information, refer to: Compass lock.
5 Reset calibration
You can reset your AR200’s current linearization settings by selecting Reset
calibration

Continual monitoring and adaptation

To ensure optimum performance, after the initial linearization process is complete the unit continues
to monitor and adapt the compass linearization to suit current conditions.
If the conditions for linearization are less than ideal, the automatic linearization process temporarily
pauses until conditions improve again. The following conditions can cause the linearization process
to temporarily pause:
• significant magnetic interference is present
• vessel speed too slow or too fast
• rate-of-turn too slow or too fast
ClearCruise (Object Detection and Augmented
Reality) 291
Compass lock
Once you are satisfied with the compass accuracy, you can lock the setting to prevent the autopilot
system from completing a further automatic linearization in the future.
This feature is particularly useful for vessels in environments that are exposed to strong magnetic
disturbances on a regular basis (such as offshore wind farms or very busy rivers, for example). In
these situations it may be desirable to use the Compass lock feature to disable the continuous
linearization process, as the magnetic interference may build a heading error over time.
Note: The compass lock may be released at any time, to allow the compass continual monitoring
and adaptation to re-commence. This is particularly useful if planning a long voyage. The earth’s
magnetic field will change significantly from one geographical location to another, and the
compass can continually compensate for the changes, ensuring you maintain accurate heading
data throughout the voyage.

292
Chapter 16: Audio app

Chapter contents
• 16.1 Audio app overview on page 294
• 16.2 Opening the Audio app on page 298
• 16.3 Getting started on page 300
• 16.4 Audio app menu options on page 302

Audio app 293

16.1 Audio app overview
The Audio app can be used to control compatible entertainment systems that are connected to the
same network as your MFD.
The Audio app can be displayed in Fullscreen and half screen portrait app pages.

1. Mute All — Mutes all zones on the currently selected system.

2. Currently selected zone.
3. System 1 available zones.
4. Audio source and controls for currently selected zone.
5. System 2 available zones.
6. Zone volume and player controls for currently selected zone.
7. Power — Power on or off connected entertainment systems.

Compatible entertainment systems

The table below lists compatible entertainment systems which have been approved for use with
the MFD Audio app. The Audio app can be used to control up to 3 entertainment systems from the
same manufacturer. However, connecting entertainment systems from Fusion and Rockford Fosgate
at the same time is NOT supported.

SiriusXM receivers
Supported Network
Model number Raymarine part number connection
SR150 E70161 Ethernet / RayNet
SR200 E70499 Ethernet / RayNet

294
Rockford Fosgate entertainment systems
Supported Network
Model number Raymarine part number connection
RMX-2 E70397 NMEA 2000
RMX8DH E70394 NMEA 2000
RMX8BB E70395 NMEA 2000
RMX5CAN E70396 NMEA 2000

Fusion entertainment systems

Model number Supported Network connection
AV750 NMEA 2000
Ethernet
AV755 NMEA 2000
Ethernet
BB100 NMEA 2000
BB300 NMEA 2000
RA70 NMEA 2000
RA70N NMEA 2000
RA205 NMEA 2000
RA670 NMEA 2000
Ethernet
RA770 NMEA 2000
Ethernet
SRX400 Ethernet
UD750 NMEA 2000
Ethernet
UD755 NMEA 2000
Ethernet

JL Audio
Model number Supported Network connection
MM50 NMEA 2000
MM100s-BE NMEA 2000
MMR-40 NMEA 2000

Note:
Connecting entertainment systems from Fusion and Rockford Fosgate at the same time is not
supported.

Audio app 295

Audio app controls
Audio player controls
Icon Description Function
Power Off Powers off the Entertainment system.

Mute All Mutes all audio zones.

Volume Down Decreases volume for current zone.

Volume Up Increases volume for current zone.

Forwards • Skip to the next track (USB and Bluetooth)

• Seek/Search Forward (Radio)
Note: For SiriusXM, channel control is not
available from an external audio head unit.

Backwards • Skip back to beginning of current track (USB

and Bluetooth)
• Seek/Search Backward (Radio)
Note: For SiriusXM, channel control is not
available from an external audio head unit.

Manual Tune • On (switches Forwards and Backwards icons

with Manual Tune icons)
• Off
Tune Up Manually searches up for radio
stations/channels.
Note: For SiriusXM, channel control is not
available from an external audio head unit.

Tune Down Manually searches down for radio

stations/channels.
Note: For SiriusXM, channel control is not
available from an external audio head unit.

296
 Icon Description Function
Repeat • Off
• Repeat Track
• Repeat All

Shuffle • On
• Off

Play Select to commence playback.

Pause Select to Pause playback.

Stop Select to Stop (Mute) Radio devices.

Like Like a track (Pandora only).

Dislike Dislike a track (Pandora only).

Radio presets Save your favorite radio stations/channels to 4

preset buttons. Press and hold to save, press
once to change to saved station/channel.
Note: For SiriusXM, channel control is not
available from an external audio head unit.

Audio app 297

Standard app controls
Icon Description Function
Menu icon Opens the app menu.

Home icon Takes you to the Homescreen.

Waypoint / MOB Place waypoint / activate Man overboard (MOB)

alarm.

Pilot icon Opens and closes the Pilot Sidebar

16.2 Opening the Audio app

The Audio app is opened by selecting an app page from the Homescreen that includes the Audio app.
Pre-requisites:
1. Ensure your Entertainment system(s) are compatible by checking the latest details available on
the Raymarine website. If in doubt please contact an authorized Raymarine dealer for advice.
2. Ensure you have installed your Entertainment system(s) in accordance with the documentation
that was supplied with the system.
The Audio app will open in 1 of 3 states:

Audio app displayed

If your Entertainment system is powered up and operational then the player controls are displayed
and can be used to control your system.

298
Entertainment system powered off
If all Entertainment systems are powered off then a Power icon is displayed for each connected
system. An icon is also displayed to power on All systems. Selecting the Power icon will switch your
Entertainment system on. Selecting the All icon will power on all connected systems.

No audio devices found

If the Audio app is opened soon after powering on your MFD, the ‘No audio device found’ message
may be displayed whilst the network is being established. If the message is displayed for more than
10 seconds, your MFD cannot connect to your Entertainment system(s). Ensure network and power
connections to your Entertainment system(s) and MFD are correct and free from damage and then
power cycle your system. If the Entertainment system(s) are still not displayed then refer to your
equipment’s installation documentation for further troubleshooting information.

Audio app 299

16.3 Getting started
Selecting an audio zone
If you have more than 1 zone configured, audio zones will be displayed on the left side of the screen.
All zones for all connected systems will be displayed, grouped by entertainment system.
1. Select the required zone.
Details of the audio source playing in that zone are displayed along with audio controls.
Tip
Refer to the instructions provided with your entertainment system for details on naming your
zones. This aids device and zone identification when multiple systems each with multiple zones
are connected.

Selecting an audio source

Before you can select an audio source from your MFD, the source must already be available to your
Entertainment system’s main control unit (“head unit”).
1. Select an audio source (mode) icon from the app Menu.
The currently selected zone will switch to the selected audio source. Depending on your
entertainment system all zones will change and play the same audio source, or you may be able to
play a different source on each zone. Check the instructions provided with your system for details.

Muting and unmuting

1. To mute the audio for all zones on all connected systems, select Mute All, located above the
zones on the top left of the screen.

When multiple systems are connected selecting Mute all will mute all zones on all connected
entertainment systems.

2. To Unmute a device select a zone for that device and then select Unmute.

Selecting Unmute will unmute all the zones for the selected entertainment system.

300
Browsing for tracks
You can browse USB and Bluetooth devices for tracks.

With the relevant USB or Bluetooth device selected as the audio source:
1. Select Tracks from the Menu.
The file browser is displayed.
2. Alternatively, you can select the current track’s details to open the file browser.
3. Browse to the file you want to play.
Wait for the file list to finish loading before selecting a track.

4. Select the track you want to play.

Browsing for stations / channels

You can browse available Radio stations/channels.
With the relevant Radio device selected as the audio source:
1. Select Stations or Channels from the Menu.
The station or channel browser is displayed.
2. Browse to and select the station or channel you want to listen to.
Note: For SiriusXM, channel control is not available from an external audio head unit.

Saving presets
Up to 4 presets can be saved for each Radio audio source (i.e.: AM Radio, FM Radio, Weather,
SiriusXM and Pandora).
1. Whilst listening to the station you want to save, press and hold the relevant Preset button for
approximately 3 seconds.

Powering off entertainment systems

Connected entertainment systems can be powered off using the Audio app.
With the Audio app displayed and the entertainment system powered on:
1. Select the Power icon located on the bottom left of the screen.
If only 1 entertainment system is connected then the entertainment system will power off. If
more than 1 entertainment system is connected then pop-over options are displayed allowing
you to choose the entertainment system to turn off, or you can select Power down all to power
off all connected systems.

Audio app 301

Tip
Refer to the instructions provided with your entertainment system for details on naming your device.
This aids device identification when multiple systems are connected.

16.4 Audio app menu options

Menu item Description Options
Tracks Enables you to browse for tracks on • Folder
USB/Bluetooth devices connected to your
• Play Queue
Entertainment system
Channels Provides a list of available SiriusXM channels Channel list
Note: For SiriusXM, channel control is not
available from an external audio head unit.

Stations Provides a list of available Pandora stations Station list

Audio sources Enables you to select an audio source • AM Radio
connected to your Entertainment system
• FM Radio
• Weather
• Sirius XM
• Pandora
• Auxiliary
• USB
• Bluetooth
• Airplay
• S/PDIF
Power Enables you to Power your Entertainment • On
system on and off
• Off
Displays the Settings page • Audio setting
• Page settings

302
Audio app settings menu

Audio settings tab

Menu item Description Options
Balance Allows you to control the left / • L = Left speakers up
right speaker balance of your to 100%
entertainment system speakers.
• Left = Right (Balance
centered)
• R = Right speakers up
to 100%
Fade Allows you to control the front / back • F = Front speakers up
speaker fade of your entertainment to 100%
system speakers.
• Front = Back (Fade
Note: centered)
Only available on Rockford • R = Rear speakers up
Fosgate entertainment systems. to 100%

Crossover (Low pass filter): Allows you to select the crossover • 60 Hz

frequency. The Low Pass Filter
• 80 Hz
(LPF) will block all audio frequencies
above the threshold you specify. • 120 Hz
Selecting APF (All Pass Filter) will
• APF
allow all frequencies.
Crossover (High pass filter): Allows you to select the crossover • 60 Hz
frequency. The High Pass Filter
• 80 Hz
(HPF) will block all audio frequencies
below the threshold you specify. • 120 Hz
Selecting APF (All Pass Filter) will
• APF
allow all frequencies.

Audio app 303

 Menu item Description Options
Multi-zone volume control: Allows you to select independent • Audio zones 1–12
audio zones that are controlled by
multi-zone volume control.
Note:
Only available on Fusion audio
devices with multi-zone control.

Reset: Performs a factory reset and power • Reset

cycle of the SR200.
Note:
Only available on Sirus SR200
devices.

Diagnostics mode: Displays the SR200’s diagnostic • Display diagnostics

information.
Note:
Only available on Sirus SR200
devices.

Page settings tab

Settings Description
Data Overlays Enables configuration of Data overlays
Edit split ratio Enables you to customize the position of the partitions in
splitscreen app pages.

Adjusting balance and fade controls

From the Audio settings menu: Menu > Audio settings
1. Select the Balance setting field or the Fade setting field.
The Adjustment slider control is displayed.
2. Place your finger on the White marker and then slide it left or right to adjust the setting the
required value, alternatively use a Rotary controller to adjust the setting the required value.

Note:
Fade controls are only available on Rockford Fosgate entertainment systems.

Adjusting multi-zone controls

From the Audio settings menu: Menu > Audio settings

304
1. You can choose which audio zones you want to change the volume of with multi-zone control by
selecting them from the list.

2. Multi-zone volume is adjusted from the Audio app home screen. Multi-zone volume control is
enabled by pressing the multi-zone button (the volume dial will turn purple), all volume changes
will affect audio zones selected from the Audio settings.
Note:
Multi-zone controls are only available on Fusion entertainment systems.

SR200 diagnostics mode

The SR200 diagnostic mode can be accessed from the audio settings menu from the master MFD on
the network. The diagnostics mode should be referred to when liaising with Sirius product support.

1. Reset — Performs a factory reset and power cycle of the SR200.

2. Diagnostics mode — Displays the SR200’s diagnostic information.

Audio app 305

306
Chapter 17: PDF Viewer app

Chapter contents
• 17.1 PDF Viewer app overview on page 308
• 17.2 Opening PDF files on page 308
• 17.3 PDF Viewer controls on page 308
• 17.4 Searching a PDF on page 310

PDF Viewer app 307

17.1 PDF Viewer app overview
The PDF Viewer app can be used to browse and open PDF files located on your external storage
device(s).
A typical use for the PDF viewer is to display Raymarine product handbooks that you have
downloaded from the Raymarine website (www.raymarine.com/manuals). PDF files must first be
copied to a MicroSD card using an external device (such as a PC or tablet). You can then insert the
MicroSD card into your MFD’s card slot, and access the PDF file(s) via the PDF Viewer app.
Note:
• The PDF Viewer app requires Lighthouse software version 3.10 or later.
• Secured PDF documents (encrypted with certificate or password) are not supported.

17.2 Opening PDF files

When opened, the PDF Viewer app allows you to browse PDF files available on your external storage
device(s).
Select Browse to open a PDF file.
Recently-viewed files are displayed on the right-hand side of the initial app start screen, for quick
access. These files can be opened, pinned to the top of the list, or removed from the list.
To access these options, long-hold touch on a filename to display the context menu.
Note:
• Recent files cannot be opened if the files are deleted or the external storage device is removed.
• A maximum of 15 of the most recent files can be shown in the pinned and unpinned recent
files list.

17.3 PDF Viewer controls

When a PDF file is displayed in the PDF Viewer app, the following options are available.

308
1. First page — Select to display the first page of the PDF document.
2. Page back — Select to display the previous page.
3. Pages — Indicates current page and total number of pages. You can also tap this element
and enter a specific page number.
4. Page forward — Select to display the next page.
5. Last page — Select to display the last page of the PDF document.
6. Zoom out — Select to zoom out, in 10% increments.
7. Zoom in — Select to zoom in, in 10% increments.
8. Find — Select to display the onscreen keyboard and enter a search word or phrase.
9. Fit page width — Zoom the document display to fit the width of the PDF page.
10. Fit page height — Zoom the document display to fit the height of the PDF page.
11. Close PDF — Closes the PDF and displays the initial PDF Viewer app start screen.
12. Settings — Displays the Settings menu, which allows you to add data overlays to the PDF
Viewer app.

PDF Viewer app 309

17.4 Searching a PDF
You can search a PDF document for a word or phrase using the Find function.

With the PDF displayed in the viewer:

1. Select Find.
2. Enter the word or search term.
3. Select FIND.
The document will scroll to the first occurrence of the searched term, which will be highlighted. Use
the Right arrow and Left arrow controls to cycle to the previous or next occurrence of the search
term. You can also search for another term by selecting Find and entering a new term, or you can
cancel the find function by selecting Cancel.

310
Chapter 18: UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle) app

Chapter contents
• 18.1 UAV disclaimer on page 312
• 18.2 UAV app overview on page 312
• 18.3 UAV pre-requisites on page 314
• 18.4 UAV precautions on page 316
• 18.5 Getting started on page 317
• 18.6 UAV app page on page 317
• 18.7 Opening the UAV app on page 318
• 18.8 Launching the UAV on page 320
• 18.9 Controlling the UAV in flight on page 320
• 18.10 Retrieving your UAV on page 321
• 18.11 Disconnect UAV remote controller from MFD on page 321
• 18.12 Fish on / Circle me mode on page 321
• 18.13 UAV Chart integration on page 322
• 18.14 UAV Emergency procedures on page 323

UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle) app 311

18.1 UAV disclaimer
The UAV app allows the FLIR multifunction display (“MFD”) to serve as an auxiliary controller for
approved unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV) models. You are responsible for your own conduct while
using the UAV and for any consequences thereof. You must use the UAV in accordance with all
applicable legal regulations and safety recommendations of the UAV manufacturer. The primary
controller should be readily accessible at all times while using the MFD as an auxiliary controller.
FLIR accepts no liability for any damage, loss or injury caused by the UAV, whether caused by the
use of the MFD or any other FLIR product. Particular attention must be paid to landing the UAV which
must be done by the primary controller and not the MFD. By selecting continue, you confirm that
you understand and accept these conditions.

18.2 UAV app overview

Axiom (Axiom™, Axiom™ Pro and Axiom™ XL) MFDs include the UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle) app,
which enables you to control a DJI Mavic Pro or Mavic Pro Platinum UAV using your MFD. The UAV
app provides auxiliary remote controls, settings, video display and flight data for your connected UAV.
UAVs and MFDs have a one-to-one relationship, meaning that you can only control a UAV from
the MFD that it is physically connected to. On an MFD network, each MFD can be connected to
a different UAV, if required.

1 Record
Start recording your UAV’s video feed to a memory card inserted into the UAV’s
memory card slot. While recording, the Record icon is replaced with a Stop icon and a
time counter is displayed.
2 Take photo
Take a screenshot of what is currently displayed in the UAV’s video feed. The image is
saved to a memory card inserted into the UAV’s memory card slot.
3 Menu
Opens the UAV app menu.
4 Gimbal pitch control
Adjusts the pitch of the UAV’s camera gimbal, from pointing forwards (control at top of
slider) to pointing straight down (control at bottom of slider).

312
 5 Flight data
Distance, Speed and Height data is displayed onscreen.
Note:
Displayed Flight data is specific to the UAV app and cannot be edited.

6 Controls
Provides access to the onscreen virtual joystick controls.
7 Status area
The status area provides the:
• signal strength of the UAV’s GNSS (GPS) position fix.
• signal strength from remote controller to UAV.
• battery charge state.
• flight time remaining.
• identification of restricted no fly zones.
8 Virtual joystick
Provides Up, Down, Turn left and Turn right controls.
9 Virtual joystick
Provides Forward, Backward, Move left and Move right controls.

Note:
• The UAV app is not available on eS Series and gS Series MFDs.
• On an Axiom XL MFD the UAV connects to the same connection as a remote card reader.
Therefore, on a standalone Axiom XL MFD installation, electronic cartography, via a chart card,
will NOT be available at the same time as a connection to your UAV. Only pre-loaded world
basemaps will be available in the Chart application.

Compatible UAVs
Currently the UAVs listed below are supported:
• Mavic Pro by DJI
• Mavic Pro Platinum by DJI
• Mavic 2 Pro by DJI
• Mavic 2 Zoom by DJI
Connection to any other UAV is not approved and is performed at your own risk.

UAV sport mode

When your UAV is in Sport mode (S-Mode), control via your MFD is limited.
In Sport mode the following MFD controls are disabled virtual joystick, Gimbal pitch control, Take
off, Return to boat and Fish on / Circle me.

UAV app settings menu

You should check and configure the settings listed in the Advanced settings menu before attempting
to operate your UAV.

Advanced
Settings Description
Initial height after take-off: Specifies the height at which the UAV will hover once it has
taken off.
Minimum safe height during UAV Specifies the minimum safe height of the UAV when
goto: performing a Goto.

UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle) app 313

 Settings Description
Action if remote control signal is If your UAV loses connection to the remote controller then you
lost: can select whether your UAV Hovers in its current location
or performs a Return to boat.
Minimum height: Specifies the minimum height of the UAV when performing
a Return to boat.
Return distance: Specifies the distance from your vessel the UAV will reach
when performing a Return to boat.
Height: Specifies the initial height of the UAV when performing a Fish
on / Circle me.
Distance: Specifies the initial distance from your vessel when performing
a Fish on / Circle me.

Page settings
Settings Description
Data Overlays Enables configuration of Data overlays
Edit split ratio Enables you to customize the position of the partitions in
splitscreen app pages.

Data overlays in the UAV app are separate from the Flight data information.

18.3 UAV pre-requisites

Before you can use the MFD’s UAV app with your UAV you must have:
• set up your UAV in accordance with the instructions provided with the device.
• registered your UAV using the applicable DJI app (e.g.: DJI GO 4) on your mobile device.
• gained experience of launching, flying and retrieving your UAV.
• removed the RC cable from the side of your UAV’s remote controller.
• ensured the remote controller is not in Sport mode.
• Created a UAV app page icon on the MFD’s Homescreen.

Removing the RC cable

The RC cable used for connecting the UAV’s primary controller to a mobile device must be removed,
before connecting the controller to your MFD.

314
UAV controller connection
Your MFD’s accessory connection must be connected to your UAV’s primary remote controller using
a USB “Micro B” to USB “A” cable.
Note:
• The UAV can NOT be connected to your MFD via the RCR-SDUSB. The card reader must be
disconnected to enable connection to a UAV.
• The UAV can only be controlled by the MFD that the controller is connected to.

UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle) app 315

 Important:
Ensure that the USB connection to your MFD is secure and protected against water ingress.

18.4 UAV precautions

Operating your UAV over water and launching and retrieving your UAV on a vessel can be a
significantly different experience than when on land.
The following precautions should be followed:
• You will need to be an experienced, competent pilot as launching and retrieving the UAV on a
vessel is more difficult due to confined space and vessel movement / drift.
• Only launch your UAV in calm wind and tide conditions. When attempting to launch or retrieve
your UAV your vessel should be travelling at less than 1 knot and your captain should be ready at
the helm to back down or maneuver the vessel to avoid accidental collisions
• Maintain awareness of your UAV’s battery status, remaining flight time, distance from your vessel
and Wind and Tide conditions. A UAV flying against the wind will consume battery power more
rapidly than when flying downwind or in calm conditions. Always budget sufficient power reserves
to ensure the safe return and retrieval of your UAV.
• Maintain a permanent watch of your UAV while in flight. The UAV pilot or competent observer
must maintain awareness of surrounding air and marine traffic while the UAV is in flight. The pilot
must remain ready to take control of the UAV and manually fly it to avoid interfering with other
vessels or aircraft.
• While your UAV’s controller is connected to your MFD it should be positioned so that it maintains
line of sight with your airborne UAV. If the controller is not hand held then it must be secured to
prevent it becoming disconnected from your MFD and to prevent unintentional button presses.

316
No-fly zones
It is illegal to fly your UAV in no-fly zones. No fly zones include:
• Airports
• Airfields
• Country borders
• Sensitive institutions
The Remote controller and the MFD will alert you that there is a no-fly zone. Your UAV will not enter
the restricted airspace covered by a no-fly zone. You will also be unable to launch your UAV in
restricted airspace. Please refer to the DJI app or the DJI website for more information on no-fly
zones and their locations.

18.5 Getting started

Initial steps to get up and running with your UAV.
1. Using a USB A to USB Micro B cable, connect the Micro B end of the cable to the Accessory
connection on the rear of your MFD.
2. Power on the MFD.
3. Obtain a GNSS (GPS) position fix on the MFD.
4. Open the UAV app.
5. Connect the MFD to the internet. (An internet connection is only required the first time you open
the UAV app, after a Factory reset, or after an MFD software update).

Ensure that an internet connection is available on your MFD at the point of registration. If your
vessel is likely to be out-of-range of cellular or satellite internet service at registration time, you
will need to register the UAV before heading out on the water.

6. Wait for successful registration.

7. Power on the UAV’s remote controller.
8. Power on the UAV.
9. Wait for the UAV to obtain a GNSS (GPS) position fix and for the “Ready to go” message to be
displayed on the remote controller’s screen.
10. Connect the USB A end of the USB cable to the relevant connection on the UAV’s remote
controller.

18.6 UAV app page

The UAV app is not displayed on the Homescreen by default. To open the UAV app you must first
create a UAV app page icon on your MFD’s Homescreen.
UAV control features are integrated with the Chart app; when creating a UAV app page it is
recommended that you create a splitscreen Chart / UAV app page.
Follow the instructions detailed in the 5.4 Creating / Customizing an app page section for information
on creating an app page. Chart / UAV splitscreen app pages will be set to a 30/70 page split by
default.

UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle) app 317

18.7 Opening the UAV app
The UAV app is opened from the Homescreen by selecting an app page icon that includes the
UAV app.
The first time you open the UAV app and after each power cycle, a disclaimer is displayed. By
selecting Continue you are agreeing to the terms of this disclaimer.
The UAV app will then open in 1 of 3 states:

No Wi-Fi connection

The first time you open the UAV app, after an MFD factory reset, or after you have updated your
MFD’s software, the UAV app must be registered using an internet connection on your MFD. Select
Wi-Fi Settings to create an internet connection.

When registration is complete, if desired you can turn off your Wi-Fi connection by selecting Wi-Fi
Settings and turning off your MFD’s Wi-Fi. Selecting OK will close the info box keeping your Wi-Fi
connection turned on.

318
Registration failed

The registration failed notification is displayed if the DJI servers cannot be reached. Registration will
be re-attempted automatically. If the failure persists, check your Wi-Fi and internet or try again later.

No connection detected

After successful registration, the ‘No connection detected’ notification is displayed. Connect the
USB A end of your USB cable to the UAV’s primary controller. Once a successful connection is
established, the notification will be closed.

UAV app

Once your UAV is correctly set up and connected to your MFD and your MFD’s UAV app is registered
successfully, the UAV’s video feed is displayed and the app is ready to be used as an auxiliary
controller for your UAV.

UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle) app 319

18.8 Launching the UAV
When it is safe to do so you can use the UAV app to launch your UAV.

Prior to launch ensure that all necessary precautions have been taken to ensure no loss, damage or
injury can occur.
1. Ensure your UAV is correctly connected and configured.
2. Ensure you have set an Initial height after take-off: in the appropriate Advanced settings menu:
Menu > Settings > Advanced > Initial height after take-off:

Height needs to be sufficient so that your UAV will not collide with your vessel’s sails, masts,
rigging etc. or any other structure.

3. Place your UAV in an open space with sufficient room to launch unobstructed, taking into
consideration the effects of wind direction and speed, tide direction and speed and the drift
of your own vessel.
4. Select Take off from the UAV menu.
5. Select Yes to confirm take off.

The UAV will take off and lift to the height specified in step 2 above and hover.

The Take off can be cancelled at anytime by selecting the Red Cancel Take Off button. When
Cancel Take Off is selected the UAV will stop and hover in its current position. If required, you can
then use manual control to retrieve your UAV.

18.9 Controlling the UAV in flight

When in flight you can control the UAV using the onscreen virtual joysticks.
1. Select the Controls icon to display the Virtual joysticks.
2. The Virtual joysticks include controls for: Up, Down, Turn left, Turn right, Forwards, Backwards,
Move left and Move right.
3. Use the Gimbal pitch control to move the UAV’s camera to the required position.
4. If desired, use the Record and Take photo icons to record footage of your flight.
Note:
The Virtual joysticks take priority over your UAV’s remote controller’s joysticks, To use the remote
controller’s joysticks hide the Virtual joysticks by selecting the Controls icon.

320
18.10 Retrieving your UAV
To retrieve your UAV follow the instructions below:
1. Ensure that the Minimum height and Return distance settings are adequate for current
conditions (Minimum height and Return distance can be adjusted from the Advanced settings
menu: Menu > Settings > Advanced.
2. When you are ready to retrieve your UAV select the Return to boat option from the UAV app
menu: Menu > Return to boat.
The UAV will return to your vessel’s location within the specified Return distance and Minimum
height, based on your MFD’s current GNSS (GPS) position.

3. Once your UAV has reached the Return to boat position use the UAV’s remote controller to
manually retrieve your UAV safely.
Note:
The Return home manoeuvre can be cancelled at any time by selecting the Red, onscreen Cancel
return to boat option. Once selected the UAV will stop and hover in its current position.

18.11 Disconnect UAV remote controller from MFD

When you have finished using the UAV app it is recommended that you disconnect the USB cable
from the UAV’s remote controller.
Before performing a MFD Factory reset, or software update, ensure that your UAV’s remote controller
is either powered off or disconnected from your MFD.

18.12 Fish on / Circle me mode

When Fish on / Circle me mode is activated your UAV will launch and circle your vessel, maintaining
its camera’s view on your vessel and recording the camera’s video feed. Fish on / Circle me mode
can also be initiated when your UAV is already in flight.
When your UAV is in Fish on / Circle me mode you should ensure your vessel speed does not
exceed 10 knots or the UAV may not be able to keep up with your vessel. If your UAV cannot keep
up slow your vessel speed.

UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle) app 321

 1 Cancel Fish On / Cancel Circle me
Selecting Cancel Fish On / Cancel Circle me will stop Fish On / Circle me mode and
the UAV will hover in its current location. If required you can manually stop recording
by selecting the Stop icon.
2 UAV icon
The UAV icon can be displayed in the Chart app. The icon includes a camera heading
graphic, a Course Over Ground (COG) vector and a line linking your vessel icon
to your UAV icon.
3 Virtual joystick
In Fish On / Circle me mode the left virtual joystick provides Up and Down controls to
adjust the UAV’s distance from your vessel.
4 Rotation
The Rotation slider control is used to adjust the UAV’s direction of rotation and rotation
speed. With the control on the slider center line the UAV will maintain position in
relation to your vessel. Moving the slider right of the slider center line rotates the
UAV counter-clockwise and moving the slider control to the left of the center line
rotates the UAV clockwise. The farther left or right the slider control is set the faster
the rotation speed will be.
5 Virtual joystick
In Fish On / Circle me mode the right virtual joystick provides Forward and Backwards
controls to adjust the UAV’s height from your vessel.

Note:
During your initial MFD configuration the boating Activity you selected will determine whether
the function is labelled Fish on or Circle me. If Fishing (freshwater), Fishing (saltwater) or
Retail/demonstration is selected then the function is labelled Fish on, otherwise the function
is labelled Circle me.

18.13 UAV Chart integration

When a compatible UAV with a GNSS (GPS) position fix is connected to your MFD, a UAV icon
representing the position of the UAV is displayed in the Chart app.

322
 1 UAV COG
The direction of the Blue line indicates the UAV’s current Course Over Ground
(COG). The length of the line indicates the UAV’s predicted position when the
specified vector Reference period has passed.
The Vector Reference period can be adjusted from the vessel icon’s context menu.
2 UAV Icon
Displayed when the UAV option is enabled in the Chart app settings, and your UAV
has a GNSS (GPS) position fix.
3 Camera heading
The Black Camera heading arrow is fixed to provide an indication of the direction
the UAV’s camera is pointing towards.
4 Line to vessel
The Yellow dotted line represents the angle of the UAV’s position relative to your
vessel.

Showing or hiding the UAV icon

The UAV icon is displayed by default in the Chart app. The icon can be hidden if required.
From the Chart app menu:
1. Select Settings.
2. Select the Layers tab.
3. Select the UAV: toggle switch.
Selecting the UAV toggle switch will make the UAV icon visible (on) or invisible (off).

Performing a UAV Goto

When your UAV is in flight you can select a location or object in the Chart app and perform a UAV
Goto (your UAV will fly to the selected location or object and hover).
1. Select a location or object in the Chart app.
The Chart context menu is displayed.
2. Select More.
3. Select UAV Goto.
A UAV waypoint marker is placed to signify the UAV’s destination and the UAV will fly to that
location.
You can stop a UAV Goto at anytime by selecting the Red Cancel UAV Goto that is displayed
onscreen in the UAV app, when a UAV Goto is active. Cancelling a UAV Goto will stop the Goto
action and the UAV will hover in its current location.
A UAV Goto can be cancelled at any time by selecting Stop UAV Goto from the Chart context menu.

18.14 UAV Emergency procedures

The guidance below is intended to provide details of steps taken automatically by your UAV, and any
manual intervention that may be required in certain situations.
Controller signal to UAV lost
In the event that your UAV loses its connection to the primary controller, the UAV will perform 1 of 2
actions, depending on your selection in the Advanced setting menu: Menu > Settings > Advanced >
Action if remote control signal lost:.
• Hover — The UAV will stop and hover in its current location. You should maneuver your vessel
towards your UAV’s position and attempt to re-establish control. When control is re-established it
is recommended that you retrieve the UAV and inspect it immediately.
• Return to boat — The UAV will perform a Return to boat maneuver and hover at the Return
distance and Minimum height specified in the Return to boat settings:
– Menu > Settings > Advanced > Minimum height
– Menu > Settings > Advanced > Return distance

UAV (Unmanned Aerial Vehicle) app 323

If connection between the Remote controller and UAV is not re-established, your UAV will attempt to
land.

Low battery warnings

Ensure while flying your UAV that you remain aware of the remaining flight time and distance from
your vessel at all times. You must return your UAV to your vessel and safely retrieve it before a low
battery warning occurs. The UAV app will mirror the UAV’s primary controller battery state warnings.
• Normal low battery level warning — when the UAV reaches normal low battery level, in addition
to the remote controller’s audible and visual warnings a warning is also displayed on your MFD.
You should immediately return the UAV to your vessel and retrieve.
• Critical low battery warning — when the UAV reaches critical low battery level, your UAV will
automatically perform a Return to boat maneuver and attempt to land. It is not recommended
that you allow your UAV to reach critical low battery while in flight, as it could result in damage
or loss of your UAV.

Assuming manual control

The UAV pilot has the ability to take manual control of the UAV at any time. Manual control may be
required for normal in-flight maneuvering or positioning, or in emergency situations. The methods of
assuming manual control are as follows:
• Virtual joysticks will need to be hidden, using the Controls icon before control is returned to
the Remote controller.
• Enabling Sport mode on the UAV’s Remote controller at any time will override MFD controls. Fly
with caution, as flight characteristics change in Sport mode.
• In an emergency, unplugging the USB cable from the Remote controller will override the MFD
controls and immediately restore manual control to the Remote controller.

324
Chapter 19: LightHouse third-party apps

Chapter contents
• 19.1 LightHouse app launcher on page 326
• 19.2 Lighthouse third-party apps - Preloaded on page 327
• 19.3 Lighthouse third-party apps - Downloadable on page 328
• 19.4 Installing Lighthouse third-party apps on page 328
• 19.5 Internet connection on page 329
• 19.6 Bluetooth speaker set up on page 330

LightHouse third-party apps 325

19.1 LightHouse app launcher
The app launcher provides a range of approved third-party apps on your MFD.
Important: The LightHouse app launcher and its associated third-party apps are not available
on eS Series and gS Series MFDs.

Select Apps from the Homescreen to open the app launcher page.

Selecting an app icon will launch the app. Selecting the Wi-Fi connection status button, located on
the top right of the screen, will open the Wi-Fi connection settings to enable you to connect to
the internet over Wi-Fi.
Apps may run in the background, enabling you to use your MFD as usual whilst, for instance,
listening to music.
MFD alarms will be displayed and sounded as normal whilst using LightHouse third-party apps. When
paired with a Bluetooth speaker, alarms will also be sounded through the speaker.
Bluetooth speaker volume can be controlled from the Shortcuts page or from the Status bar area
on the Homescreen.
Note:
• Some app features or access to the apps may require your MFD to have an internet connection.
• If you use a wireless connection to a Quantum Radar, the Radar should be put in Standby before
connecting your MFD to the internet.
• Some apps may also require an audio output. You can pair a Bluetooth speaker with your
MFD to enable audio output.
• Raymarine does not provide support for third-party apps or any related third-party hardware.
Please refer to the relevant third party app developer for assistance and troubleshooting.

LightHouse third-party apps

LightHouse™ third-party apps are apps that have been developed by third parties and approved for
use on the LightHouse™ 3 operating system.
Note:
Raymarine does not provide support for third-party apps or any related third-party hardware.
Please refer to the relevant third party app developer for assistance and troubleshooting.
Raymarine does not warrant that LightHouse™ third-party apps are error-free, and will not be held
liable for damages or injuries caused by improper or inappropriate use of these apps.

Warning: Maintain a permanent watch

Do NOT navigate whilst distracted by entertainment apps. Failure to maintain a
permanent watch puts yourself, your vessel and others at serious risk of harm.

326
19.2 Lighthouse third-party apps - Preloaded
Below is a list of Lighthouse third-party apps preloaded to your MFD and details for each.
Netflix
• Requires Lighthouse Software version 3.4 or later.
• Requires internet connection.
• Log in using your existing subscription or join free for a month directly from the app.
• Refer to Netflix (www.netflix.com) for details.
Spotify
• Requires Lighthouse Software version 3.4 or later.
• Requires internet connection.
• Log in using your existing subscription or join free directly from the app.
• Refer to Spotify (www.spotify.com ) for details.
Lumishore
• Requires Lighthouse Software version 3.5 or later.
• Requires compatible Lumishore hardware to be powered on and connected to the
same network as your MFD.
• Refer to Lumishore (www.lumishore.com) for details.
Mazu
• Requires Lighthouse Software version 3.5 or later.
• Requires compatible Mazu-marine hardware to be powered on and connected to
the same network as your MFD.
• Refer to Mazu (www.mazu-marine.com) for details.
Seakeeper
• Requires Lighthouse Software version 3.7 or later.
• Requires compatible Seakeeper hardware to be powered on and connected to the
same network as your MFD.
• Refer to Seakeeper (www.seakeeper.com ) for details.
Shadow-Caster
• Requires Lighthouse Software version 3.10 or later.
• Requires compatible Shadow-Caster hardware to be powered on and connected to
the same network as your MFD.
• Refer to Shadow-Caster (https://shadow-caster.com/) for details.
Victron Energy
• Requires Lighthouse Software version 3.11 or later.
• Requires compatible Victron Energy hardware to be powered on and connected to
the same network as your MFD.
• Refer to Victron Energy (https://www.victronenergy.com/marine -mfd-gx-integration)
for details.

LightHouse third-party apps 327

19.3 Lighthouse third-party apps - Downloadable
Below is a list of Lighthouse third-party apps that can be downloaded to your MFD and details for
each.
Note:
• Lighthouse third-party apps can be downloaded from: http://www.raymarine.com/multifunction-
displays/lighthouse3/lighthouse-apps/
• For more information on installing Lighthouse third-party apps refer to:
p.328 — Installing Lighthouse third-party apps

GRIBview
• Requires Lighthouse Software version 3.4 or later.
• Requires internet connection to download weather data directly to your MFD.
Weather data can also be downloaded and placed on external storage for
viewing at a later time (when your MFD has no internet connection available).
• Log in using your existing Theyr subscription or register for free account directly
from the app.
Note: It is not currently possible to log in to the app using an existing
Raymarine LightHouse 2 subscription to Theyr weather.

• Refer to Theyr (www.theyr.com ) for details.

Buoyweather
• Requires Lighthouse Software version 3.10 or later.
• Requires internet connection.
• Log in using your existing subscription or join directly from the app.
• Refer to Buoyweather (http://www.buoyweather.com/ ) for details.
PredictWind
• Requires Lighthouse Software version 3.10 or later.
• Requires internet connection.
• Log in using your existing subscription or join directly from the app.
• Refer to PredictWind (https://www.predictwind.com/) for details.
Offshore
• Requires Lighthouse Software version 3.10 or later.
• Requires internet connection to download weather predictions. App can still
display predictions if internet connectivity is lost. Weather predictions will update
when internet connection is restored.
• Log in using your existing subscription or join directly from the app.
• Refer to PredictWind (https://www.predictwind.com/) for details.

19.4 Installing Lighthouse third-party apps

Additional Lighthouse third-party apps can be installed on your MFD via an SD card or USB.
Note: Only APK-approved Lighthouse third-party apps can be installed on your MFD. APK-approved
Lighthouse third-party apps can be downloaded from: http://www.raymarine.co.uk/lighthouse-apps/
To install Lighthouse third-party apps:
1. Insert SD card or USB device into your MFD or external card reader.
2. From the App Launcher page, select Install from SD / USB.

328
3. Select the SD card or USB device that contains the third-party app file.
4. Select the APK file and it will automatically install on your MFD.
5. The app will be located on the App Launcher page.
Note: You can uninstall Lighthouse third-party apps from your MFD by long pressing them and
selecting uninstall.

19.5 Internet connection

Connecting to the internet
From the Homescreen:
1. Select Apps.
The app launcher is displayed.
2. Select the Wi-Fi connection status button, located on the top right of the app launcher page.
The Wi-Fi settings page is displayed and will scan for available networks.
3. Select the relevant connection.
4. Enter the password for the network and select Connect.
Your MFD will now connect to the chosen network.
5. Select the Back triangle symbol or the Home Circle symbol at the bottom of the screen.
You can now use LightHouse™ apps that require an internet connection.

Wi-Fi settings

1. Wi-Fi options — Provides the following options:

• Add network — Manually add a network.
• Saved networks — View a list of all saved networks.
• Refresh — Rescan available networks.
• Advanced — View advanced network settings.
2. Enable/Disable Wi-Fi.
3. Connected access point.
4. Available access points.
5. Back button.

LightHouse third-party apps 329

6. Home button

19.6 Bluetooth speaker set up

Enabling and disabling Bluetooth

1. Select the Status bar area located in the top right of the screen.
2. Select Bluetooth Settings.
3. Select the Toggle switch on the right of the Bluetooth settings page to enable Bluetooth.
Alternatively the Bluetooth settings page can be accessed from the This display settings tab:
Homescreen > Settings > This display > Bluetooth > Bluetooth settings.

Bluetooth Settings

1. Bluetooth options — Provides the following options:

• Refresh — Selecting refreshes the list of available devices.
• Rename this device — Allows you to rename the Bluetooth name your MFD uses.
• Show file received — Not used as your MFD cannot receive files over Bluetooth.
2. Paired devices — List of devices paired with your ~MFD.
3. Enable/Disable Bluetooth.
4. Paired device settings — Allows you to rename the paired device or forget the device.
5. Available devices — List of available Bluetooth devices.
6. MFD Bluetooth name.
7. Back button.

330
8. Home button.

Pairing a Bluetooth speaker

Before attempting to pair with a Bluetooth speaker, ensure that the speaker is switched on and
discoverable.
With your MFD’s Bluetooth enabled:
1. From the Bluetooth settings page, select the relevant device from the Available devices list.
2. If requested, confirm the bluetooth pairing code.
If pairing is successful the speaker will appear in the Paired devices list and display the Connected
message.

Bluetooth volume control

When your MFD is connected to a Bluetooth speaker, controls will be available to adjust speaker
volume.

Homescreen

From the Homescreen select the Status area and then select the Speaker symbol to display the
Bluetooth volume control for LightHouse™ app and MFD alarms.

Shortcuts page

Press or swipe the Power button to display the Shortcuts page and then select the speaker symbol
to display the Bluetooth volume control for LightHouse™ apps and MFD alarms.

LightHouse third-party apps 331

332
Chapter 20: Mobile app support

Chapter contents
• 20.1 Raymarine mobile apps on page 334
• 20.2 Connect to Wi-Fi - Android on page 334
• 20.3 Connect to Wi-Fi - iOS on page 335
• 20.4 Controlling your MFD using RayControl on page 335
• 20.5 Controlling your MFD using RayRemote on page 336
• 20.6 Viewing your MFD screen using RayView on page 337
• 20.7 Navionics plotter sync on page 337
• 20.8 Fishidy sync on page 337

Mobile app support 333

20.1 Raymarine mobile apps
Please check the relevant app store for Raymarine mobile apps.

Note: When updating your MFD software ensure that you check for updates to your mobile apps.

20.2 Connect to Wi-Fi - Android

Connect your Android device to the MFD Wi-Fi.
Open your Android device’s Wi-Fi from the top drop down menu or via Settings.
Homescreen > Settings > Connections > Wi-Fi

1. Enable Wi-Fi by setting the toggle to on (blue) and select your MFD from the available networks.
2. Enter your MFD’s Wi-Fi password and select connect.
Make sure the password you enter is case sensitive.

334
3. When your Android device is connected to your MFD’s Wi-Fi it will display connected under
the MFD’s name.
For troubleshooting advice refer to p.352 — Wi-Fi troubleshooting

20.3 Connect to Wi-Fi - iOS

Connect your iOS device to the MFD Wi-Fi.
Open your iOS device’s Wi-Fi from the top drop down menu or via Settings.
Homescreen > Settings > Wi-Fi

1. Enable Wi-Fi by setting the toggle to on (green) and select your MFD from the available networks.
2. Enter your MFD’s Wi-Fi password and select join.

Make sure the password you enter is case sensitive.

3. When your iOS device is connected to your MFD’s Wi-Fi it will display a tick next to the MFD’s
name.
For troubleshooting advice refer to p.352 — Wi-Fi troubleshooting

20.4 Controlling your MFD using RayControl

The RayControl app allows you to remotely view and control your MFD from your mobile device.
1. Download and install RayControl from your app store.
2. Ensure your mobile device is connected to your MFD’s Wi-Fi.
3. Open the RayControl app.
4. Control your MFD using your mobile device’s touchscreen in the same way you would interact
with the MFD’s touchscreen.
5. You can also use a representation of an Axiom Pro’s or RMK remote’s physical buttons by
sliding the controls sidebar out from the right of the screen or on smaller devices selecting
Remote Control.

Mobile app support 335

20.5 Controlling your MFD using RayRemote
The RayRemote app allows you to remotely control your MFD from your mobile device.

336
1. Download and install RayRemote from your app store.
2. Ensure your mobile device is connected to your MFD’s Wi-Fi.
3. Open the RayRemote app.
4. Control your MFD on your mobile device using the on-screen equivalents of the physical buttons
found on the Axiom Pro MFD or RMK remote keypad.

20.6 Viewing your MFD screen using RayView

The RayView app allows you to remotely view your MFD from your mobile device.

1. Download and install RayView from your app store.

2. Ensure your mobile device is connected to your MFD’s Wi-Fi.
3. Open the RayView app.
4. Your mobile device’s screen will now mirror your MFD’s screen.

20.7 Navionics plotter sync

You can use the Navionics boating mobile app to:
• transfer waypoints and routes between your MFD and mobile device.
• update, activate and renew your Navionics cartography

20.8 Fishidy sync

You can synchronize Fishidy Spots and Waypoints between the Fishidy app and your MFD’s Chart
app.
Note:
Fishidy sync requires:
• Fishidy software version 6.1.0 or later.
• Lighthouse software version 3.11 or later.

Mobile app support 337

 Note:
Fishidy is currently available in:
• North America
Additional regions will become available in future Fishidy updates.

Enable sync
After connecting your mobile device to your MFD’s Wi-Fi, you can begin syncing waypoints and
Fishidy spots with the Fishidy app.
1. From the Fishidy app select More.
2. Select Raymarine Sync.
3. Select Enable Sync to begin synchronization between your Fishidy app and MFD.

4. When prompted by your MFD, select Yes to confirm sync.

338
 If you select No, sync will be cancelled and will need to be restarted.

Once enabled, data will automatically sync in real-time across both devices via Wi-Fi.
Note:
• Fishidy Spots and Waypoints will be shared and can be interacted with from both devices.
• Your private waypoints remain private, whether viewing on Fishidy or your Raymarine MFD
system.
• If you edit a Fishidy Spot or Waypoint on either device when sync is disabled (e.g. editing the
name), re-enabling sync might place the item in the Fishidy Recycle Bin. In this scenario, the
data can be restored from the recycling bin in the Fishidy app.
• Attempting to sync a new Fishidy account to your MFD while it is already synced with another
account will prompt you to end sync with the first account. Ending sync with the first account and
syncing the second account replaces any existing Fishidy Spots and Waypoints.

Disable sync
You can disable Fishidy sync from the Fishidy app or your MFD.
1. Fishidy app
i. Access the Raymarine Sync menu and select Disable Sync.
ii. More > Raymarine Sync > Disable Synce
2. MFD
i. Access the My Data page, select Mobile sync and select Disable sync.
ii. Homescreen > My Data > Mobile sync > Disable sync

Mobile app support 339

340
Chapter 21: Troubleshooting

Chapter contents
• 21.1 Troubleshooting on page 342
• 21.2 Diagnostic product information on page 342
• 21.3 Power up troubleshooting on page 343
• 21.4 Radar troubleshooting on page 345
• 21.5 GNSS (GPS) troubleshooting on page 346
• 21.6 Sonar troubleshooting on page 346
• 21.7 Camera troubleshooting on page 349
• 21.8 Augmented Reality (AR) Troubleshooting on page 351
• 21.9 Wi-Fi troubleshooting on page 352
• 21.10 Wireless display troubleshooting on page 354
• 21.11 Data troubleshooting on page 355
• 21.12 Touchscreen troubleshooting on page 355

Troubleshooting 341
21.1 Troubleshooting
The troubleshooting information provides possible causes and corrective action required for common
problems associated with installation and operation of your product.
Before packing and shipping, all Raymarine products are subjected to comprehensive testing and
quality assurance programs. If you do experience problems with your product this section will help
you to diagnose and correct problems in order to restore normal operation.
If after referring to this section you are still having problems with your product, please refer to the
Technical support section of this manual for useful links and Raymarine Product Support contact
details.

21.2 Diagnostic product information

Diagnostic product information can be viewed from your MFD, for products networked using
SeaTalkhs ® and SeaTalkng ® / NMEA 2000.
To view diagnostic product information, select View all product info from the Diagnostics pop over
menu: Homescreen > Settings > Network > Diagnostics > View all product info.

Saving product information

Diagnostic product information can be saved to MicroSD card for off boat records.
With the Diagnostics product information page displayed:
1. Select Save data.
2. Select the storage device you want to save the data to.
3. Enter a filename.
4. Select Save.
5. Select OK.
A .json file will be saved, using your chosen filename to your memory card.
You may view the file using a most standard notepad applications.

342
21.3 Power up troubleshooting
Product does not turn on or keeps turning off
Possible causes Possible solutions
Blown fuse / tripped 1. Check condition of relevant fuses and breakers and connections,
breaker. replace if necessary. (Refer to the Technical Specification section of
your product’s installation instructions for fuse ratings.)
2. If fuse keeps blowing check for cable damage, broken connector pins
or incorrect wiring.
Poor / damaged / 1. Check that the power cable connector is correctly orientated and fully
insecure power supply inserted into the display connector and locked in position.
cable / connections
2. Check the power supply cable and connectors for signs of damage or
corrosion, and replace if necessary.
3. With the display turned on, try flexing the power cable near to the
display connector to see if this causes the unit to restart or lose
power. Replace if necessary.
4. Check the vessel’s battery voltage and the condition of the battery
terminals and power supply cables, ensuring connections are secure,
clean and free from corrosion. Replace if necessary.
5. With the product under load, using a multi-meter, check for high
voltage drop across all connectors / fuses etc, and replace if
necessary.
Incorrect power The power supply may be wired incorrectly, ensure the installation
connection instructions have been followed.

Product will not start up (restart loop)

Possible causes Possible solutions
Power supply and See possible solutions from the table above, entitled ‘Product does not
connection turn on or keeps turning off’.
Software corruption 1. In the unlikely event that the product’s software has become
corrupted, try downloading and installing the latest software from the
Raymarine website.
2. On display products, as a last resort, attempt to perform a ‘Power
on Reset’. Be aware that this will delete all settings / presets and
user data (such as waypoints and tracks), and revert the unit back
to factory defaults.

Warning: Factory reset warning

Performing a factory reset will restore all system and app settings to factory
defaults and erase all user data (such as waypoints, routes, tracks, camera
recordings and photos).

Performing a power on reset — Axiom™

Important:
• Before performing a power on reset ensure you have backed up your settings and user data
(waypoints, routes and tracks) to a memory card.
• You may also want to save any crash logs that are stored on your MFD to memory card for
future reference..
1. Switch off power at the breaker to ensure that the MFD is completely powered off, and not in
Standby mode. Alternatively, remove the power cable from the display.
2. Power on your MFD, and within approximately 10 seconds, swipe your finger from right to left
(opposite direction to powering on) across the Power button swipe area 5 times.
Recovery options are displayed.

Troubleshooting 343
3. Swipe your finger from right to left twice to highlight Wipe data/factory reset.
4. Swipe your finger from left to right once to accept.
5. Swipe your finger from right to left once to highlight Yes .
6. Swipe your finger from left to right once to restore your MFD to factory default settings.
7. When Data wipe complete is displayed, swipe your finger from left to right to restart your MFD.

Performing a power on reset - Axiom Pro

Important:
Before performing a power on reset ensure you have backed up your settings and user data to
a memory card.
1. Switch off power at the breaker to ensure that the MFD is completely powered off, and not in
Standby mode. Alternatively, remove the power cable from the display.
2. Within approximately 10 seconds of powering on your MFD, press and hold the Back and Switch
active buttons until the screen goes black and the Raymarine logo appears.
The MFD will boot into Recovery mode.
3. Use the directional controls to highlight Wipe data/factory reset.
4. Press Ok.
5. Select Yes to restore your MFD to factory default settings.
6. When ‘Data wipe complete’ is displayed, select Reboot system now.

Performing a Power on Reset - eS and gS Series MFDs

1. Power the MFD off.
2. Power the MFD back on.
3. When the Raymarine logo appears press and hold the Power button, until the Initialization
screen is displayed.
4. Press the Waypoint button to restore your MFD to factory default settings.
The MFD will reboot when complete.

344
21.4 Radar troubleshooting
No connection can be made to the scanner
Possible Causes Possible Solution
Radar powered down • If the scanner product has shut down, power it up by opening
the Radar app and selecting the Power icon.
• A Quantum Radar will shut down after 30 minutes if neither a
wired (RayNet) , nor a wireless (Wi-Fi) connection can be made
to a MFD.
Radar not transmitting • Select Transmit for the relevant Radar scanner from the Radar
app.
Missing or incorrect Wi-Fi • If using a wireless (Wi-Fi) connection, check that you have
credentials entered the correct SSID and passcode for your Radar. Both
the SSID and passcode are provided on the Radar scanner’s
packaging, and are also shown on the serial number label on
the underside of the product.
Damaged or disconnected 1. Check that the cable connectors are fully inserted and locked
Power cable / RayNet cable in position.
2. Check the power supply cable and connectors for signs of
damage or corrosion, replace if necessary.
3. With the product turned on, try flexing the cable near to
the display connector to see if this causes the product to
re-boot/loose power, replace if necessary.
4. Check the vessel’s battery voltage, the condition of the battery
terminals and power supply cables, ensuring connections are
secure, clean and free from corrosion, replace if necessary.
5. With the product under load, using a multi-meter, check for
high voltage drop across all connectors/fuses etc (this can
cause the product to reset/turn off), replace if necessary.
6. Check condition of relevant breakers and fuses, replace
if necessary. If the breaker keeps tripping or fuses keep
blowing, contact a Raymarine authorized dealer for assistance.
Open Array power in Off • Ensure Open Array power switch is in the On position.
position
Software mismatch between • Ensure all Raymarine products contain the latest
equipment may prevent available software, check the Raymarine website:
communication www.raymarine.com/software for software compatibility.

Poor image quality

Possible Causes Possible Solution
High network bandwidth • Disconnect Wireless display and close the Wireless display
usage may interfere with a page.
Quantum Radar connected
• Disconnect other devices connected wirelessly.
wirelessly

Displayed bearing is different to the true bearing

Possible Causes Possible Solution
Bearing alignment adjustment • Carry out the Bearing Alignment procedure.
required

Radar will not initialize (Voltage control module (VCM) stuck in “sleep mode”
Possible Causes Possible Solution
Intermittent or poor power Check power connection at VCM. (Voltage at input = 12 / 24 V,
connection Voltage at output = 40 V)

Troubleshooting 345
21.5 GNSS (GPS) troubleshooting
No fix displayed
Possible causes Possible solutions
Geographic location or prevailing conditions Check to see if a fix is obtained in better
preventing satellite fix. conditions or another geographic location.
GNSS (GPS) connection fault. Ensure that external GNSS (GPS) connections
and cabling are correct and fault free.
External GNSS (GPS) receiver in poor location Ensure GNSS (GPS) receiver has a clear view
e.g.: of the sky.
• Below decks.
• Close proximity to transmitting equipment,
such as a VHF radio.
GNSS (GPS) installation problem. Refer to the installation instructions supplied
with your product.

Note: A GNSS (GPS) Status screen is accessible from the display. This provides satellite signal
strength and other relevant information.

21.6 Sonar troubleshooting

Scrolling image is not being displayed
Possible causes Possible solutions
Sonar disabled Enable Ping from the Fishfinder app’s sounder tab: Menu >
Settings > Sounder > Ping.
Incorrect transducer selected Check that the correct transducer is selected in the Fishfinder app’s
Transducer tab: Menu > Settings > Transducer > Ping.
Damaged cables 1. Check that the transducer cable connector is fully inserted and
locked in position.
2. Check the power supply cable and connectors for signs of
damage or corrosion, replace if necessary.
3. With the unit turned on, try flexing the cable near to the display
connector to see if this causes the unit to re-boot/loose power,
replace if necessary.
4. Check the vessel’s battery voltage, the condition of the battery
terminals and power supply cables, ensuring connections are
secure, clean and free from corrosion, replace if necessary.
5. With the product under load, using a multi-meter, check for high
voltage drop across all connectors/fuses etc (this can cause the
Fishfinder applications to stop scrolling or the unit to reset/turn
off), replace if necessary.
Damaged or fouled Check transducer condition, ensuring it is not damaged and is free
transducer from debris/fouling. If necessary, clean or replace your transducer.
After cleaning or replacement coat the transducer using a
water-based anti-fouling paint.
Wrong transducer fitted Check product and transducer documentation and ensure that the
transducer is compatible with your system.

346
 Possible causes Possible solutions
External sonar module: • Check that the unit is correctly connected to the Display or
SeaTalkhs / RayNet network network switch. Check all connections ensuring connections are
problem. secure, clean and free from corrosion, replace if necessary.
External sonar module: Ensure all Raymarine products contain the latest available software,
Software mismatch between check the Raymarine website: www.raymarine.com/software for
equipment may prevent software compatibility.
communication.

No depth reading / lost bottom lock

Possible causes Possible solutions
Transducer location Check that the transducer has been installed in accordance with
the instructions provided with the transducer.
Transducer angle If the transducer angle is too great the beam can miss the bottom,
adjust transducer angle and recheck.
Transducer kicked-up If the transducer has a kick-up mechanism, check that it has not
kicked up due to hitting an object.
Power source insufficient With the product under load, using a multi-meter, check the
power supply voltage as close to the unit as possible to establish
actual voltage when the current is flowing. (Check your product’s
Technical specification for power supply requirements.)
Damaged or fouled Check transducer condition, ensuring it is not damaged and is free
transducer from debris/fouling. If necessary, clean or replace your transducer.
After cleaning or replacement coat the transducer using a
water-based anti-fouling paint.
Damaged cables 1. Check the unit’s connector for broken or bent pins.
2. Check that the cable connector is fully inserted into the unit
and that the locking collar is in the locked position.
3. Check the cable and connectors for signs of damage or
corrosion, replace if necessary.
4. With the unit turned on, try flexing the power cable near to the
display connector to see if this causes the unit to re-boot/loose
power, replace if necessary.
5. Check the vessel’s battery voltage, the condition of the battery
terminals and power supply cables, ensuring connections are
secure, clean and free from corrosion, replace if necessary.
6. With the product under load, using a multi-meter, check for high
voltage drop across all connectors/fuses etc (this can cause the
Fishfinder applications to stop scrolling or the unit to reset/turn
off), replace if necessary.
Vessel speed too high Slow vessel speed and recheck.
Bottom too shallow or too The bottom depth may be outside of the transducers depth range,
deep move vessel to shallower or deeper waters as relevant and recheck.

Poor / problematic image

Possible causes Possible solutions
Targets will appear differently Increase vessel speed.
if your vessel is stationary (e.g.:
fish will appear on the display as
straight lines).
Scrolling paused or speed set too Unpause or increase sonar scrolling speed.
low

Troubleshooting 347
 Possible causes Possible solutions
Sensitivity settings may be Check and adjust sensitivity settings or perform a Sonar reset.
inappropriate for present
conditions.
Damaged cables 1. Check the unit’s connector for broken or bent pins.
2. Check that the cable connector is fully inserted into the
unit and that the locking collar is in the locked position.
3. Check the cable and connectors for signs of damage or
corrosion, replace if necessary.
4. With the unit turned on, try flexing the power cable near
to the display connector to see if this causes the unit to
re-boot/loose power, replace if necessary.
5. Check the vessel’s battery voltage, the condition of the
battery terminals and power supply cables, ensuring
connections are secure, clean and free from corrosion,
replace if necessary.
6. With the product under load, using a multi-meter, check
for high voltage drop across all connectors/fuses etc (this
can cause the Fishfinder applications to stop scrolling or
the unit to reset/turn off), replace if necessary.
Transducer location • Check that the transducer has been installed in accordance
with the instructions provided with the transducer.
• If a transom mount transducer is mounted too high on
the transom it may be lifting out of the water, check that
the transducer face is fully submerged when planing and
turning.
Transducer kicked-up If the transducer has a kick-up mechanism, check that it has
not kicked up due to hitting an object.
Damaged or fouled transducer Check transducer condition, ensuring it is not damaged and is
free from debris/fouling. If necessary, clean or replace your
transducer.
After cleaning or replacement coat the transducer using a
water-based anti-fouling paint.
Damaged transducer cable Check that the transducer cable and connection is free from
damage and that the connections are secure and free from
corrosion.
Turbulence around the transducer Slow vessel speed and recheck.
at higher speeds may affect
transducer performance
Interference from another 1. Turn off the transducer causing the interference.
transducer
2. Reposition the transducers so they are farther apart.
Unit power supply fault Check the voltage from the power supply, if this is too low it
can affect the transmitting power of the unit.

348
21.7 Camera troubleshooting
Video not displayed
Possible causes Possible solutions
Incorrect power up sequence Your MFD needs to be powered up before your camera to enable
the MFD to provide the camera with a valid IP address.
Camera not compatible. Ensure the camera feed and network settings are compatible:
• Camera feed should be set to 720p max.
• Network should be set to obtain network address automatically
(DHCP).
• Anonymous login should be enabled.
Too many IP feeds on Displaying multiple feeds on multiple MFDs simultaneously may
network. cause some feeds to not be displayed. Try viewing less feeds.
Problem with the camera 1. Check the unit’s connector for broken or bent pins.
connections.
2. Check that the cable connector is fully inserted into the unit
and that the locking collar is in the locked position.
3. Check the cable and connectors for signs of damage or
corrosion, replace if necessary.
4. With the unit turned on, try flexing the power cable to see if this
causes the unit to re-boot/loose power, replace if necessary.
Problem with power supply • Check the power connections to the camera, JCU, and PoE
to the camera or thermal injector (if used).
camera’s JCU (if used as the
• Ensure that the power switch / breaker is on.
primary controller)
• Check the fuse / breaker state.
Camera is in Standby mode. Use the camera controls (either the Camera app or a Thermal
camera’s JCU) to “wake” the camera from standby.

PTZ cameras — Erratic or unresponsive controls

Possible causes Possible solutions
Network problem. • Check that the controller and camera are correctly connected
to the network.
• If used, check the status of the network switch.
• Check that RayNet cables are free from damage.
Control conflict, e.g. caused Ensure that no other controllers are in use at the same time.
by multiple users at different
stations.
Problem with the controller. • Check power / network cabling to the controller and PoE injector,
if used.
• Check other controllers, if available.

Cannot switch between camera feeds

Possible causes Possible solutions
Camera is not a dual payload Only “dual payload” (dual lens) cameras support feed switching.
model.

Troubleshooting 349
Noisy image
Possible causes Possible solutions
Poor quality or faulty cabling. • Ensure cable runs are no longer than they need to be.
• Use only high quality shielded cable suitable for the marine
environment.
Cable is picking up • Ensure you are using a high quality shielded cable.
electromagnetic interference
• Ensure proper cable separation, for example do not run data and
(EMI) from another device.
power cables in close proximity with each other.
• In certain conditions it may be necessary to fit suppression
ferrites to cabling to eliminate interference.

Image too dark or too light

Possible causes Possible solutions
Brightness set too low. Check MFD brightness and adjust if necessary.
The contrast and / or Check Camera brightness and contrast, adjust if necessary.
brightness settings in the
Camera app are set too low.
The Scene Mode is not When viewing a thermal camera feed, a particular environment may
appropriate for the current benefit from using a different Scene Mode setting. For example, a
conditions. very cold background (such as the sky) could cause the camera to
use a wider temperature range than appropriate. Adjust the Scene
as appropriate.

Image freezes momentarily

Possible causes Possible solutions
FFC (Flat Field Correction). A Thermal camera’s image will pause momentarily on a periodic
basis during the Flat Field Correction (FFC) cycle. Just prior to the
FFC, a small green square may appear in the upper left corner of
the screen.

Image is inverted (upside down or mirror image)

Possible causes Possible solutions
Vertical or Horizontal flip Check the image flip controls to ensure they are set correctly for
control incorrectly set your installation.

350
21.8 Augmented Reality (AR) Troubleshooting
AR options not available in Video app
Possible causes Possible solutions
Wrong camera selected. Ensure that the correct AR-compatible camera has been
selected in the Video app menu.
Compatible camera not detected. 1. Ensure your camera is AR compatible.
2. Ensure your camera is correctly installed and networked
to your MFD.
AR200 not detected. 1. Ensure your AR200 is correctly installed and on the same
network as the MFD from which you are using the AR
features.
Incorrect LightHouse™ 3 software Ensure that your MFD is running LightHouse™ 3 version 3.7
version. or above.
AR options turned off. The Compass bar, AIS, Waypoint and Chart object flags can
be enabled and disabled from the ClearCruise settings page
(Video app > Menu > Settings > ClearCruise). Ensure relevant
options are enabled.
Note:
For AIS flags to be displayed, compatible AIS hardware
must be operational and connected to the same network
as your MFD.

AR flags do not appear directly above on-screen target

Possible causes Possible solutions
AIS update rate Depending on the classification of the target’s AIS hardware,
transmitted position updates may be sent up to 3 minutes
apart and therefore the flag may appear up to 3 minutes
behind the actual onscreen target.
Camera Field of View (FOV) set Ensure that the FOV setting reflects your camera’s horizontal
incorrectly. FOV. Check your camera’s documentation for FOV
specifications.
AR200 interference If your AR200 is installed in a location which includes a
source of magnetic interference large enough to affect AR
flag placement, you may need to re-install the AR200 in a
different location.
Deviation too high 1. Reset the AR200 calibration by selecting Reset from
the AR200 calibration page: Homescreen > Settings >
Network > Data sources > Heading > Raymarine AR200
Attitude > Calibrate.
2. If the problem persists, you may need to move your
AR200 to a location with less magnetic interference.

Troubleshooting 351
21.9 Wi-Fi troubleshooting
Before troubleshooting problems with your Wi-Fi connection, ensure that you have followed the Wi-Fi
location requirements guidance provided in the relevant installation instructions and performed a
power cycle/reboot of the devices you are experiencing problems with.

Cannot find network

Possible cause Possible solutions
Wi-Fi not currently enabled on devices. Ensure Wi-Fi is enabled on both Wi-Fi devices
and rescan available networks.
Some devices may automatically turn off Wi-Fi Power cycle / reboot devices and rescan
when not in use to save power. available networks.
Device not broadcasting. 1. Try to enable broadcasting of the device’s
network using the Wi-Fi settings on the
device you are trying to connect to.
2. You may still be able to connect to the
device, when it is not broadcasting, by
manually entering the device’s Wi-Fi Name
/ SSID and passphrase in the connection
settings of the device you are trying to
connect.
Devices out of range or signal being blocked. Move devices closer together or, if possible
remove the obstructions and then rescan
available network.

Cannot connect to network

Possible cause Possible solutions
Some devices may automatically turn off Wi-Fi Power cycle/reboot devices and retry the
when not in use to save power. connection.
Trying to connect to the wrong Wi-Fi network Ensure you are trying to connect to the correct
Wi-Fi network, the Wi-Fi network’s name can be
found in the Wi-Fi settings on the broadcasting
device (the device that you are trying to connect
to).
Incorrect network credentials Ensure you are using the correct passphrase,
the Wi-Fi network’s passphrase can be found in
the Wi-Fi settings on the broadcasting device
(the device that you are trying to connect to).
Bulkheads, decks and other heavy structure 1. Try repositioning the devices so the
can degrade and even block the Wi-Fi signal. structure is removed from the direct line of
Depending on the thickness and material used sight between the devices, or
it may not always be possible to pass a Wi-Fi
2. If possible use a wired connection instead.
signal through certain structures
Interference being caused by other Wi-Fi 1. Change the Wi-Fi Channel of the device
enabled or older Bluetooth enabled devices you are trying to connect to and retry the
(Bluetooth and Wi-Fi both operate in the 2.4 GHz connection. You can use free Wi-Fi analyzer
frequency range, some older bluetooth devices apps on your smart device to help you
may interfere with Wi-Fi signals.) choose a better channel (channel with least
traffic).
2. Temporarily disable each wireless device
in turn until you have identified the device
causing the interference.

352
 Possible cause Possible solutions
Interference caused by other devices that use Temporarily switch off each device in turn until
the 2.4GHz frequency See list below of some you have identified the device causing the
common devices that use the 2.4GHz frequency: interference, then remove or reposition the
offending device(s).
• Microwave ovens
• Fluorescent lighting
• Cordless phones / baby monitors
• Motion sensors
Interference caused by electrical and electronic Temporarily switch off each item in turn until
devices and associated cabling could generate you have identified the device causing the
an electromagnetic field which may interfere interference, then remove or reposition the
with the Wi-Fi signal. offending device(s).

Connection extremely slow and or keeps dropping out

Possible cause Possible solutions
Wi-Fi performance degrades over distance so • Move devices closer together.
products farther away will receive less network
• For fixed installations such as a Quantum
bandwidth. Products installed close to their
Radar, enable the Wi-Fi connection on an
maximum Wi-Fi range will experience slow
MFD installed closer to the device.
connection speeds, signal drop outs or not
being able to connect at all.
Interference being caused by other Wi-Fi 1. Change the Wi-Fi Channel of the device
enabled or older Bluetooth enabled devices you are trying to connect to and retry the
(Bluetooth and Wi-Fi both operate in the 2.4 GHz connection. You can use free Wi-Fi analyzer
frequency range, some older bluetooth devices apps on your smart device to help you
may interfere with Wi-Fi signals.) choose a better channel (channel with least
traffic).
2. Temporarily switch off each device in turn
until you have identified the device causing
the interference, then remove or reposition
the offending device(s).
Interference from devices on other vessels. 1. Change the Wi-Fi Channel of the device
When in close proximity to other vessels, for you are trying to connect to and retry the
example, when moored up in a marina, many connection. You can use free Wi-Fi analyzer
other Wi-Fi signals may be present. apps on your smart device to help you
choose a better channel (channel with least
traffic).
2. If possible, move your vessel to a location
with less Wi-Fi traffic.

Network connection established but no data

Possible cause Possible solutions
Connected to the wrong network. Ensure that your devices is connected to the
correct network.
Device software incompatibility Ensure both devices are running the latest
available software.
It may be possible that the device has become 1. Try updating software to a later version, or
defective
2. try reinstalling the software.
3. Obtain new replacement device.

Troubleshooting 353
Mobile application running slowly or not at all
Possible cause Possible solutions
Raymarine app not installed Install mobile app from relevant app store.
Raymarine app version not compatible with MFD Ensure mobile app and MFD software are latest
software available versions.
Mobile apps not enabled on MFD Enable “Viewing only” or “Remote Control” as
required in the Mobile Apps setting on your
MFD.

21.10 Wireless display troubleshooting

Cannot connect to wireless display
Possible cause Possible solutions
Some Miracast compatible but non certified Disable Wi-Fi Sharing on your MFD and retry
devices may not be able to connect with Wi-Fi connection.
Sharing enabled.
WiFi Sharing has been enabled or disable since Try power cycling devices and trying again.
the wireless display was first connected. Depending on dongle used a factory reset may
be required to establish a connection.
Missed confirmation on wireless display Restart connection procedure and ensure you
check the wireless display for confirmation
dialogs.
Wireless display too far away Try moving the wireless display closer to the
MFD and retry connection.
Chromecast devices are not supported. Purchase a Miracast compatible device.

Poor performance
Possible cause Possible solutions
High video processing demand. The Camera app, Raymarine mobile app
connections can interfere with the wireless
display performance as they use shared video
processing resource. Try switching off video
feeds and/or mobile app connections.
Wireless display too far away Try moving the wireless display closer to the
MFD and retry connection.

Wireless display disconnects

Possible cause Possible solutions
Changing the Wi-Fi Sharing option on your MFD Do not change Wi-Fi sharing options whilst
will cause the wireless display to disconnect. connected to a wireless display.
Wireless display may require factory reset to
re-establish connection.
Quantum wireless pairing process will cause Do not pair with a Quantum Radar whilst wireless
wireless display to disconnect. display connection is active.
Wireless display too far away Try moving the wireless display closer to the
MFD and retry connection.

354
21.11 Data troubleshooting
Instrument, engine or other system data is unavailable at all displays
Possible causes Possible solutions
Data is not being received at the display(s). • Check transmitted data is compatible with
your display. Refer to MFD supported PGN list.
• Check the data bus (e.g. SeaTalk ng) wiring
and connections.
Data source (e.g. instrument display or engine • Check the source of the missing data (e.g.
interface) is not operating. instrument display or engine interface).
• Check power to the data bus.
Software mismatch between equipment may • Check the Raymarine website and ensure
prevent communication. all your Raymarine products have the latest
software.

Instrument or other system data is missing from some but not all displays
Possible causes Possible solutions
Network connection problem. • Check that all required equipment is
connected to the same network.
• Check correct operation of network switch,
if used.
• Check network cabling is correct and free
from damage.
Software mismatch between equipment may Check all MFDs are using the same version of
prevent communication. software.

21.12 Touchscreen troubleshooting

Touchscreen does not operate as expected.
Possible causes Possible solutions
Touch lock is enabled. Disable TouchLock, using the power button..
Screen is not being operated with bare fingers, Bare fingers must make contact with the screen
for example gloves are being worn. for correct operation. Alternatively you may use
conductive gloves.
Saltwater deposits on the screen. Carefully clean and dry the screen with a damp
non-abrasive cloth.

Troubleshooting 355
356
Chapter 22: Technical support

Chapter contents
• 22.1 Raymarine product support and servicing on page 358
• 22.2 Learning resources on page 360

Technical support 357

22.1 Raymarine product support and servicing
Raymarine provides a comprehensive product support service, as well as warranty, service, and
repairs. You can access these services through the Raymarine website, telephone, and e-mail.
Product information
If you need to request service or support, please have the following information to hand:
• Product name.
• Product identity.
• Serial number.
• Software application version.
• System diagrams.
You can obtain this product information using diagnostic pages of the connected MFD.
Servicing and warranty
Raymarine offers dedicated service departments for warranty, service, and repairs.
Don’t forget to visit the Raymarine website to register your product for extended warranty benefits:
http://www.raymarine.co.uk/display/?id=788.
Region Contact
United Kingdom (UK), EMEA, and • E-Mail: [email protected]
Asia Pacific
• Tel: +44 (0)1329 246 932
United States (US) • E-Mail: [email protected]
• Tel: +1 (603) 324 7900

Web support
Please visit the “Support” area of the Raymarine website for:
• Manuals and Documents — http://www.raymarine.com/manuals
• Technical support forum — http://forum.raymarine.com
• Software updates — http://www.raymarine.com/software
Worldwide support
Region Contact
United Kingdom (UK), EMEA, and • E-Mail: [email protected]
Asia Pacific
• Tel: +44 (0)1329 246 777
United States (US) • E-Mail: [email protected]
• Tel: +1 (603) 324 7900 (Toll -free: +800 539 5539)
Australia and New Zealand • E-Mail: [email protected]
(Raymarine subsidiary)
• Tel: +61 2 8977 0300
France • E-Mail: [email protected]
(Raymarine subsidiary)
• Tel: +33 (0)1 46 49 72 30
Germany • E-Mail: [email protected]
(Raymarine subsidiary)
• Tel: +49 (0)40 237 808 0
Italy • E-Mail: [email protected]
(Raymarine subsidiary)
• Tel: +39 02 9945 1001
Spain • E-Mail: [email protected]
(Authorized Raymarine distributor)
• Tel: +34 96 2965 102
Netherlands • E-Mail: [email protected]
(Raymarine subsidiary)
• Tel: +31 (0)26 3614 905

358
 Region Contact
Sweden • E-Mail: [email protected]
(Raymarine subsidiary)
• Tel: +46 (0)317 633 670
Finland • E-Mail: [email protected]
(Raymarine subsidiary)
• Tel: +358 (0)207 619 937
Norway • E-Mail: [email protected]
(Raymarine subsidiary)
• Tel: +47 692 64 600
Denmark • E-Mail: [email protected]
(Raymarine subsidiary)
• Tel: +45 437 164 64
Russia • E-Mail: [email protected]
(Authorized Raymarine distributor)
• Tel: +7 495 788 0508

Viewing product information (LightHouse™ 3)

Use the Settings menu to view hardware and software information about your MFD, and connected
products.

1. Select Settings, from the Homescreen.

The Getting started menu contains hardware and software information for your MFD.
2. You can view further information about your MFD, or view information about products networked
using SeaTalkhs ® and SeaTalkng ® / NMEA 2000, by selecting the Network tab, then:
i. to display detailed software information and your MFD’s network IP address, select your
MFD from the list.
ii. to display detailed diagnostics information for all products, select Product info from the
Diagnostics pop over menu.

Technical support 359

22.2 Learning resources
Raymarine has produced a range of learning resources to help you get the most out of your products.

Video tutorials
Raymarine official channel on YouTube:
• YouTube
LightHouse™ 3 tips and tricks:
• Raymarine website

Video Gallery:
• Raymarine website

Note:
• Viewing the videos requires a device with an Internet connection.
• Some videos are only available in English.

Training courses
Raymarine regularly runs a range of in-depth training courses to help you make the most of your
products. Visit the Training section of the Raymarine website for more information:
• http://www.raymarine.co.uk/view/?id=2372

Technical support forum

You can use the Technical support forum to ask a technical question about a Raymarine product
or to find out how other customers are using their Raymarine equipment. The resource is regularly
updated with contributions from Raymarine customers and staff:
• http://forum.raymarine.com

360
Appendix A NMEA 0183 sentence support
Sentence Description Transmit Receive
APB Heading / Track controller pilot • •
sentence “B”
BWC Bearing & distance to waypoint — great • •
circle
BWR Bearing & distance to waypoint — • •
rhumb line
DBT Depth below transducer • •
DPT Depth • •
GGA GNSS (GPS) fix data • •
GLL Geographic position lat/long • •
GSA GNSS (GPS) DOP & active satellites • •
GSV GNSS (GPS) satellites in view • •
MTW Water temperature • •
MWV Wind speed & angle • •
RMA Recommended minimum specific • •
Loran C data
RMB Recommended minimum navigation • •
information
RMC Recommended minimum specific • •
GNSS (GPS) data
RSD Radar system data • •
TTM Tracked target message • •
VHW Water speed and heading • •
VLW Dual ground/water distance • •
VTG COG (Course Over Ground) & ground • •
speed
ZDA Time & date • •

NMEA 0183 sentence support 361

Appendix B NMEA 2000 PGN support
PGN Description Transmit Receive
59392 ISO Acknowledgment • •
59904 ISO Request • •
60928 ISO Address Claim • •
126208 NMEA - Request group function • •
126464 Receive/Transmit PGN's group function • •
126992 System Time • •
126996 Product Information • •
127237 Heading/Track Control •
127245 Rudder •
127250 Vessel Heading • •
127488 Engine Parameters, Rapid Update •
127489 Engine Parameters, Dynamic •
127493 Transmission Parameters, Dynamic •
127496 Trip Parameters, Vessel •
127497 Trip Parameters, Engine •
127498 Engine Parameters, Static •
127505 Fluid Level •
127506 DC Charge Status •
128259 Speed • •
128267 Water Depth • •
128275 Distance Log • •
129025 Position, Rapid Update • •
129026 COG & SOG, Rapid Update • •
129029 GNSS Position Data • •
129033 Time & Date • •
129038 AIS Class A Position Report •
129039 AIS Class B Position Report •
129040 AIS Class B Extended Position Report •
129041 AIS Aids to Navigation (AtoN) Report •
129044 Datum • •
129283 Cross Track Error • •
129284 Navigation Data • •
129291 Set & Drift, Rapid Update • •
129301 Time to/from Mark •
129539 GNSS DOPs •
129540 GNSS Sats in View • •
129545 GNSS RAIM Output •
129550 GNSS Differential Correction Receiver •
Interface
129551 GNSS Differential Correction Receiver •
Signal
129793 AIS UTC and Date Report •
129794 AIS Class A Static and Voyage Related •
Data
362
 PGN Description Transmit Receive
129801 AIS Addressed Safety Related Message •
129802 AIS Safety Related Broadcast Message •
129808 DSC call information •
129809 AIS Class B "CS" Static Report, Part A •
129810 AIS Class B •
130306 Wind Data • •
130310 Environmental Parameters • •
130311 Environmental Parameters •
130576 Small Craft Status •
130577 Direction Data • •
130578 Vessel Speed Components •

Raymarine® provides field programmability of the Device and System Instances within PGN 60928 which can
be commanded via use of PGN 126208 as required by the latest NMEA 2000 standard.

NMEA 2000 PGN support 363

Appendix C Document change history
Document
revision and Software
(Date) version Changes
81370–14 LH3.11 • Added new Responder Messaging feature to Homescreen chapter.
(10–2019)
• Added new iTC–5 Calibration feature to Set up chapter.
• Added new Fishidy Sync mobile app to to Mobile app support chapter.
• Updated SAR patterns with Expanding Square pattern in the Chart app
chapter.
• Added new Victron app to LightHouse third-party apps chapter.
• Updated Video app chapter with Dual streaming.
• Added M-Series settings compatibility table to Video app chapter.
• Added Pilot track mode and Search route arrival to the Alarm settings
table in the Homescreen chapter.
81370–13 LH3.10.71 • Added M300-Series maritime camera to compatible cameras in
(09–2019) ClearCruise™ chapter.
81370–12 LH3.10 • Added new camera settings to Video app chapter.
(07–2019)
• Added new Race Sailing features, Race Start Line and Race Timer to
the Chart app and Dashboard app.
• Added new Responder setup information to the Homescreen chapter and
SITREP feature toChart app chapter.
• Added new SR200 diagnostics to the Audio app chapter.
• Updated SR200 network requirements in the Weather mode chapter.
• Added new PDF viewer app chapter.
• Updated data overlay and sidebar data items table with new wind data.
• Added details of new Buoyweather,Shadow-Caster, PredictWind and
Offshore to LightHouse™ apps.
81370–11 LH3.9 • Added new Blank sectorsto Radar app chapter.
(04–2019)
• Added ClearCruise™ Augmented Reality support and installation for
M100/M200 series thermal cameras to ClearCruise chapter.
• Added new Fusion Multi-zone volume control to Audio app.
• Updated UAV app with DJI Mavic 2 Pro and DJI Mavic 2 zoom drone
support.
• Added new RealBathy real-time sonar map generator feature to the Chart
app chapter.
• Added new Sailing laylines feature to the Chart app chapter.
• Updated Dashboard app with sailing page and sailing dials.
• Changed Sonar app to Fishfinder app, document wide.
• Updated Weather chapter and Audio app chapter with SR200
compatibility.
• Updated Boat details section in the Homescreen chapter with new Tank
calibration options.
• Added newYamaha engine integration app chapter.

364
 Document
revision and Software
(Date) version Changes
81370–10 LH3.8 • Added new Search and Rescue (SAR) Patterns feature to Chart app
(12–2018) chapter.
• Added new Collision Avoidance and Target Intercept features to Chart
app chapter.
• Added Install third-party apps to Lighthouse third-party apps chapter.
• Updated Chart app with Chart sync setting.
• Added Regulatory approvals to settings.
• Updated Limitations on use.
• Updated Data Overlays with Loran Data Overlays.
• Added Rudder bar to Sidebar.
• Updated Audio app with JL Audio compatibility.
81370–9 LH3.7 • Added new ClearCruise™ chapter which documents Object Detection and
(09–2018) Augmented Reality.
• Added details of new Display estimated range setting for ClearCruise™
Object detection in Video app.
• Updated Video app settings menu section with new ClearCruise™ options.
• Added details of new Seakeeper and Mazu LightHouse™ apps.
• Expanded My data details to include MFD settings import and export
(backup).
• Added new tasks for Saving user data, saving MFD settings, restoring
user data and restoring MFD settings.
• Added custom “Digital switching” pages export feature to Dashboard app.
• Added AR200 to hardware compatibility table.
• Moved Axiom XL compatibility from LightHouse V3.5 to V3.7.
81370–8 LH3.6 • Updated software revision and new features section to reflect V3.6.
81370–7
• Added description of each available MFD app to Homescreen section.
(07–2018)
• Added new UAV app chapter.
• Added UAV chart integration details to Chart app chapter.
• Updated hardware compatibility list to include Mavic Pro and Mavic Pro
Platinum UAVs.
81370–6 LH3.5 • Updated software revision and new features section to reflect V3.5.
(06–2018)
• Added support for MFD alarms via Bluetooth speaker.
• Updated list of compatible entertainment systems in Audio app chapter
to include new Fusion units and SR150, also added new column to list
supported network connections.
• Updated Audio app chapter settings menu options to include Balance
and Fade.
• Updated Audio app chapter details to allow for multiple systems to be
connected and controlled.
• Added PDF viewer details.
• Updated demo profiles section to detail the new demo movie option.
• Updated NMEA 2000 PGN list to include 127506 and 129808.
• Updated compatible MFDs to include Axiom XL
• Updated product documentation to include Axiom XL installation
instructions.
• Added new details for using SonarChart Live to Chart app chapter.
Document change history 365
 Document
revision and Software
(Date) version Changes
• Updated LH2 Vs LH3 feature gap on eS and gS Series.
• Added LH3 version Vs supported hardware list to appendix.
• Updated Radar chapter to include Magnum open array details.
• Added new details/requirements for LH apps.
81370–5 LH3.4 • Added LightHouse 2 to LightHouse 3 upgrade procedure to applicable
(02–2018) documents.
• Updated software revision to V3.4.
• Updated New features section to reflect V3.4 new features.
• Change chapter title for ‘General app settings’ to ‘General information’.
• Added new definition of MFD app and LightHouse app to General info
chapter.
• Updated shortcuts page details to include Bluetooth speaker volume
control.
• Added new Bluetooth volume control instructions.
• Added new Bluetooth speaker pairing procedure.
• Updated Homescreen screenshots to reflect LH3.4 UI throughout the
manual.
• Updated Homescreen overview to include details of Apps icon.
• Updated status area details to include Bluetooth volume controls and
Disengage autopilot icon.
• Added Bluetooth and Disengage autopilot icons to Status area table.
• Removed Wi-Fi symbols from status area icons table and grouped icons
in separate tables.
• Updated trip log details to include new combined Fuel/trip manager
details and settings.
• Alarms section re-written to include examples of Blue, Orange and Red
notifications.
• Added Alarm history and Alarm indicators to Alarms section.
• Added Digital switching alarm details and example screenshot.
• Added Shared brightness details.
• Added procedure for customizing the splashscreen.
• Added new LightHouse apps chapter, including Wi-Fi and Bluetooth
connection and settings..
• Updated Disengaging autopilot details to include Status area location
of autopilot icon.
• Added new Tides mode details.
• Added new Find nearest feature details.
• Added new ‘Other’ vessel AIS icon and Changed current ‘Other’ icon
to ‘Commercial’.
• Updated Radar chapter to include Quantum 2 support.
• Added Doppler Radar feature.
• Updated Fuel related data items available in Dashboard app.
• Updated Camera app overview to include details of creating unique app
instances on different displays.
• Renamed ‘Camera app’ now ‘Video app’.

366
 Document
revision and Software
(Date) version Changes
81370–4 LH3.3 • Updated New features list to reflect LH3.3.
(11–2017)
• Added RV transducer calibration details.
• Added MFD controls information for eS Series and gS Series.
• Added new LH3 compatible MFDs table.
• Updated Radar target tracking to include AIS targets.
• Updated Radar target settings information to include independent
Reference mode for targets, and new Trails settings.
• Added new Weather mode chapter.
• Updated User interface languages table.
• Added lists of data items available in Dashboard app and for data overlays
and sidebars.
• Added Navionics plotter sync details to Mobile app chapter.
• Added diagnostic product information details to troubleshooting chapter.
• Added LH2 to LH3 upgrade procedure to Appendix.
• Updated RV Depth and intensity setting details.
• Updated shortcuts page information to include new Disable all sounders
option.
81370–3 LH3.2 • Updated software revision to reflect LH3.2.
(09–2017)
• Updated New features section to reflect LH3.2.
• Added User programmable button details for Axiom Pro MFDs.
• Updated Software updates section to reflect updating SeaTalkng
products.
• Added wireless display information, connection details and
troubleshooting.
• Added NMEA0183 setting for Axiom Pro MFDs.
• Added Autorouting related information and procedures.
• Updated Chart selection information to include C-MAP cartography.
• Added AIS symbols tables.
• Updated Chart settings tables to include C-MAP specific and Enhanced
Navionics cartography features support.
• Added Sailing and Navigation dial overview to Dashboard chapter.
• Updated Camera app overview to include analog feeds via an Axiom Pro.
• Updated Audio app compatible entertainment systems to include
compatible Rockford Fosgate and Fusion units.
• Updated Radar troubleshooting to include high network bandwidth.
• Added NMEA0183 supported sentences table.
81370–2 LH3.1 • Updated software revision to reflect LH3.1.
(07–2017)
• Added controls details for Axiom and Axiom Pro
• Added powering on and off details for Axiom Pro.
• Removed Data source type table from Data sources.
• Re-ordered Data source and MDS paragraphs.
• Moved Factory reset procedure to para 3.3.
• Added Pilot controls to shortcuts page.
• Re-ordered memory card paragraphs and added details for Axiom Pro.
Document change history 367
 Document
revision and Software
(Date) version Changes
• Added details for software updating networked MFDs.
• Removed restriction of RMK pilot button in LH3 and added new step for
repeating pairing process on each MFD.
• Updated Homescreen overview to include Disengage pilot icon.
• Added Wi-Fi sharing and Mobile app details to This display setting tab.
• Added new Autopilot tab to Settings menu.
• Added table of available UI languages.
• Removed device disconnection details from External devices options.
• Added new Autopilot control chapter.
• Added details for switching between Sidebars.
• Added camera tracking (Point camera here and Track with camera
controls to Chart and Radar chapters.
• Added details for placing waypoints in RV channels.
• Added details of Sonar scroll back.
• Added details of sensitivity adjustments effecting sonar scroll back.
• Added View mode in RV channel settings to switch between scrolling
and GPS tracking modes.
• Added details of AHRS stabilization control in Sounder tab settings.
• Added new Mobile app support chapter.
• Added document change history to appendix.
81370–1 LH3.0 First release.
(04–2017)

368
Appendix D Hardware compatibility
The table below identifies the LightHouse™ 3 software version required to support the listed hardware.
Software version Hardware
LH3.11 • Victron Energy Venus GX
LH3.10.71 • M300-Series
• SR200 SiriusXM receiver (weather and audio)
• DJI Mavic 2 Pro UAV
LH3.9 • DJI Mavic 2 Zoom UAV
LH3.8 • JL Audio
LH3.7 • AR200 Augmented Reality Sensor
• Axiom XL
LH3.6 • DJI Mavic Pro UAV
• DJI Mavic Pro Platinum UAV
LH3.5 • Fusion 770 and SRX400
• SR150 SiriusXM receiver (audio)
LH3.4 • Magnum Radar
• Quantum 2 Doppler Radar
• RVX1000 sonar module
• Bluetooth speaker
• Axiom XL 16
LH3.3 • SR150 SiriusXM receiver (weather only)
• eS Series (upgraded to LH3)
• gS Series (upgraded to LH3)
LH3.2 • Axiom Pro
• Fusion entertainment systems (NMEA 2000 only)
LH3.1 • Evolution autopilots
• RMK-10
• Quantum Radar
LH3.0 • Axiom

Hardware compatibility 369

Appendix E LightHouse 3 on eS and gS Series
eS Series and gS Series MFDs running the LightHouse™ 2 operating system can be upgraded to run the new
LightHouse™ 3 operating system version 3.3 or greater.

To ensure upgrading is the correct option for you, please ensure you fully understand and accept the
differences between the 2 operating systems, before upgrading.

Upgrade considerations
Before you perform the upgrade, the following considerations need to be taken into account:

Digital switching
Upgrading to LightHouse™ 3 will erase all Digital switching files loaded on your MFD. Once erased, these files
will be unrecoverable, potentially rendering the Digital switching system unusable.
Digital switching solutions must be converted, before performing the upgrade to LightHouse™ 3. Contact
Raymarine Technical Support, who will guide you through the process and perform the necessary file
conversion.

Autopilots
Legacy SeaTalk ® and SPX autopilots cannot be controlled by MFDs running LightHouse™ 3. A Pilot control
head will be required to control legacy autopilot systems.

MFD networking
• LightHouse™ 2 MFDs cannot be connected to the same network as LightHouse™ 3 MFDs.
• a Series, c Series and e Series MFDs cannot be upgraded to LightHouse™ 3 and cannot be connected to
the same network as MFDs running LightHouse™ 3.
• If you have a mixed MFD network all a Series, c Series and e Series MFDs must be permanently
disconnected, before upgrading eS Series and gS Series MFDs to LightHouse™ 3.
• In a mixed Axiom™ / eS Series / gS Series MFD network, it is recommended that an Axiom™ MFD is selected
as the Datamaster. Where this is not desirable, due to your electronics wiring layout, you may notice a
difference in system performance when an eS Series or gS Series MFD is set as Datamaster.

MFD performance
LightHouse™ 3 was developed for use with the latest processing technology, utilized by Axiom™ MFDs.
Performance of eS Series and gS Series MFDs upgraded to use LightHouse™ 3 will be limited to the
processing power available to the MFD.
370
Unsupported features
The following features are only supported by Axiom variant MFDs and will not be available on an eS Series
or gS Series MFD upgraded to run LightHouse™ 3.
• Checking online for software updates.
• The Wireless (Miracast) display.
• LightHouse third-party apps.
• Customizable splashscreen.
• Bluetooth audio output.
• UAV integration
• ClearCruise™ Augmented Reality
Compatible MFDs
The MFDs listed below can be upgraded to run Raymarine’s new LightHouse™ 3 operating system.
eS Series MFDs
eS75 (E70263 eS77 (E70264)
eS78 (E70265) eS97 (E70274)
eS98 (E70275) eS127 (E70275)
eS128 (E70285)

gS Series MFDs
gS95 (E70124) gS95 INV (E70183)
gS125 (E70125) gS125 INV (E70184)
gS165 (E70126) gS165 INV (E70185)
gS195 (E70213)

Feature differences
The table below shows the differences between LightHouse™ 2 R19 and LightHouse™ 3 version 3.3 (LH3.3)
and above, running on an eS Series or gS Series MFD. If in any doubt, contact Raymarine Technical Support
for advice.
Navigation
Feature LightHouse™ 2 LightHouse™ 3
3D chart mode Yes No
Number of Boat icons 2 – changes automatically with 12 – independent selection.
boat type selection.
Boat icon context menu No Yes
Chart measurement ruler Yes No
Chart synchronization — split Yes LH3.8
screen pages
Collision avoidance Yes LH3.8
Enhanced AIS symbols No Yes
Find nearest (info) Yes LH3.4
Fuel manager Yes LH3.4
GRIB weather viewer Yes No
Nearby objects (selection) No Yes
Race sailing features Yes LH3.10
Sailing laylines No LH3.9
SAR (Search And Rescue) patterns Yes LH3.8
Target interception Yes LH3.8
Tide and Current graphs Yes LH3.4
LightHouse 3 on eS and gS Series 371
 Feature LightHouse™ 2 LightHouse™ 3
Waypoint capacity 3,000 10,000
Waypoint search area box Yes No

Data and controls

Feature LightHouse™ 2 LightHouse™ 3
Alarm history Yes LH3.4
Databars Top Databar Sidebar
Available data items 117 LH3.4 = 134
LH3.5 = 137
Dashboard — more available page 10 7
layouts
Dashboard — each app instance No Yes
unique
Digital switching alarm settings Yes LH3.4
Light color theme Yes No
Shared brightness Yes LH3.4

Sonar
Feature LightHouse™ 2 LightHouse™ 3
Channel specific Homescreen No Yes
sonar icons
Number of DownVision and 4 10
SideVision color palettes
Fish alarm Yes No
Historical sensitivity No Yes
Range/zoom controls Standard Enhanced
RealBathy™ No LH3.9
* RealVision™ 3D No Yes
SideVision — Auto range No Yes
Scrollback (sonar history) No Yes
Disable all Sonar from Shortcuts No Yes
page
VRM (Variable Range Marker) Yes No

Note:
* Available when networked to a RV variant Axiom™ or Axiom™ Pro MFD.

Radar
Feature LightHouse™ 2 LightHouse™ 3
Bearing ring Standard Enhanced
Blank sectors No LH3.9
Place waypoints in Radar app Yes No
Radar overlay color options No Yes
True/Relative vector button No Yes
Doppler Radar support No LH3.4

372
Camera / Thermal
Feature LightHouse™ 2 LightHouse™ 3
Align Thermal camera to mobile Yes No
device
ClearCruise ™ Augmented Reality No LH3.7
ClearCruise ™ Object detection No Yes
Single app for both Thermal and No Yes
daylight cameras
Unique Camera app instances No Yes
Camera cycling Yes No
Dual payload camera dual No LH3.11
streaming

Entertainment
Feature LightHouse™ 2 LightHouse™ 3
Bluetooth audio control Yes No
Bluetooth — RCU-3 connection Yes No
PDF viewer app Yes 3.5 (PDF viewer dialog)
3.10
JL Audio No LH3.8
SiriusXM audio Yes LH3.5
Video player (demo movie) Yes LH3.5

General
Feature LightHouse™ 2 LightHouse™ 3
Active alarm indication No LH3.4
Alarm Clock / Timer Yes No
MFD app modes No Yes
Custom splash screens Yes No
Number of Data overlays 2 4
Data overlays movable No Yes
Homescreen — Lat/Lon display No Yes
Homescreen — Move pages Yes No
Homescreen — Time info No Yes
Homescreen customization — Yes No
drag and drop app pages
Menus — close when tapping No Yes
away from menu
NMEA Logging Yes No
LiveView (in menu app display) No Yes
Sidebar No Yes
Simulated — Demo profiles No Yes
Simulator — Move boat here No Yes
Splitscreen app page — pane size No Yes
adjustment
Third-party app installation from No LH3.8
card
Transducer calibration Yes No
User profiles No Yes
LightHouse 3 on eS and gS Series 373
Engine integration
Feature LightHouse™ 2 LightHouse™ 3
Honda ECO mode Yes LH3.4
Trim tab calibration Yes No
Yamaha app No LH3.9

Performing the LightHouse™ 3 upgrade

Performing the upgrade procedure will upgrade all eS Series and gS Series MFDs on the network.
Pre-requisites:
• Your eS or gS Series MFD must be running LightHouse™ 2 Release 15 or greater to perform the upgrade.
Prior releases of LightHouse™ 2 will not recognise the software upgrade file.
• You should back up your user data and any media files before performing the upgrade.
1. Disconnect and remove any a Series, c Series or e Series MFDs from your network.
2. Download the LightHouse™ 3 upgrade file from the Raymarine® website:
i. Go to ww.raymarine.com/software.
ii. Click MFD software.
iii. Click eS & gS Series Models Only.
iv. Follow the instructions to download the upgrade file.
3. Perform a User data backup following the Saving all user data to a memory card procedure.
4. If you have any media files saved on your MFD that you want to keep, these should also be copied to a
MicroSD card following the Copying media files procedure.
5. Copy the downloaded upgrade file to the root directory of your MicroSD card, ensuring that no other
software update files are present on the card.
6. Insert the MicroSD card into a card reader slot on your MFD.
7. Perform the software update procedure:
i. Select Check Card for Updates from the Maintenance menu: (Homescreen > Set-up > Maintenance
> Check Card for Updates).
ii. Select OK.
iii. Select the check box for each MFD that you want to upgrade.

When upgrading from LightHouse™ 2 to LightHouse™ 3 the Available software version column will
remain blank and ‘Re-install’ is displayed. Select and hold on the Available column to confirm the
version number of the software upgrade you are about to install and then select Install.
374
 iv. Select Install now.
The software upgrade procedure will commence. Please be patient and do not power off the MFD whilst
the upgrade is in progress. During the upgrade process the MFD will re-boot. When complete your MFD
will boot up with the new LightHouse™ 3 operating system.
8. Perform a Factory reset following the Performing a settings or factory reset procedure.
9. If applicable, update any Axiom™ MFDs so that the software version matches your upgraded eS or gS
Series MFD.
10. If applicable, add any Axiom MFDs to your system or, add your upgraded eS or gS MFD to a system
already containing Axiom™ MFDs.
11. If requested, select a Datamaster MFD and / or complete the Startup wizard.
In a mixed MFD network it is recommended that an Axiom™ MFD is selected as the Datamaster.

12. If applicable, restore your user data following the Import user data procedure.
13. Familiarise yourself with the new LightHouse™ 3 operating system by reviewing the LightHouse™ 3
operation instructions available from the website.
Saving all user data to a memory card
You can save all user data to one archive file.

With the Homescreen displayed:

1. Ensure you have a memory card (NOT a chart card) inserted into a card slot.
2. Select My Data.
3. Select Import/Export.
4. Select Save Data.
5. Select Save All.
The onscreen keyboard is displayed.
6. Using the keyboard, enter the filename you want to save the file as.
7. Select SAVE.
The select external storage dialog is displayed.
8. Select SD1 (single or top card reader slot) or SD2 (bottom card reader slot).
A confirmation dialog is displayed.
9. Select OK.
Copying media files
Recorded video and images stored in your MFD’s internal storage can be copied to a MicroSD card.
With a MicroSD card inserted into your MFD’s card reader slot:
LightHouse 3 on eS and gS Series 375
From the Homescreen:
1. Select My Files from the My Data menu: (Homescreen > My Data > My Files.
2. Navigate to the required file by selecting folders to see its contents.
3. Highlight the file that you want to copy.
4. Select Copy from the File options.

If you have more than one MicroSD card inserted, you will need to select which card to save the file
to by selecting SD1 or SD2.

5. Select Yes .
The file will now be copied to your MicroSD card.
6. Once the file has copied, select OK in the confirmation dialog.
7. Repeat steps 2 to 5 above for each file that you want to copy.

Performing a settings or factory reset

Performing a Factory reset will erase ALL user data and reset the display’s settings to their Factory default
values. Performing a Settings reset will restore your display’s settings to factory defaults, whilst retaining
user data.
1. Select Settings reset, from the This display menu: Homescreen > Settings > This display > Settings
reset to perform a settings reset.
2. Select Factory reset, from the This display menu: Homescreen > Settings > This display > Factory
reset to perform a factory reset.

Importing user data

You can import user data (i.e.: Waypoints, Routes and Tracks) to your MFD.
1. Insert the MicroSD card that contains your user data files into a card reader slot on your MFD or
connected card reader.
2. Select Import from card from the Import/export page: (Homescreen > My data > Import/export > Import
from card).
3. Select the relevant SD card slot from the file browser and then navigate to your User data file (.gpx).
4. Select the relevant GPX file.
Your user data has now been imported.
5. Select OK.

376
Index Balance ..............................................................303
Crossover ..........................................................303
Diagnostics mode ..............................................304
A Fade...................................................................303
Activate Touchlock ..................................................42 Menu options .................................................... 302
ActiveCaptain ........................................................ 163 Multi-zone ..........................................................304
Adjust Locked heading............................................42 Multi-zone control ..............................................304
Advance waypoint.................................................. 90 Opening ............................................................ 298
Aerial layer ............................................................ 162 Player controls .................................................. 296
AIS Reset..................................................................304
Enhanced symbols...................................... 138, 212 Settings..............................................................303
Enhanced symbols (targets)........................ 136, 213 Source .............................................................. 300
Silent mode........................................... 58, 136, 214 Zones................................................................ 300
Target list ........................................................... 210 Audio controls ...................................................... 296
Target status ............................................... 138, 212 Audio receiver ...................................................... 294
Target symbols ............................................ 136, 211 Augmented Reality ................................................ 274
Target tracking................................................... 210 AIS targets ........................................................ 286
AIS layer ................................................................ 162 AR200 setup......................................................279
AIS, Buddy ............................................................ 285 Camera installation and setup ...........................275
AIS, buddy list.........................................................133 Cartography source .......................................... 286
AIS, target list .........................................................133 ClearCruise settings ......................................... 286
AIS, Target tracking ............................................... 132 Compass bar..................................................... 286
Alarm manager ........................................................69 Flags ......................................................... 282–283
Alarms .....................................................................68 Goto flag ........................................................... 285
Acknowledgement............................................... 73 Range limit ................................................ 286–287
Active...................................................................69 Roll correction................................................... 288
AIS safety messages............................................ 72 Troubleshooting ................................................ 351
Anchor drift .......................................................... 72 Waypoints ......................................................... 286
AX8 camera ......................................................... 73 Augmented Reality, camera FOV ..........................276
Cross track error (XTE)......................................... 72 Augmented Reality, Overview .............................. 282
Dangerous ...........................................................68 Auto acquisition
Dangerous AIS targets.......................................... 71 Data source requirements ................................. 214
Dangerous Radar targets...................................... 71 Auto turn..................................................................92
Deep water arrival ............................................... 72 Automatic linearization .......................................... 291
Digital switching............................................. 73–74 Autopilot
DSC...................................................................... 72 Adjust locked heading .........................................42
Engine.................................................................. 73 Advanced settings ............................................... 91
External speaker .................................................. 73 Control .................................................................88
Fishing range ....................................................... 72 Debug ..................................................................92
Guard zone 1 ......................................................... 71 Disengage .................................................... 89–90
Guard zone 2 ........................................................ 71 Engage or Disengage ..........................................42
History.................................................................. 70 Engaging..............................................................88
Lost Radar targets................................................. 71 Pop-ups................................................................ 91
Low fuel ............................................................... 72 Reset....................................................................92
MOB data type..................................................... 72 Shortcuts.............................................................. 43
Off track ............................................................... 72 Sidebar ................................................................89
Settings................................................................. 71 Standby................................................................89
Shallow water arrival............................................ 72 Status .................................................................. 90
Warning ...............................................................68
Water temperature............................................... 72
Waypoint arrival .................................................... 71 B
Animated weather ..................................................172 Back up
App launcher ........................................................ 326 Settings................................................................64
App pages User data .............................................................64
Creating ...............................................................55 Backup
Customizing .........................................................55 MFD settings........................................................65
Applications.............................................................53 Routes..................................................................64
Apps ........................................................................53 Tracks ..................................................................64
LightHouse ..........................................................24 Waypoints ............................................................64
MFD .....................................................................24 Barbs ..................................................................... 180
AR200 .................................................................. 290 Battery ...................................................................234
Calibration......................................................... 290 Battery data .................................................. 234, 249
Audio app ............................................................. 300 Battery selection...................................................... 78
app controls ...................................................... 296 Bearing mode....................................................... 240
Bird mode ..............................................................207 Tide station ......................................................... 151
Blue Force ....................................................... 84, 139 Tides mode................................................. 109, 150
overview ............................................................ 139 Weather mode ................................................... 109
SITREP ............................................................... 139 Chart app
target symbols ............................................. 136, 211 Laylines.............................................................. 122
Bluetooth Chart detail ............................................................ 162
Audio ............................................................49, 331 Chart,
Connection ........................................................330 Modes ................................................................ 109
Disabling ............................................................330 Cities layer..............................................................175
Enabling .............................................................330 ClearCruise
pairing speaker .............................................49, 331 Augmented Reality ............................................ 277
Settings..............................................................330 Augmented Reality (AR) ..................................... 274
Speaker volume............................................43, 331 Object detection ............................... 274, 279–280
Volume ........................................................42, 326 Coastal mode ........................................................207
Boat data .......................................234, 248–249, 251 COG/SOG filter ....................................................... 60
Boat details.............................................................. 77 Collision avoidance
Tanks Course change ........................................... 144, 146
Calibration................................................. 78–80 Enabling in the Chart app .................................. 142
Calibration points ............................................. 79 Moving target...................................................... 141
Boat Icon ................................................................. 77 Predicted Area of Danger zone .......................... 141
Boat name ............................................................... 77 Speed change .............................................144, 147
Boat type ................................................................. 77 Stationary target ................................................. 141
Brightness ................................................... 42–43, 81 Color gain ............................................................... 191
Buddy, add to list from AR flag ............................. 285 Community edits.................................................... 162
Buoy mode ............................................................207 Compass
Alignment.............................................................92
Linearization ..............................................290–291
C Lock .....................................................................92
Calibration ............................................................ 290 Offset ................................................................... 91
iTC-5 ....................................................................39 Restart..................................................................92
Linearization ..................................................... 290 Compass lock ................................................291–292
RealVision™ 3D.....................................................38 Compass offset...................................................... 291
transducer............................................................39 Compatible entertainment systems.............. 294–295
Calibration lock........................................................92 Compatible hardware ........................................... 369
Calibration, reset ................................................... 291 Connecting
Camera RayControl .........................................................335
Tracking ...................................................... 112, 200 RayRemote ........................................................336
Cartography............................................................ 161 RayView ............................................................. 337
Chart Connection
Boat position...................................................... 166 NMEA 0183 ..........................................................84
ClearCruise ........................................................ 160 Connections
Contours ............................................................ 163 Bluetooth ...........................................................330
Controls ............................................................. 107 Internet ............................................................. 329
Current animation .............................................. 150 Wi-Fi.................................................................. 329
Current graph .................................................... 153 Contact details.......................................................358
Current station ................................................... 152 Controls
Detailed mode ................................................... 109 Chart .................................................................. 107
Field of View (FOV) ............................................. 161 Dashboard .........................................................232
Find nearest....................................................... 156 Fishfinder ........................................................... 184
Fishing mode ..................................................... 109 Radar ................................................................. 198
Layers ........................................................... 111, 162 Video app .......................................................... 261
Motion mode...................................................... 166 Yamaha app...................................................... 246
Orientation .................................................. 166–167 CPA ....................................................................... 221
Race Start Line................................................... 128 Cross track error..................................................... 113
Race Start Line and Race Timer..........................127 Cruise speed ........................................................... 91
Racing mode...................................................... 109 CSP (Commence Search Point) ........................ 115, 118
Radar settings .................................................... 135 Current reading ..................................................... 291
RealBathy........................................................... 154
Search for objects.............................................. 156
Simple mode...................................................... 109
D
Sync view with other charts ............................... 166 Dangerous targets................................................. 135
Tide animation ................................................... 150 Dashboard
Tide bar............................................................... 151 Controls .............................................................232
Tide graph .......................................................... 151 Data ...................................................... 234, 248, 250
 Battery .............................................................. 249 eS Series ............................................................... 374
Boat ...........................................234, 248–249, 251 Export
Depth .................................................................234 Routes..................................................................64
Distance............................................ 235, 248, 250 Settings................................................................64
Engine............................................... 235, 248, 250 Tracks ..................................................................64
Environmental .................................... 236, 248, 251 User data .............................................................64
Fuel ........................................... 236, 248, 250–251 Waypoints ............................................................64
GNSS (GPS)....................................... 236, 248–249 External storage
Heading .................................................... 236, 249 Inserting ...............................................................46
Navigation................................................. 237, 250 Removal ............................................................... 47
Pilot........................................................... 248, 250
Speed ............................................... 237, 248, 250
Time .......................................................... 237, 250 F
Wind........................................................... 238, 251 Factory reset ................................................ 343–344
Data import and export ........................................... 61 File browser.............................................................64
Data items First power up .........................................................35
Data overlays ....................................................... 27 Fishfinder
Sidebar ................................................................ 27 Zoom mode ....................................................... 185
Data master ............................................................. 81 Fishfinder app
Designation.......................................................... 81 App overview..................................................... 184
Multiple ................................................................36 Auto range ......................................................... 185
Selection ..............................................................36 Channels............................................................ 189
Data overlays........................................................... 27 Controls ............................................................. 184
Data sources ........................................................... 37 No source ...........................................................187
Selection .............................................................. 37 No transducer .................................................... 188
Demo Range ................................................................ 185
Movie ................................................................... 57 Scroll back ......................................................... 190
Profiles ................................................................. 57 Waypoints .......................................................... 189
Demo movie Fishing range......................................................... 164
format................................................................... 57 Follow ..................................................................... 113
Depth............................................................ 248, 250 FOV layer .............................................................. 162
Depth data............................................ 234, 248, 250 Fuel data....................................... 236, 248, 250–251
Depth offset.............................................................38 Fuel manager .......................................................... 61
Deviation ............................................................... 291 Set-up ..................................................................63
Diagnostics........................................................... 359 Fusion................................................................... 295
Product info .......................................................342
Digital switching
Exporting pages................................................ 239 G
Importing pages................................................ 239 GNSS (GPS) ............................................................ 60
Disable all Sounders................................................42 GNSS (GPS) data .................................. 236, 248–249
Distance data ....................................... 235, 248, 250 GNSS (GPS) Settings .............................................. 60
Dockside wizard ......................................................92 GNSS/GPS troubleshooting...................................346
Document history ..................................................364 Goto waypoint ........................................................ 113
Documentation ....................................................... 20 GPS......................................................................... 60
Doppler gpx...........................................................................64
Data source requirements ................................ 224 GRIBview ...............................................................328
Overview............................................................223 gS Series ............................................................... 374
Downwind angle...................................................... 77 Guard zone alarms ............................................... 222
Drive polarity ...........................................................92 Gybe ........................................................................93
Drive type ................................................................ 91
Dual range ............................................................. 135
H
Harbor mode .........................................................207
E Hard over time.........................................................93
Easy View .............................................................. 162 Heading data................................................ 236, 249
Engage / Disengage autopilot.................................42 High res bathy ....................................................... 163
Engine connection wizard ....................................... 78 Homescreen ............................................................53
Engine data .......................................... 235, 248, 250
Engine identification wizard .................................... 37
Engine manufacturer ............................................... 78 I
Engine quad display ................................................ 78 Import
Engine selection ...................................................... 78 Settings................................................................64
Entertainment systems ......................................... 294 User data .............................................................64
Environment data .................................. 236, 248, 251 Import tank calibration............................................ 80
Import/export........................................................... 61 Buttons.................................................................32
Initial setup ..............................................................35 Controls ...............................................................32
Internal GNSS (GPS) ............................................... 60 MFD alarms .......................................................... 326
Internet connection .............................................. 329 MFD settings
IP address............................................................. 359 Import...................................................................65
IRPCS / COLREGS ................................................. 140 Restore ................................................................65
iTC-5 calibration ......................................................39 MicroSD
Adaptor ................................................................45
Inserting ........................................................ 45–46
J Removal ........................................................ 45–46
JL Audio ............................................................... 295 Miracast ...................................................................85
MMSI........................................................................85
Mobile apps........................................................... 334
L Motor phasing .........................................................92
Multiple data sources (MDS).................................... 37
Languages............................................................... 77 Mute ..................................................................... 300
Selection .............................................................. 77 My data.................................................................... 61
Laylines .................................................. 122, 126–127
displaying and interpreting ................................ 125
enabling ............................................................. 124 N
Settings.............................................................. 124
system requirements ......................................... 124 N2K PGNs............................................................. 362
Wind shifts ......................................................... 126 Navigation data ............................................ 237, 250
LightHouse 3 Navigation mode ............................................... 88, 91
Compatible MFDs ....................................... 20, 369 Navionics plotter sync ........................................... 337
LightHouse™ 3 Netflix .................................................................... 327
Tips and Tricks .................................................. 360 New features ........................................................... 21
LightHouse 3 upgrade........................................... 374 NMEA 0183
Lighthouse third-party apps Baud rate .............................................................84
Install..................................................................328 Notifications.............................................................69
LightHouse third-party apps ................................. 326
Background app ............................................... 326
Downloadable....................................................328
O
GRIBview ...........................................................328 Object detection....................................................279
Lumishore .......................................................... 327 ClearCruise settings ......................................... 280
Mazu .................................................................. 327 Offshore mode ......................................................207
Netflix................................................................. 327
Preloaded .......................................................... 327
Seakeeper ......................................................... 327 P
Shadow-Caster .................................................. 327 Pairing
Spotify................................................................ 327 Quantum radar.....................................................48
Victron Energy ................................................... 327 RMK keypad.........................................................48
Limitations on Use ...................................................52 PDF..........................................................................64
Limitations on Use (LoU)..........................................52 PDF Viewer
Linearization ..................................................290–291 controls ............................................................. 309
Locked heading................................................. 88, 91 Opening files .................................................... 308
Lumishore.............................................................. 327 Overview........................................................... 308
Searching a PDF ................................................ 310
PGN support ......................................................... 362
M Pilot data....................................................... 248, 250
Magnetic deviation ............................................... 290 Pilot icon..................................................................88
magnetic interference .......................................... 290 Pilot sidebar.............................................................88
Man Overboard (MOB) ............................................ 74 Point camera here .......................................... 112, 200
MARPA Polar ........................................................................ 77
Data source requirements ................................. 214 Position................................................................... 60
Mazu...................................................................... 327 Power off .................................................................42
Media files ............................................................... 61 Power steering ........................................................92
Memory cards Power troubleshooting .......................................... 343
Compatibility ........................................................ 44 Powering off ..................................................... 34–35
Menus Powering on ......................................................33–34
Settings..........................................................29, 75 Primary MFD ............................................................ 81
Types ...................................................................28 Product information .............................................. 359
Messaging ............................................................... 61 Product support.....................................................358
MFD
R Density............................................................... 156
Height correction ............................................... 156
Race Start Line .......................................................127 RealBathy........................................................... 155
based on waypoints........................................... 128 Visibility.............................................................. 156
creating.............................................................. 128 Waterline to tdcr ................................................ 156
editing or deleting.............................................. 130 RealVision 3D
Race Timer .............................................................127 Controls ............................................................. 185
starting ............................................................... 130 Waypoints .......................................................... 189
Radar Receiver status ....................................................... 171
Antenna size selection...................................... 206 Recovery mode ............................................ 343–344
Bearing alignment............................................. 206 Regulatory approvals ............................................... 17
Blank sectors .................................................... 224 Responder ...............................................................84
Color Gain......................................................... 226 Settings................................................................84
Comparison ...................................................... 200 Rockford Fosgate ................................................. 295
Compatible scanners ........................................ 203 Route .......................................................................98
Controls ............................................................. 198 Capacity ...............................................................98
Dual range ........................................................ 205 Creation ...............................................................98
Features............................................................ 200 Follow ................................................................. 113
Gain .................................................................. 225 Importing............................................................ 100
MARPA ............................................................... 216 List ................................................................ 61, 100
Modes ............................................................... 206 Rudder
Overlay ...............................................................167 Damping ..............................................................92
Powering off...................................................... 204 Limit .....................................................................92
Rain ................................................................... 225 Offset ...................................................................92
Range and Bearing ........................................... 208 Reverse reference ...............................................92
Sea.................................................................... 226 Rudder bar.............................................................. 90
Selecting a scanner .......................................... 205
Sensitivity controls ............................................ 225
Settings............................................................. 226 S
Standby............................................................. 204
Stop transmitting..................................................42 Safe depth, minimum............................................... 78
Target settings................................................... 218 Safe distance......................................................... 135
Timed transmit .................................................. 206 Safe height, minimum .............................................. 78
Radar Doppler Safe width, minimum ............................................... 78
Color palettes ....................................................223 Sail performance ..................................................... 77
Mode..................................................................223 SAR......................................................................... 114
Radar layer ............................................................ 162 creation......................................................... 115, 118
Radar target pattern ................................................................ 114
Automatic acquisition ................................. 216–217 Sector search pattern ......................................... 114
Cancel target ..................................................... 221 SAR Pattern
Cancel targets.................................................... 218 Drifts effects................................................. 116, 120
Clear trails......................................................... 220 Save settings ...........................................................65
Context menu .................................................... 221 Saving
History................................................................ 219 Product information ...........................................342
Information......................................................... 221 SBAS ...................................................................... 60
List ......................................................................217 Screen mirroring......................................................85
Manual acquisition ............................................. 216 Screen resolutions...................................................83
Reference mode ........................................ 218, 220 Screenshot .............................................................. 43
Relative mode.................................................... 218 Sea surface temperature ........................................178
Shown CPA ........................................................ 221 Seakeeper ............................................................. 327
Symbols ............................................................. 215 Search and Rescue, See SAR
Tracking ............................................................. 214 Service Center.......................................................358
Trails (Wakes) .................................................... 220 Settings menu ......................................................... 75
True mode ......................................................... 218 Regulatory approvals............................................ 17
Vectors .............................................................. 219 Shadow-Caster ...................................................... 327
Radar troubleshooting...........................................345 Shared brightness ................................................... 81
Radar without heading .......................................... 136 Shortcuts menu .......................................................42
Radar, target list .....................................................133 Sidebar ....................................................................25
Range ring layer .................................................... 162 Pinning.................................................................26
RayControl.................................................... 334–335 Selection ....................................................... 26, 90
RayRemote ....................................................334, 336 Simulator, See Demo
RayView......................................................... 334, 337 SiriusXM ............................................................... 294
RealBathy ....................................................... 154, 165 SiriusXM weather .................................................. 170
Chart .................................................................. 155 Slew to Cue .................................................... 112, 200
SmartStart...............................................................127
Software Tracks ..................................................................... 101
Compatible MFDs ....................................... 20, 369 Capacity .............................................................. 101
Software updates ..............................................47–48 Creation ............................................................. 102
Software version..................................................... 20 Customize .......................................................... 103
Sonar Interval ............................................................... 103
Channel selection .............................................. 186 List ................................................................ 61, 103
Disable all sounders ............................................42 Trails clearing ....................................................... 220
Gain .................................................................... 191 Trails reset............................................................ 220
History................................................................ 190 Training courses ................................................... 360
Intensity .............................................................. 191 Transducer
Noise filter........................................................... 191 Configuration .......................................................38
Sensitivity controls .............................................. 191 Selection ..............................................................38
Surface filter........................................................ 191 Setup ...................................................................38
TVG (Time Varied Gain) ..................................... 192 Temperature calibration ......................................38
Sonar logs ............................................................. 164 Temperature settings...........................................38
SonarChart Live.............................................. 158, 164 Trip
Enabling ............................................................. 159 Counter................................................................ 61
Tide correction................................................... 159 Trip logs................................................................... 61
Speed data ........................................... 237, 248, 250 Troubleshooting ....................................................342
Speed input ............................................................. 91 Augmented Reality ............................................ 351
Splashscreen customization....................................82 Tutorials .................................................................. 20
Splashscreen reset..................................................83
Splashscreen resolution ..........................................83
Sports fishing......................................................... 163 U
Spotify ................................................................... 327 UAV
Startup wizard .........................................................36 App .................................................................... 319
Status area ..............................................................58 App overview..................................................... 312
Status area icons .....................................................58 Assuming control ...............................................324
Steer to Hdg ........................................................... 90 Chart icon .................................................. 159, 322
Steer to Nav............................................................ 90 Chart integration ........................................ 159, 322
Stop Radar transmitting ...........................................42 Circle me............................................................ 321
Storm cast............................................................... 177 Compatible devices ............................................313
Storm tracks ........................................................... 177 Connection ........................................................ 315
Support forum ...................................................... 360 Controller RC Cable ........................................... 315
Surface observation stations layer .........................175 Controller signal lost ..........................................323
Surface pressure Controls ............................................................ 320
Animated ............................................................173 Critical battery....................................................324
Switching off..................................................... 34–35 Disclaimer .......................................................... 312
Switching on ......................................................33–34 Disconnect......................................................... 321
System Datum ...................................................... 240 Emergency procedures .....................................323
Fish on ............................................................... 321
Flight ................................................................. 320
T Flight data ...........................................................313
Take Screenshot .....................................................42 Getting started ....................................................317
Tank calibration ....................................................... 78 Goto ........................................................... 160, 323
Target tracking ...................................................... 132 Icon ............................................................ 160, 323
Technical support......................................... 358, 360 launching .......................................................... 320
Thermal camera Low battery ........................................................324
Tracking ...................................................... 112, 200 Manual control ...................................................324
third-party apps No connection ................................................... 318
LightHouse third-party apps ............................. 326 No-fly zone..........................................................317
Third-party apps ................................................... 326 pre-requisites......................................................314
Tides layer ............................................................. 162 Precautions ........................................................ 316
Tides mode Record ............................................................... 312
Animation controls............................................. 150 Registration failed .............................................. 319
Animation interval ...............................................167 Restricted airspace .............................................317
Displaying graphs .............................................. 154 Retrieval ............................................................. 321
Time data...................................................... 237, 250 Set up sequence.................................................317
Time to Burn ...........................................................127 Settings...............................................................313
Time/Date format............................................ 80, 239 Splitscreen page.................................................317
Touchlock ................................................................ 43 Sport mode .........................................................313
Track with camera .......................................... 112, 200 Status area..........................................................313
Tracking Take off............................................................. 320
Thermal Camera ......................................... 112, 200 Take photo......................................................... 312
 vectors ....................................................... 159, 322 Animated ............................................................172
Virtual joysticks ...................................................313 Wind fields.............................................................. 177
Uni-controller Wind Radii .............................................................. 177
Functions ............................................................. 33 Wind speed ........................................................... 180
Units ............................................................... 80, 239 Wireless display.......................................................85
Unmute................................................................. 300
Unpairing
RMK keypad.........................................................48 X
Upgrading, software ................................................ 47 XTE,
Upwind angle .......................................................... 77 Restart................................................................. 113
User data ................................................................. 61
Import...................................................................65
Restore ................................................................65 Y
Back up ............................................................64
User interface Yahama app
Languages ........................................................... 77 Controls ............................................................ 246
User programmable button (UPB) ............................41 Yamaha app ................................................. 246, 248
Advanced...........................................................257
data items ..........................................................248
V Data page ......................................................... 249
Variation ............................................................... 240 Engine instances reset.......................................257
Vessel hull type ....................................................... 91 Engine page............................................... 248, 251
Victron Energy....................................................... 327 Engine trim........................................................ 255
Video .................................................................... 260 Fuel flow offset ..................................................257
Feed selection .................................................. 263 Gateway reset....................................................257
Renaming feeds................................................. 261 Overview........................................................... 246
Video app Requirements ................................................... 246
Controls ............................................................. 261 Settings............................................................. 256
Video app pages .................................................. 260 Status
Video Gallery........................................................ 360 Engine warming up ....................................... 254
Video, viewing multiple inputs.............................. 260 Immobilizer lock ............................................ 254
Synchronization............................................. 254
Status indicator ................................................. 254
W Tanks ................................................................ 255
Tanks page ........................................................ 251
Warranty ................................................................358
Transmission ..................................................... 253
Watchbox alerts...................................................... 181
Trim Calibration .................................................257
Wave direction
Troll mode......................................................... 256
Animated ............................................................173
Warning
Wave height
Catalyst ......................................................... 255
Animated ............................................................172
Check engine warning .................................. 255
Wave period
Low oil pressure............................................ 255
Animated ............................................................173
Low voltage................................................... 255
Waypoint .................................................................96
Overheat ....................................................... 255
capacity................................................................96
Steering system ............................................ 255
Goto .................................................................... 113
Water in fuel .................................................. 255
List ....................................................................... 61
Warning indicator.............................................. 255
Placement .......................................................... 189
Waypoint, place from AR flag ............................... 285
Weather
Settings.............................................................. 168
Weather data date.................................................. 171
Weather layers ...................................................... 170
Weather mode............................................... 170, 207
Weather Radar
Animated ............................................................172
Weather Radar layer.............................................. 162
Wi-Fi
Settings............................................................. 329
Wind
Data type .............................................................93
Shift......................................................................93
Wind arrows........................................................... 180
Wind data ...................................................... 238, 251
Wind direction ....................................................... 180
 FLIR Belgium BVBA
Luxemburgstraat 2, 2321 Meer.
Belgium.

Tel: +44 (0)1329 246 700

www.raymarine.com

a brand by